260071 001A_PM_S828NEW PTX_PRM_S828_260071 001 PTX PRM S828

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

User Manual: PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 424 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]



r’



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents1260071‐001A

Introduction

This publication provides information about the commands supported by your printer. The commands are

organized by function groups. Each command has both a brief and a detailed description.

Each command has the following structure:

Name and function description. Information about protocol (IBM® Proprinter XLIII, IBM Personal 2381+,

EPSON FX Series, ANSI 3.64, IPDS® ).

The hexadecimal and decimal codes for the command: n represents variable parameters of the command.

The functions of these parameters are explained in its corresponding command description.

Index of Contents

Chapters Page

Contents 1

Introduction 1

Index of Contents 1

Index of Command Summary in Alphabetical Order 9

Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers. 9

Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present 13

Preface 15

Chapter 1. EPSON/IBM Mode Commands 17

Print and Line Feed Execution 17

Format Control 18

Print Mode 29

Character Set 42

Download Character 44

Bit Image 48

Data Input Control 49

Miscellaneous 51

Chapter 2. Native Emulation Commands 57

Format Control 57

Native Character Set 58

Bar Codes 60

Miscellaneous 66

Chapter 3. ANSI Emulation Commands 71

Character Set Control 71

Character Pitch and Print Modes 74

Horizontal Movements 76

Vertical Movements 78

Interface Control 82

Operating System Control 83

Paper Path Selection 85

Barcode Functions 86

Basic Program Sample 88

Basic Program Printed Output 89

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents2260071‐001A

Chapters Page

Chapter 4. IPDS Commands 91

Overview 91

Physical Medium 91

IPDS Coordinate Systems 92

Processing IPDS Commands 95

IPDS Command Format 96

Acknowledge Requests and Replies 97

IPDS Data 100

Mixing Rules 101

IPDS Operating States 102

Summary of IPDS States and Commands 104

A typical IPDS Command Sequence 107

Error Handling 113

Chapter 5. IPDSProgrammingInformation115

IPDS Initialization Defaults 115

Command Format 116

Supported IPDS Command Codes 117

Command Function Sets 118

Device Control Function Set Commands 118

Text Function Set Commands 149

Image Function Set Commands 158

Graphics Function Set Commands 160

Related Drawing Orders 193

Bar Code Function Set Commands 196

Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) 208

Overlay Function Set Commands 209

Page Segment Function Set Commands 211

Loaded Font Function Set Commands 212

Chapter6.IPDSExceptionReportingCodes215

Command Reject - X'80' 215

Intervention Required - X'40' 215

Equipment Check - X'10' 216

Data Check - X'08' 216

Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04' 216

Specification Check-Graphics - X'03' 218

Specification Check-General - X'02' 220

Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01' 229



Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample231

Text Print Samples 231

Bar Codes 231

Graphics Patterns 232

Graphics Example 233

IPDS Coding Example 238

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents3260071‐001A

Chapters Page

Appendix A. Code Pages 247

EBCDIC Code Pages (IPDS) 247

ASCII Code Pages 293

Character Sets 355

Hexadecimal to Decimal Table 357

Epson FX-series Code Pages 358

ANSI National Variations 361

AppendixB‐Interfaces363

The Parallel Interface 363

The Serial Interface 369

LAN Interface Port 370

USB Interface Port 370



AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference371

Network Configuration Parameters 371

Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the Internal Webpage 373

Managing Multiple Printers Using the Remote Printer 373

Network Interface Summary 373



AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport377



Appendix E- The Remote Printer Management Utility 383

Operating System Compatibility 383

Software Installation and Documentation 383



AppendixF–PrinterDriverSupport385

AppendixG‐ApplicationPaperSourceinIPDS387



Appendix H- Bar Code and OCR Printing Options 389



AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout393

AppendixJAddendum(BarCodes)395

Notices 415

Customer Support 419

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents4260071‐001A

Figures Page

Figure 1.Page Presentation 16

Figure 2.The Physical Medium 92

Figure 3. The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System 93

Figure 4. The Physical-Logical Page Relationship 93

Figure 5. The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page 94

Figure 6. The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page 95

Figure 7. An Example of the IPDS Data Stream 96

Figure 8. A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer 101

Figure 9. The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States 103

Figure 10. The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State 104

Figure 11. The Complete IPDS State Diagram 107

Figure 12. Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page 129

Figure 13. Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position 129

Figure 14. Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium 132

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 1 of 3) 146

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 2 of 3) 147

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 3 of 3) 148

Figure 16. The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System 161

Figure 17. The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits 162

Figure 18. The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space 162

Figure 19. The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium 163

Figure 20. Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area 165

Figure 21. Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area 167

Figure 22. Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space 169

Figure 23. Scale-to-Fit Mapping 170

Figure 24. Center-and-Trim Mapping 172

Figure 25. Position-and-Trim Mapping 173

Figure 26. Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field 199

Figure 27. Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control 201

Figure 28. Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size

Using the Bar Code Data Descriptor 205

Figure 29 Shows an overlay nesting. 210

Figure 30. Bar Code Example in IPDS 232

Figure 31. Graphic Patterns Example in IPDS 233

Figure 32. Graphic Example in IPDS 234

Figure 33. Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program 239

Figure 34. CP00037 USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual 249

Figure 35. CP00260 Canadian French 250

Figure 36. CP00273 Austrian/German 251

Figure 37. CP00274 Belgian Old 252

Figure 38. CP00275 Brazilian 253

Figure 39. CP00277 Danish/Norwegian 254

Figure 40. CP00278 Finnish/Swedish 255

Figure 41. CP00280 Italian 256

Figure 42. CP00281 Japanese English 257

Figure 43. CP00282 Portuguese 258

Figure 44. CP00284 Spanish/Spanish Speaking 259

Figure 45. CP00285 English (UK)/Ireland 260

Figure 46. CP00290 Japanese Katakana 261

Figure 47. CP00297 French/French Azerty 262

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents5260071‐001A

Figures Page

Figure 48. CP00420 Arabic 263

Figure 49. CP00423 Greek (Old) 264

Figure 50. CP00424 Hebrew Bulletin 265

Figure 51. CP00500 International 5/Swiss/Belgian 266

Figure 52. CP00813 Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro 267

Figure 53. CP00833 Korean 268

Figure 54. CP00838 Thai 269

Figure 55. CP00870 Latin 2/ROECE 270

Figure 56. CP00871 Icelandic 271

Figure 57. CP00875 Greek New + euro 272

Figure 58. CP00880 Cyrillic 273

Figure 59. CP00890 Yugoslav (Old) 274

Figure 60. CP00892 OCR-A 275

Figure 61. CP00893 OCR-B 276

Figure 62. CP00924 Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro 277

Figure 63. CP01025 Cyrillic Multilingual 278

Figure 64. CP01026 Latin-5 Turkey 279

Figure 65. CP01097 Farsi 280

Figure 66. CP01112 Baltic Multilingual 281

Figure 67. CP01122 Estonian 282

Figure 68. CP01140 USA/Canada + euro 283

Figure 69. CP01141 Austrian/German + euro 284

Figure 70. CP01142 Danish/Norwegian + euro 285

Figure 71. CP01143 Finnish/Swedish + euro 286

Figure 72. CP01144 Italian + euro 287

Figure 73. CP01145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro 288

Figure 74. CP01146 English/UK + euro 289

Figure 75. CP01147 French + euro 290

Figure 76. CP01148 International 5/Belgian New + euro 291

Figure 77. CP01149 Icelandic + euro 292

Figure 78. USA(CP437) 295

Figure 79. Greek(CP437-G) 296

Figure 80. Croatian(CP437-SLAVIC) 297

Figure 81. Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) 298

Figure 82 .ISO8859/1(Latin1) 299

Figure 83.Multilingual(CP850) 300

Figure 84.Old Greek(CP851) 301

Figure 85.EasternEurope(CP852) 302

Figure 86.Turkish(CP853) 303

Figure 87.Cyrillic(CP855) 304

Figure 88.Turkish(CP857) 305

Figure 89.EuroPCMultilingual(CP858) 306

Figure 90.Portugal(CP860) 307

Figure 91.Hebrew(CP862) 308

Figure 92.Canada/France(CP863) 309

Figure 93.Arabic(CP864) 310

Figure 94.CP864E(Arabic) 311

Figure 95.Denmark/Norway(CP865) 312

Figure 96Russian(CP866) 313

Figure 97.Turkish2(CP867) 314

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents6260071‐001A

Figures Page

Figure 98.OCR-A(CP876) 315

Figure 99.OCR-B(CP877) 316

Figure 100.ISO8859/2(Latin2) 317

Figure 101.ISO8859/3(Latin3) 318

Figure 102.ISO8859/4(Latin4) 319

Figure 103.ISO8859/5(Latin/Cyrillic) 320

Figure 104.ISO8859/8 (Latin 8) 321

Figure 105.ISO8859/9(Latin5) 322

Figure 106.BalticWindows(CP921) 323

Figure 107.Estonian (CP922) 324

Figure 108.ISO8859/15(Latin9) 325

Figure 109.Urdu (CP01006) 326

Figure 110.Arabic Extended (CP1046) 327

Figure 111.ISO8859/6(Latin/Arabic) 328

Figure 112.Farsi(CP1098) 329

Figure 113.Estonian (CP1116) 330

Figure 114.Latvian (Personal Computer) (CP1117) 331

Figure 115.Lthuanian (Personal Computer) (CP1118) 332

Figure 116.CentralEurope(CP1250) 333

Figure 117.Cyrillic(CP1251) 334

Figure 118.Latin1AnsiWindows(CP1252) 335

Figure 119.GreekWindows(CP1253) 336

Figure 120.TurkishWindows(CP1254) 337

Figure 121.HebrewWindows(CP1255) 338

Figure 122.ArabicWindows(CP1256) 339

Figure 123.Batlic Windows (CP1257) 340

Figure 124.MAZOWIA(Polish) 341

Figure 125.GOST(Russian) 342

Figure 126.TASS(Cyrillic) 343

Figure 127.UKRANIAN(oldversion) 344

Figure 128.KOI8-U(newversion) 345

Figure 129. Farsi 1 346

Figure 130. Farsi 2 347

Figure 131.Kamenicky 348

Figure 132.CWI 349

Figure 133.Roman-8 350

Figure 134.IN2 351

Figure 135.Turkish 352

Figure 136. Bulgarian 353

Figure 137.96GREEK 354

Figure 138.CharacterSet1 355

Figure 139.CharacterSet2 356

Figure 140.Hexadecimal to Decimal Table 357

Figure 141. Epson Extended Graphics Character 358

Figure 142. Epson Italic Character 359

Figure 143. Epson Extended Character Variables 360

Figure 144. ANSI National Variations 361

Figure 145. Mode Centronics 368

Figure 146. Mode IEEE 1284 369

Figure 147. Hex Dump of Intelligent Mail Bar Code in IPDS Commands Example 399

Figure 148. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Native Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native) 400

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents7260071‐001A

Figure 149. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Epson/IBM Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1) 400

Figure 150. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in ANSI Commands Example 401

Figure 151. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in MTPL Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1) 401

Figure 152. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native) 402

Figure 153. Hex Dump of example on figure 151 403

Figure 154. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native) 404

Figure 155. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native) 405

Figure 156. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native) 406

Figure 157. Hex Dump of example on figures 154, 155, 156 407

Figure 158. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1) 409

Figure 159. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1) 410

Figure 160. Hex Dump of example on figures 158, 159 411

Figure 161. Bar Code Examples with SEIKOSHA Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1) 413

Figure 162. Hex Dump of example on figure 161 414

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents8260071‐001A

Tables Page

Table 1. 7-bit Substitution 72

Table 2. 8-bit Substitution 73

Table 3. Valid IPDS Command Codes for the Printronix S828 IPDS Printer 97

Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for the 828 IPDS Printer 105

Table 5. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence 108

Table 6. IPDS Initialization Defaults 115

Table 7. Front and Rear with no linking 131

Table 8. Related Drawing Order 193

Table 9. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) 208

Table 10. Exception Reporting Group Codes 215

Table 11. IPDS Coding Example 239

Table 12. Network Interface Summary 373

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer 377

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes 389

Table 15. Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes 391

Table 16. OCR Symbol Subsets 392

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents9260071‐001A

Index of Command Summary in Alphabetical Order

This section contains a summary of commands used on the Printronix S828 model printer. It is divided into 2

separate sections. “Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers” lists all the commands

common to all models, the standard ASCII and the one with Intelligent Print Data Stream (IPDS) option

installed.

“Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present commands that can only be

used when the IPDS option installed.

Common commands for the Printronix S828 model printers

Command Description Page

BEL Buzzer (IBM/EPSON). 51

BEL Bell (ANSI). 83

BS Print and space back one position (IBM/EPSON). 51

BS Back space (ANSI). 76

CAN Cancels line. (EPSON) 49

CAN Cancels data. (IBM) 49

CR Prints all received data and the column counter is set to the left margin

IBM/EPSON) 17

CR Carriage return (ANSI). 76

DC1 Selects printer. (IBM) 49

DC1 Selects printer. (EPSON) 50

DC1 Selects printer (Data Control 1) (ANSI) 82

DC2 Sets 10 cpi printing. (IBM) 29

DC2 Cancels compressed printing. (EPSON) 29

DC3 Deselects printer. (EPSON) 50

DC3 Deselects printer (Data Control 3) (ANSI) 82

DC4 Cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON) 29

DC4 DC4 ESC ! Bar Code Selection 60

DC4 DC4 ESC (GS Prints bar code symbols. 66

DC4 DC4 ESC @ Re-initializes the printer. 66

DC4 DC4 ESC 1 Sets vertical spacing n/180 inch. 57

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1 Sets vertical spacing 12 lines/30 mm. 57

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3 Sets vertical spacing to 3 lines/30 mm. 57

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4 Sets vertical spacing 4 lines/30 mm. 57

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6 Sets vertical spacing 6 lines/30 mm. 58

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8 Sets vertical spacing 8 lines/30 mm. 58

DC4 DC4 ESC A Sets the horizontal spacing to 15, 17.1, 20 CPI. 58

DC4 DC4 ESC D Sends the operator panel messages to the serial I/F. 68

DC4 DC4 ESC g Selects LQ fonts. 58

DC4 DC4 ESC J Sets amplification factor. 66

DC4 DC4 ESC N Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front 2 path. 67

DC4 DC4 ESC p Sets quality printing. 59

DC4 DC4 ESC R String rotation. 67

DC4 DC4 ESC r Digit rotation. 67

DC4 DC4 ESC S Selects character set ISO Character Sets or Code Pages. 59

DC4 DC4 ESC T Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front1 path. 67

DC4 DC4 ESC u Selects the user macros. 68

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents10260071‐001A

Command Description Page

DC4 DC4 ESC Y Selects emulation. 68

DC4 DC4 ESC Z Makes AGA in column. 68

DEL Deletes the last character. (EPSON) 50

DEL Delete (ANSI). 83

ENQ Enquiry (ANSI). 82

ESC Escape (ANSI). 83

ESC - Sets or cancels underlined printing (IBM/EPSON). 29

ESC [ p1 a Horizontal position relative (HPR) (ANSI). 77

ESC [ p1; pn h Sets mode (SM) (ANSI). 87

ESC [ p1 d Vertical position absolute (VPA) (ANSI). 79

ESC [ p1 q Select graphics mode/density (GRM) (ANSI). 86

ESC p1; pn l Resets mode (RM) (ANSI) 84

ESC [ p1; pn v Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions

(Multiple Vertical Tab Set -VTS) (ANSI) 81

ESC ! Sets printing style. (EPSON) 30

ESC # Cancels MSB control. (EPSON) 50

ESC $ Sets the absolute printing position. (EPSON) 18

ESC % Selects user-defined character set. (EPSON) 44

ESC & Defines the user-defined download characters. (EPSON) 44

ESC ( - Sets score line. (EPSON) 30

ESC * Sets dot graphics printing. (IBM , EPSON) 47

ESC / Selects the Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. (EPSON) 19

ESC : Sets 12 CPI. (IBM) 22

ESC : Copies characters from ROM to RAM. (EPSON) 45

ESC ? Reassigns dot graphics mode. (EPSON) 47

ESC @ Initializes the printer. (EPSON) 51

ESC [ - Selects the score line. (IBM 2381 + only) 31

ESC [ I Sets font and pitch of a character. (IBM 2381 + only) 34

ESC [ p1 ' Horizontal position absolute (HPA) (ANSI). 77

ESC [ p1 k Vertical position backward (VPB) (ANSI). 80

ESC [ p1 x Selects national character set (Select National Characters -SNC) (ANSI). 72

ESC [ p1; p2 f Horizontal and vertical position absolute (HVP) (ANSI). 80

ESC [ p1; p2 SP~ Selects emulation (EMU) (ANSI). 85

ESC [ p1; pn { Unidirectional printing (UDP) (ANSI). 76

ESC [ p1; pn } Sets bar code parameters (BC) (ANSI). 86

ESC [ p1; pn u Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions multiple horizontal

tab set (HTS) (ANSI) 78

ESC [ @ Selects the printing type style. (IBM 2381 + only) 32

ESC [ @ Sets double high printing and double line feed. (IBM) 32

ESC [ \ Sets vertical units. (IBM) 19

ESC [ d Set the print quality. (IBM 2381 + only) 33

ESC [ g Selects 8 or 24 needle dot graphics mode. (IBM) 43

ESC [ K Sets initial conditions. (IBM 2381 + only) 52

ESC [ p1 e Vertical position relative (VPR) (ANSI). 79

ESC [ p1 j Horizontal position backward (HPB) (ANSI). 77

ESC [ p1 t Special print mode (Oversize/Expanded/Bar code Mode -SPM) (ANSI). 75

ESC [ p1; p2 <SP> G Sets the line/character spacing (ANSI). 82

ESC [ p1; p2 s Left/right margin set (SLR) (ANSI). 77

ESC [ p1; p2 SP B Graphic size modification (GSM) (ANSI). 75

ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r Form definition (FD) (ANSI). 81

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents11260071‐001A

Command Description Page

ESC [ p1; pn g Tab clear (TBC) (ANSI). 80

ESC [ p1; pn m Select graphics rendition (SGR) (ANSI). 74

ESC [ T Selects a Code page (IBM). 42

ESC [ u n Bar Codes selection. (IBM -Epson) 54

ESC [ v nm Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson) 54

ESC \ Sets the relative dot position. (EPSON) 19

ESC \ Prints characters from all characters table. (IBM) 42

ESC \ or ST String terminator (ANSI). 83

ESC ] Sets a reverse line feed. (IBM) 17

ESC ^ Prints a single character from the all characters table. (IBM) 43

ESC _ Sets or cancels overscore printing. (IBM) 35

ESC + Sets n/360-inch line spacing. (IBM) 11

ESC < Prints characters for one line from left to right. (EPSON) 31

ESC = Defines downloaded characters. (IBM) 45

ESC = Sets MSB to 0. (EPSON) 50

ESC > Sets MSB to 1. (EPSON) 51

ESC 0 Sets vertical spacing to 1/8 inch (IBM/EPSON). 20

ESC 1 Sets vertical spacing to 7/72 inch. (IBM) 20

ESC 2 Sets the vertical spacing to 1/6 inch. (EPSON) 20

ESC 2 Enables the vertical spacing set by ESC A. (IBM) 20

ESC 3 Sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch. (IBM , EPSON) 21

ESC 3 Sets vertical spacing to n/216 inch. (IBM XLIII, 2381 +) 21

ESC 4 Sets the current position as top of form (first printable line). (IBM) 21

ESC 4 Sets italics printing mode. (EPSON) 35

ESC 5 Sets an automatic line feed after a carriage return. (IBM) 17

ESC 5 Cancels italics printing. (EPSON) 35

ESC 6 Selects the Character Set 2 (IBM). 43

ESC 7 Selects the Character Set 1 (IBM). 43

ESC 7 Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (EPSON) 34

ESC A Sets variable vertical spacing to n/60 inch. (IBM , EPSON) 21

ESC A Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (IBM XLIII, 2381 +) 21

ESC a Sets Letter Quality justification printing. (EPSON) 35

ESC B Sets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON). 22

ESC b Sets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels

Available (EPSON) 22

ESC B NUL Resets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON). 22

ESC b NUL Resets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels

Available (EPSON) 23

ESC c Resets to initial state (RIS) (ANSI). 84

ESC C 0 n Sets form length to n inches (IBM/EPSON). 23

ESC C n Sets form length to n lines (IBM/EPSON). 23

ESC D Sets horizontal tab stops (IBM/EPSON). 23

ESC d Spaces forwards relative dot position. (IBM) 24

ESC D or IND Index (ANSI). 78

ESC e Spaces backward relative dot position. (IBM) 24

ESC E Sets emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON). 35

ESC E or NEL Next line (ANSI). 78

ESC F Cancels emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON). 36

ESC G Sets double strike printing (IBM/EPSON). 36

ESC g Sets 15 CPI. (EPSON) 28

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents12260071‐001A

Command Description Page

ESC H Cancels double strike printing (IBM/EPSON). 36

ESC H or HTS Horizontal tab setting (ANSI). 78

ESC I Selects printing type for resident and DLL characters. (IBM) 37

ESC J Advances paper n/216 inch (IBMXLIII and 2381) 18

ESC j Feed paper n/216 in reverse direction (EPSON) 18

ESC J or VTS Vertical tab setting (ANSI). 81

ESC k Selects the LQ fonts. (EPSON) 43

ESC K Normal density dot graphics printing (60 dpi) (IBM/EPSON). 47

ESC k Prints test character (PTC) (ANSI). 84

ESC K or PLD Partial line down (ANSI). 79

ESC I Sets left margin. (EPSON) 24

ESC L Double density dot graphics printing (120 dpi) (IBM/EPSON). 48

ESC L or PLU Partial line up (ANSI). 79

ESC M Selects 10.5 point. 12 CPI. (EPSON) 37

ESC M or RI Reverse index (ANSI). 79

ESC N Sets the skip over perforation to n lines (IBM/EPSON). 25

ESC O Disables the skip over perforation (IBM/EPSON). 26

ESC P Selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi (EPSON) 37

ESC P Sets or cancels proportional printing. (IBM) 38

ESC p Sets or cancels proportional printing. (EPSON) 38

ESC Q Sets the right margin. (EPSON) 26

ESC Q Deselects Printer. (IBM) 51

ESC Q or PU1 Executes Self test (ANSI). 83

ESC R Sets horizontal and vertical tab stops to default values. (IBM) 26

ESC R Selects Nation character set. (EPSON) 43

ESC S Sets subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON). 38

ESC s Sets and resets Quiet printing. (EPSON) 39

ESC SP Sets inter character space. (EPSON) 27

ESC T Cancels subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON). 39

ESC t Selects characters table. (EPSON) 44

ESC U Sets printing direction (IBM/Epson). 53

ESC W Sets or cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON). 40

ESC w Sets or cancels double height printing. (EPSON) 40

ESC X Sets left and right margins. (IBM) 27

ESC x Selects Letter Quality or Draft. (EPSON) 40

ESC Y Double density dot graphics printing at double-speed graphics

(120 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON) 48

ESC Z Quadruple density dot graphics printing (240 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON) 49

FF Advances paper to the top of the next page (IBM/EPSON). 28

FF Form feed (ANSI). 81

HT Logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop

(IBM/EPSON). 28

HT Horizontal tab (ANSI). 77

LF Line Feed (IBM/EPSON). 18

LF Line feed (ANSI). 78

NUL Ignored (ANSI). 82

SI Sets compressed printing. (EPSON) 41

SI Shift in (ANSI). 74

SI or ESC SI Sets compressed printing (IBM/EPSON). 38

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents13260071‐001A

Command Description Page

SO Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON). 41

SO Shift out (ANSI). 75

SO or ESC SO Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON). 39

SP Space (ANSI). 76

VT Advances paper to the next vertical tab stop of the selected

VFU channel (IBM/EPSON). 28

VT Vertical tab (ANSI) 80

Commands for the Printronix S828 model printer with the IPDS feature present

Command EBCD Description Page

ACK D6FF Acknowledge Reply 98

BP D6AF Begin Page

BPS D65F Begin Page Segment 211

BO D6DF Begin Overlay 210

DF D64F Deactivate Font 130

DO D6EF Deactivate Overlay 210

DPS D66F Deactivate Page Segment 212

END D65D End 130

EP D6BF End Page 130

IO D67D Include Overlay 210

IPS D67F Include Page Segment 211

LE D61D Load Equivalence 149

LFE D63F Load Font Equivalence 123

LSS D61E Load Symbol Set 212

LCC D69F Load Copy Control 126

LPD D6CF Logical Page Descriptor 127

LPP D66D Logical Page Position 129

NOP D603 No Operation 119

SHS D697 Set Home State 122

STM D6E4 Sense Type and Model 119

WBCC D680 Write Bar Code Control 197

WBC D681 Write Bar Code 206

WGC D684 Write Graphics Control 164

WG D685 Write Graphics 175

WIC D63D Write Image Control 158

WI D64D Write Image 160

WT D62D Write Text 150

XOH D68F Execute Order Home State 130

XOA D633 Execute Order Any State 140

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Contents14260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Preface15260071‐001A

Preface

Print Job Processing

There are no EPSON/IBM controls that explicity define print job boundaries. A print job for the Printronix

S828 is established by the host system and consists of any set of related print objects. A print job could be

as short as one character or could be many pages long.

As an aid to the printer operator, the printer provides a DATA indicator on the operator panel. When the

DATA indicator is flashing, it indicates that data is currently being received, processed, or printing, or that

data is buffered in the printer but cannot be immediately printed. If the DATA indicator is not lit, then all print

jobs have been completed.

Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to obtain predictable results,

changes to operator panel configuration parameter values should be made before the print job is sent to

the printer and after the previous print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter

values while a print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.

Printronix Company recommends the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:

● Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each print job with a Set

Initial Conditions control or an Initialize Printer control. This control resets the printer environment to the

default settings. You can then set additional controls depending on your print job environment.

● End each print job with a FORM FEED control. This control causes all data to be printed, and the

current position is set to the top-of-form position.

● If a print job is abnormally terminated, the job should be canceled. See “Cancel Print” in “Chapter 2.

Understanding the Operator Panel” in the Administrators Manual for your printer.

Page Printing Concept

The Printronix Printronix S828 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A

page is a logical entity

whose boundaries are defined by the width and the page length. These boundaries are established during

printer initialization using the printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration Menu or by

issuing the appropriate data stream controls.

As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the physical position on the

page. If a print job does not end with a proper job terminator (for example, FORM FEED), then:

● All data for the current page may not print

● The next print job may be misaligned on the form

● Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.

Page Presentation

Many EPSON/IBM commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are described in terms of the

presentation surface. A presentation surface is a two-dimensional surface upon which the printer positions

symbols according to controls embedded in the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is defined

in absolute terms by the width and depth parameters of the page size control commands (Set Page

Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The physical print position does not move outside the range

of these two parameters. The left margin (LM) and right margin (RM) are variable parameters within the

presentation surface. The logical print position does not move outside the range of the vertical margins nor

outside the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure shows the presentation surface and the

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Preface16260071‐001A

relationships of some of these parameters.

Figure 1 Page Presentation

CPP Current Print Position (LM = CPP = RM).

CPL Current Print Line

MPP Maximum Print Position (in characters at current CPI)

PMPP Physical Maximum Print Position. The largest number of characters that can be placed on one line

of the surface (the largest value that MPP can assume).

LM Left Margin

RM Right Margin

MPL Maximum Page Length (in lines at current LPI)

Notes:

1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or previous values are not

acceptable.

2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical presentation surface.

Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify the line number and

column number where the next graphic will be printed. These internal values are the logical position on the

presentation surface.

The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer is initialized. The

standard power-on defaults are:

MPP (width) Operator panel setting

MPL (depth) Operator panel setting

CPI Operator panel setting

LPI Operator panel setting

LM 0 inches (Column 1)

RM Equal to MPP

HT Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17, 25, 33, and so on.)

VT Vertical tabs are all cleared

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands17260071‐001A

Chapter 1. EPSON/IBM Commands

The following printer commands are supported by this printer according to the IBM Proprinter XLIII-XLIII

AGM, IBM 2381+ and EPSON FX Series.

Print and Line Feed Execution

Prints all received data and the column counter is set to the left margin (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code CR

Hexadecimal Value X'0D'

Decimal Value 13

This code is a terminator code; when received, it causes any data in the buffer to be printed out. The print

head then moves logically to the left margin position. The column counter is set to the left margin value

and a line feed is inserted automatically after the carriage return (see the automatic carriage return

function in the printer setup). The code cancels the double width printing set by the SO or ESC SO

command.

ESC ]

Sets a reverse line feed. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC ]

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5D'

Decimal Value 27 93

This is a terminator code; it therefore causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before

advancing the paper by one line at the current vertical spacing. If no data precedes the LF code, or if the

preceding data consists of spaces, the code only causes a line feed.

When the line counter reaches the last line of the form (defined by the software or the function menu), the

LF code causes a skip to the first line of the next form. This code cancels the double width printing set by

the SO code. In IBM mode, the column counter is set to the first column if the automatic carriage return is

selected. In EPSON mode, the column is always set to the first column.

ESC 5

Sets an automatic line feed after a carriage return. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC 5 n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'35' n

Decimal Value 27 53 n

If n is equal to 1, this command sets an automatic line feed on receiving of a CR code. If n is equal to 0,

this command cancels the automatic line feed.

n Automatic line feed

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands18260071‐001A

ESC J

Advances paper n/216 inch. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC J n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4A' n

Decimal Value 27 74 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before performing

a single line feed of n/216 of an inch. This command is cancelled after the line feed has been

performed. The printing restarts after a line feed from the column at which the command was sent.

ESC j

Feed paper n/216 in reverse direction (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC J n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'6A' n

Decimal Value 27 106 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed. Then the paper is

moved backward of n/216 of an inch. The printing restarts from the column at which the command was sent.

Line Feed (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code LF

Hexadecimal Value X'0A'

Decimal Value 10

This is a terminator code; it causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed before advancing

the paper by one line at the current vertical spacing. If no data precedes the LF code, or if the preceding

data consists of spaces, the code only causes a line feed.

When the line counter reaches the last line of the form (defined by software or function menu), the LF

code causes a skip to the first line of the next form. This code cancels the double width printing set by the

SO code. In IBM mode, the column counter is set to the first column if the automatic carriage return is

selected. In EPSON mode, the column is always set to the first column.

Format Control

ESC $

Sets the absolute printing position. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC & n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'24' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 36 n1 n2

Range 0 = n1 n2 = 255

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands19260071‐001A

This command specifies the distance from the left margin to where you want to print subsequent

characters. The distance is in number of dots and must be calculated using the following formula:

Margin distance = n1 +(n2 x 256) where n2 is the integer result of the number of dots divided by 256 and

n1 is the remainder. 1 dot = 1/60 inch. If the selected position is outside the current right margin, the

sequence is ignored.

ESC[ \

Sets vertical units. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC [ \ m1 m2 t1 ... t4

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'5C' m1 m2 t1 ... t4

Decimal Value 27 91 92 m1 m2 t1 ... t4

Range m1 =4

m2 =0

0 = t1 = 255

0 = t2 = 255

t3 =0

t4 = 180 or 216

This command changes the base units for the graphics line spacing commands (ESC J, ESC 3). The

default is 1/216 or 1/180 inch.

ESC /

Selects the Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC / m

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'2F' m

Decimal Value 27 47 m

Range 0 = m = 7

This sequence selects the VFU channel that you want to use. Eight different channels are available. The

m parameter represents the channel you want to select.

ESC \

Sets the relative dot position. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5C' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 92 n1 n2

Range 0 = n1, n2 = 255

This command specifies the distance between the current print head position and the position where you

want to print subsequent characters (relative position). The distance is a number of dots and must be

calculated using the following formula:

Current position distance = n1 +(n2 x 256)

where n2 is the integer result of the number of dots divided by 256 and the n1 is the remainder. The unit of

dots is 1/120 inch for Draft or 1/180 inch for Letter Quality printing. If the distance is negative (Most

Significant Bit of m2 equal to 1), the print head is moved to the left of the current position by the number of

dots equal to the complement on two of n1 +(n2 x 256).

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands20260071‐001A

ESC 0

Sets vertical spacing to 1/8 inch (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC 0

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'30'

Decimal Value 27 48

This code causes vertical spacing to be set to 1/8 inch.

ESC 1

Sets vertical spacing to 7/72 inch. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC 1

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'31'

Decimal Value 27 49

This command causes vertical spacing to be set to 7/72 inch.

ESC +

Sets n/360-inch line spacing. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC + n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'2B' n

Decimal Value 27 43 n

Range 0 = n = 255

This command sets the line spacing to n/360 inch. If the line spacing is changed, it does not affect

previous settings for vertical tabs or page length.

ESC 2

Sets the vertical spacing to 1/6 inch. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC 2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'32'

Decimal Value 27 50

This command causes the vertical spacing to be set to 1/6 inch.

ESC 2

Enables the vertical spacing set by ESC A. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC 2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'32'

Decimal Value 27 50

This command enables the vertical spacing sets by ESC A.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands21260071‐001A

ESC 3

Sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch. (IBM , EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC 3 n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'33' n

Decimal Value 27 51 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This sequence sets the vertical spacing to n/180 inch. It is ignored if n is equal to 0.

ESC 3

Sets vertical spacing to n/216 inch. (IBM/EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC 3 n

Hexadecimal Value 1B 33 n

Decimal Value X'27' X'51' n

Range 0 = n = 255

This sequence sets the vertical spacing to n/216 inch.

ESC 4

Sets the current position as top of form (first printable line). (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC 4

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'34'

Decimal Value 27 52

This sequence sets the first line of the fanfold paper as the current paper position of the form.

ESC A

Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC A n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'41' n

Decimal Value 27 65 n

This command changes the default vertical spacing to n/72 inch. The new vertical spacing value is

immediately activated.

ESC A

Sets variable vertical spacing to n/72 inch. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC A n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'41' n

Decimal Value 27 65 n

This command changes the default vertical spacing to n/72 inch. The vertical spacing value is stored and

activated only after the ESC 2 code is received.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands22260071‐001A

ESC B

Sets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC B n1 ... nx 0

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'42' n1 ... nx 0

Decimal Value 27 66 n1 ... nx 0

Range 1 = n = 255

In EPSON mode, it sets the vertical tab stops in the 0 Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel. This code sets

up to 16 vertical tab stops at the line specified by n1, n2 and so on in the 0 VFU channel. The tab stops

are memorized as physical positions. In IBM mode, this code sets up to 64 vertical tab stops at the line

number specified by n1, n2 and so on in the 0 VFU channel. The tab stops are retained as logical

positions.

ESC B NUL

Resets vertical tab stops (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC B NUL

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'42' 00

Decimal Value 27 66 00

This command resets the vertical tab stops in the 0 Vertical Format Unit (VFU) channel.

ESC b

Sets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC b mn1 ... nx 0

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'62' mn1 ... nx 00

Decimal Value 27 98 mn1 ... nx 0

Range 0 = m = 7

1 = n1 ... nx = 255

This sequence sets vertical tabulations in the VFU channel specified by the parameter m.

The VFU channel can be imagined as a blank page where you can set up to 16 vertical tabulations in

order to format your page as you like. 8 channels are available and in each of them you can create a

sample page that you can recall later. n1 to n16 specify the lines at which vertical tabulations must be set.

The values of n must be in ascending order. If you change the vertical spacing, the vertical tabulations set

are not cancelled and they maintain their physical position on the page.

The vertical tabulations set in the channel specified by the m parameter are executed by the VT code

when the specific channel is selected by the ESC / command, this code is executed as a line feed.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands23260071‐001A

ESC b NUL

Resets vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC b NUL

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'62' X'00'

Decimal Value 27 98 0

This command resets the vertical tab stops in one of the 8 Vertical Format Unit channels available.

ESC C 0 n

Sets form length to n inches (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC C 0 n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'43' X'00' n

Decimal Value 27 67 0 n

Range 1 = n = 24

This command sets the form length to the number of inches specified by n. The current position of the

paper is assumed as the top-of-form.

ESC C n

Sets form length to n lines (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC C n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'43' n

Decimal Value 27 67 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This command sets the form length to the number of lines specified by n at the current vertical spacing.

The current position of the paper is assumed as top-of-form.

ESC D

Sets horizontal tab stops (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC D n1 n2 ... nx 0

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'44' n1 n2 ... nx 00

Decimal Value 27 68 n1 n2 ... nx 0

Range 1 = n = 255

This sequence sets up to 28 (IBM mode) or 32 (EPSON mode) horizontal tab stops after canceling the

current setting. The n1 to nx parameters specify the number of columns at which horizontal tab stops are

required and must be entered in the sequence in ascending numerical order. Any value outside this range

is ignored. In IBM mode, the tab stop position is retained as a logical position in the page so that it is

affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The columns are numbered 1 through 136. In EPSON mode,

the tab stop position set by ESC D is retained as the physical position on the page and therefore it is not

affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The physical position of the tab stop depends on the

horizontal spacing in operation when ESC D is used. The ESC D 0 cancels all active tab stops.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands24260071‐001A

ESC d

Spaces forwards relative dot position. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC d n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'64' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 100 n1 n2

Range 0 = n1 n2 = 255

This command moves the print carriage (n1 +(n2*256))/120 of an inch displacement on the right of its

current dot position. If the selected position is outside the current right margin, it is forced to the last

column.

ESC e

Spaces backward relative dot position. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC e n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'65' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 101 n1 n2

Range 0 = n1 n2 = 255

This command moves the print carriage (n1 +(n2*256))/120 of an inch displacement on the left of its

current dot position. If the selected position is outside the current left margin, it is forced to the first

column.

ESC I

Sets left margin. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC I n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'6C' n

Decimal Value 27 108 n

Range 0 = n = 255

This code sets the left margin at the current horizontal spacing. It must be sent at the beginning of the

line. The n parameter specifies the number of columns. For each type of horizontal spacing there is a

different range of possible values, as shown in the following table:

Character Width Horizontal Spacing Range of columns

Double Width 5 cpi 0 = n = 67

6 cpi 0 = n = 80

7.5 cpi 0 = n = 100

8.5 cpi 0 = n = 114

10 cpi 0 = n = 134

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands25260071‐001A

Character Width Horizontal Spacing Range of columns

Normal 10 cpi 0 = n = 134

12 cpi 0 = n = 160

15 cpi 0 = n = 201

17 cpi 0 = n = 229

20 cpi 0 = n = 255

Any value outside the accepted range is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. The left margin

must be smaller than the right margin. The physical position set for the left margin does not change if the

horizontal spacing is modified. This command overrides the menu setting.

ESC N

Sets the skipover perforation to n lines (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC N n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4E' n

Decimal Value 27 78 n

Range 1 = n = 127 (EPSON mode)

1 = n = 255 (IBM mode)

The skipover perforation is the sum of the top and bottom margin values at the selected vertical spacing.

The n parameter must be less than the current form length. The skipover is retained as the physical

position on the page. It is cancelled by ESC O or changing the form length.

The skipover value, when accepted, sets the top and bottom margins according to the operator panel

setting (see the Administrators Manual):

If the top margin set using the operator panel is greater than the skipover value, the following value of the

margins is set:

Top margin = skipover value

Bottom margin = 0

If the top margin set using the operator panel is less than or equal to the skipover value, then the following

value of the margins is set:

Top margin = operator panel value

Bottom margin = the difference between skipover value and top margin value

If the sum of the top and bottom margins values set using the operator panel is less than the skipover

value, the following values for the margins is set:

Top margin = operator panel value

Bottom margin = the difference between skipover value and top margin value

Changing the vertical spacing does not affect the skipover distance. This can be changed by another ESC

N command or can be reset by the ESC O command, which resets the skipover value to 0. The skipover

perforation is performed when the end of the page is reached with a LF, VT or FF code and not with the

ESC J or ESC C command. The skipover perforation is cancelled and must be reset.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands26260071‐001A

ESC O

Disables the skipover perforation (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC O

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4F'

Decimal Value 27 79

This sequence sets the number of lines of the skipover perforation to the value 0. Any skip perforation set

by ESC N is cancelled.

ESC Q

Sets the right margin. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC Q n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'51' n

Decimal Value 27 81 n

Range 1 = n = 225

This code sets the line length at the current horizontal spacing. It must be sent at the beginning of the line.

The n parameter specifies the number of columns and for each type of horizontal spacing there is a range

of values, as shown in the following table:

Character Width Horizontal Spacing Range of columns

Double Width 5 cpi 1 <= n <= 67

6 cpi 1 <= n <= 81

7.5 cpi 1 <= n <= 101

8.5 cpi 1 <= n <= 111

10 cpi 1 <= n <= 135

Normal 10 cpi 1 <= n <= 135

12 cpi 1 <= n <= 162

15 cpi 1 <= n <= 203

17 cpi 1 <= n <= 232

20 cpi 1 <= n <= 255

Any value outside the accepted range is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. The right

margin must be greater than the left margin. The physical position set for the right margin does not change

if the horizontal spacing is modified.

ESC R

Sets horizontal and vertical tab stops to default values. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC R

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'52'

Decimal Value 27 82

This command sets horizontal tab stops every eight columns starting from column 9 and cancels all

vertical tab stops.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands27260071‐001A

ESC SP

Sets intercharacter space. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC SP™ n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'20' n

Decimal Value 27 32 n

Range 0 = n = 225

This command sets the intercharacter space to n/120 inch in Draft printing and n/180 inch in Quality

printing.

ESC X

Sets left and right margins. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC X n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'58' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 88 n1 n2

Range 0 = n = 134 (left margin)

2 = n = 136 (right margin)

This command sets the left and right margins at the same time. The n1 and n2 parameters indicate

respectively the number of columns for the left and right margins at the current spacing. These margins

are retained in terms of absolute displacement from the physical left edge of the page. Use a CR

immediately after ESC X n to establish the print head position relative to the new margin setting.

If n1 is equal to 0, the current left margin of the page is used. If n2 is equal to 1, the current right margin of

the page is used. The left margin value must be less than the right margin value. The right margin value

must not exceed the physical right edge of the paper; otherwise the maximum acceptable value for the

right margin will be set.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands28260071‐001A

Advances paper to the top of the next page (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code FF

Hexadecimal Value X'0C'

Decimal Value 12

This code is a terminator code, when received, causes all data in the print buffer to be printed out. Then it

advances the paper to the first printable line of the next form. The line counter is set to the first line value

and the column counter is set to the left margin value. This code cancels the double width printing set by

SO code.

Logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code HT

Hexadecimal Value X'09'

Decimal Value 9

This code logically moves the print carriage to the next horizontal tab stop as defined by ESC D. Up to 28

(IBM mode) or 32 (EPSON mode) horizontal tab stops can be set. The HT code is ignored if no tab stop is

set, the current print carriage position is moved past the last tab position, or the tab stop is on or beyond

the right margin. When the printer is powered on, the tab stops are set every eight columns (default).

In EPSON mode, the default tab stops are retained as logical positions in the page that are affected by

changing the horizontal spacing. The tab stop positions set by ESC D are retained as physical positions

on the page and are not affected by changing the horizontal spacing. When double width printing is

selected, the tab stop setting must take into account that each character occupies two columns. In IBM

mode, the tab stops, both the default and those set by ESC, are retained as logical positions in the page

that are affected by changing the horizontal spacing. The horizontal tab stops can be changed by the ESC

D command.

Advances paper to the next vertical tab stop of the selected VFU channel (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code VT

Hexadecimal Value X'0B'

Decimal Value 11

This is a terminator code and when received causes the contents of the print buffer to be printed before

advancing the paper to the next vertical tab stop set by the ESC B or the ESC b commands.

This code is run normally if vertical tab stops follow the current print position. It runs like an FF code

(EPSON mode) or like a LF code (IBM mode), if the vertical tab stops follow the bottom of form position (

corresponding to the form length if the bottom of the form has not been set), or if the current position is

beyond the last vertical tab stop. It runs like an LF code if no vertical tab stops have been set by the ESC

B or ESC b commands.

In EPSON mode, the vertical tabulations are referred to the VHF channel selected by the ESC / m.Ifno

VFU channels have been selected, the printer assumes the default channel 0.

This command cancels the double width printing set by SO or ESC SO command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands29260071‐001A

Print Mode

DC2

Sets 10 cpi printing. (IBM)

ASCII Code DC2

Hexadecimal Value X'12'

Decimal Value 18

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. This command is

accepted at any position within the line. The character that follows this command is printed at 10 cpi.

DC2

Cancels compressed printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code DC2

Hexadecimal Value X'12'

Decimal Value 18

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. This command is

accepted at any position within the line. The character that follows this command is printed as follows:

17 CPI . 10 CPI

20 CPI . 12 CPI

DC4

Cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code DC4

Hexadecimal Value X'14'

Decimal Value 20

This code cancels the double width printing set by SO or ESC SO code. It has no effect if the ESC W or

ESC ! command is set to double width.

ESC -

Sets or cancels underlined printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC - n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'2D' n

Decimal Value 27 45 n

Enables or disables underlined printing. See the following table:

n Underlined Printing

1 enabled

0 disabled

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands30260071‐001A

ESC !

Sets printing style. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC ! n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'21' n

Decimal Value 27 33 n

This command is used to select any valid combination of printing attributes. Each printing attribute is

selected by the nparameter, as specified in the following page:

n Attribute

0 10 cpi

1 12 cpi

2 Proportional

4 Compressed

8 Emphasized

16 Double Strike

32 Double Width

64 Italics

128 Underline

To print the desired combination of printing attributes, calculate the nparameter by adding up the values of

each attribute.

ESC(-

Sets score line. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC ( - n1 n2 md1 d2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'28' X'2D' n1 n2 md1 d2

Decimal Value 27 40 45 n1 n2 md1 d2

Range n1 =3

n2 =0

m=1

1 = d1 = 3

d2 =0,1,2,5,6

This command enables or disables scoring of all characters and spaces following the command according

to the following parameters:

d1 Line

1 Underline

2 Strikethrough

3 Overscore

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands31260071‐001A

d2 Line

0 Cancel score line

1 Single continuous line

2 Double continuous line

5 Single broken line

6 Single broken line

Any combination of scoring may be used at the same time and are independent of each other. Graphics

characters are not scored.

ESC[-

Selects the score line. (IBM 2381 + only)

ASCII Code ESC [ - n1 n2 loc type

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'2D' n1 n2 loc type

Decimal Value 27 91 45 n1 n2 loc type

Range n1 =2

n2 =0

This command selects several forms of overscore, underscore, and strikethrough.

To select loc: To select type:

loc Selection type Selection

1 Underscore 0 Cancles Line

2 Strikethrough 1 Single Line

3 Overscore 2 Double Line

255 Cancels all score selections

ESC :

Sets 12 CPI. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC :

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3A'

Decimal Value 27 58

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. Subsequent data is

printed at 12 cpi. This command is accepted at any position within the line. The setting of another

horizontal spacing resets this command.

ESC <

Prints characters for one line from left to right. (IBM XLIII, EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC <

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3C'

Decimal Value 27 60

This command causes the printing of one line from left to right.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands32260071‐001A

ESC[@

Selects the printing type style. (IBM 2381 + only)

ASCII Code ESC [ @ 40m1 0m3 m4

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'40' 04*00*m1 00*m3 m4

Decimal Value 27 91 64 40m1 0m3 m4

(*) These values are constants.

This command is used to modify the type style of the character and the number of line spacing. Use this

command for:

1. Italic printing

2. Single-high character

3. Double-high character

4. Single-wide character

5. Double-wide character

6. Single Line Feed

7. Double Line Feed

These selections may be combined, for example, italic print with double height or doublewide character

and double line feed.

See the following tables for m1, m3 and m4 selections:

m1 Selection m3 Selection m4 Selection

0 No Change 0 No Change 0 No Change

1 Start Italic Printing 1 Single-High Character 1 Single-Wide Character

2 Stop Italic Printing 2 Double-High Character 2 Double-Wide Character

4 Start Outline 4 Single Line Feed 4 Single Line Feed

8 Stop Outline 8 Double Line Feed 8 Double Line Feed

16 Start Shadow 16

32 Stop Shadow 32

ESC[@

Sets double high printing and double line feed. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC [ @ lhm1 m2 m3 m4

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'40' lhm1 m2 m3 m4

Decimal Value 27 91 64 lhm1 m2 m3 m4

l= normally 4, h= normally 0, m1 =0, m2 =0

This command sets height, width, and vertical spacing.

The land hparameters specify the number of mode bytes mx contained in the sequence.

The m3 and m4 parameters specify the printing characteristics.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands33260071‐001A

The m3 parameter controls both line spacing and character height. It has two parts: a high-order half-byte

of m3 controls the line spacing and the low-order half-byte controls the character height.

m3 Character Height Line Spacing

0 No Change No Change

1 Standard character height Line feeds unchanged

2 Double character height Line feeds unchanged

16 Character height unchanged Normal line feeds

17 Standard character height Normal line feeds

18 Double character height Normal line feeds

32 Character height unchanged Double line feeds

33 Standard character height Double line feeds

34 Double character height Double line feeds

The m4 parameter specifies the character width. Only the low-order half-byte is significant in this mode

byte. The high-order half-byte is ignored.

m4 Character Width Line Spacing

0 No change Standard width character

1 Double width character No change

2 No change No change

ESC[d

Set the print quality. (IBM 2381 + only)

ASCII Code ESC [ d 10n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'64' 0100n

Decimal Value 27 91 100 10n

This command sets the print quality to draft or LQ print.

n Types

0 No Change

From 64 to 127 Draft

From 128 to 254 Letter Quality

255 Initialization on NVRAM values

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands34260071‐001A

ESC[I

Sets font and pitch of a character. (IBM 2381 + only)

ASCII Code ESC [ I 2 0 m n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'49' 02 00 m n

Decimal Value 27 91 73 2 0 m n

This command allows you to modify the character's font and style of pitch type.

The values 2 and 0 are constants. If font and pitch locks are active, this command is ignored. To select the

values for the variables m and n, which identify the pitch and the font type style to use, refer to the table

below.

1. Identify the type style (pitch and font) to use in the left column (pitch).

2. For the hexadecimal values of m and n, look across the row to the second column (Hex mn)

3. For the decimal values for m and n, look across the row to the third column (Decimal mn).

4. Substitute these values for m and n in the printer command syntax.

Pitch Hexadecimal Decimal Dec. Value

m n m n (m x 256 + n)

Courier

10 X'00' X'00B' 0 11 11

12 X'01' X'EB' 1 235 491

15 X'01' X'EC' 1 236 492

17 X'01' X'ED' 1 237 493

20 X'01' X'EE' 1 238 494

Pitch Hexadecimal Decimal Dec. Value

m n m n (m x 256 + n)

Gothic

10 X'00' X'24' 0 36 36

12 X'01' X'8F' 1 143 399

15 X'01' X'8E' 1 236 398

17 X'01' X'8D' 1 237 397

20 X'01' X'8C' 1 238 396

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands35260071‐001A

ESC _

Sets or cancels overscore printing. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC _ n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5F' n

Decimal Value 27 95 n

Enables or disables overscore printing. See the following table:

n Overscore Printing

1 Enabled (all spaces and characters that follow are overscored)

0 Disabled

ESC 4

Sets italics printing mode. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC 4

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'34'

Decimal Value 27 52

Sets the style attribute of the font to italic. This command selects italic printing even if the italic character

table is not selected.

ESC 5

Cancels italics printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC 5

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'35'

Decimal Value 27 53

Sets the style attribute of the font to normal (cancels the italic style attribute previously selected with the

ESC 4 command).

ESC a

Sets Letter Quality justification printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC a n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'61' n

Decimal Value 27 97 n

Range 0 = n = 3

Selects from four types of justification, as follows:

n Justification

0 Left

1 Centered

2 Right

3 Allows an uniform printing between the margins when the buffer is full.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands36260071‐001A

ESC E

Sets emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC E

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'45'

Decimal Value 27 69

This command starts emphasized printing. The print head strikes each dot twice to produce a darker,

bolder character. The second strike is offset horizontally.

ESC F

Cancels emphasized printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code SC F

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'46'

Decimal Value 27 70

This command ends emphasized printing. This escape sequence cancels emphasized printing that was

started by ESC E.

ESC G

Sets double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC G

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'47'

Decimal Value 27 71

This command starts double-strike printing. ESC G may be canceled by ESC H.

ESC g

Sets 15 CPI. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC g

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'67'

Decimal Value 27 103

Subsequent data is printed at 15 cpi. This command is accepted at any position within the line. If you

change the pitch during proportional mode (selected with the ESC p command), the change takes effect

when the printer exits proportional mode.

ESC H

Cancels double strike printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC H

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'48'

Decimal Value 27 72

This command cancels double-strike printing set with the ESC G command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands37260071‐001A

ESC I

Selects printing type for resident and DLL characters. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC I n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'49' n

Decimal Value 27 73 n

This command selects the resident or the download font in Draft or LQ printing mode. It is ignored if you

select a font that has not been downloaded or has been overwritten. See the following table:

n Resident font n Download font

0 Draft 10 cpi 4 Draft 10 cpi

2 LQ10cpi 6 LQ10cpi

3 Proportional 7 Proportional

8 Draft 12 cpi 12 Draft 12 cpi

10 LQ 12 cpi 14 LQ 12 cpi

16 Draft 17 cpi 20 Draft 17 cpi

18 LQ 17 cpi 22 LQ 17 cpi

ESC M

Selects 10.5 point, 12 CPI. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC M

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4D'

Decimal Value 27 77

This is a terminator code. It causes all data present in the print buffer to be printed. Subsequent data is

printed at 12 cpi, if you previously set the compressed spacing by sending the SI or ESC SI command. If

you select proportional printing, this command is stored.

ESC P

Selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC P n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'50' n

Decimal Value 27 80 n

This command selects 10.5 point, 10 cpi character printing. If you change the pitch during proportional

mode (selected with the ESC p command) the change takes effect when the printer exits proportional

mode.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands38260071‐001A

ESC P

Sets or cancels proportional printing. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC P n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'50' n

Decimal Value 27 80 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This code is a terminator code. It causes all data in the print buffer to be printed. Then if the n parameter

is equal to 1, the subsequent data is printed in proportional mode. If the n parameter is equal to 0,

proportional mode is reset. If the any horizontal spacing command is sent to the printer when the

proportional printing is set, the command is stored and activated as soon as the proportional printing is

reset.

ESC p

Sets or cancels proportional printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC p n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'70' n

Decimal Value 27 112 n

Range 1 = n = 255

This command selects the proportional or fixed spacing according to the following values:

n Proportional Printing

0 Returns to current fixed character pitch

1 Selects proportional character spacing

ESC S

Sets subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC S n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'53' n

Decimal Value 27 83 n

Selects subscript or superscript printing. See the following table:

n Selection

0 Subscript Print enabled

1 Superscript Print enabled

Proportional printing of subscript or superscript characters is performed at 2/3 of the proportional character

width. Use the ESC T command to cancel subscript or superscript printing.

ESC SI

Sets 17/20 cpi (IBM).

ASCII Code SI or ESC SI

Hexadecimal Value X'0F' or X'1B' X'0F'

Decimal Value 15 or 27 15

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands39260071‐001A

This command sets horizontal spacing to 17 or 20 cpi. DC2 code cancels this mode and returns spacing to

10 characters per inch.

ESC SI

Sets compressed printing (EPSON).

ASCII Code SI or ESC SI

Hexadecimal Value X'0F' or X'1B' X'0F'

Decimal Value 15 or 27 15

This command is accepted at any position within the line. The setting of this command depends on the

horizontal spacing previously set:

10 CPI . 17 CPI

12 CPI . 20 CPI

The DC2 code cancels the compressed printing.

ESC SO

Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code SO or ESC S0

Hexadecimal Value X'0E' or X'1B' X'0E'

Decimal Value 14 or 27 14

This code causes subsequent data in the same line to be printed as double width characters. It is

canceled by the CR, LF, VT, FF and DC4 codes or when the buffer is full.

ESC s

Sets and resets Quiet printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC s n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'73' n

Decimal Value 27 115 n

This command controls print speed as follows:

n Selection

0 Normal speed printing

1 Quiet speed printing

ESC T

Cancels subscript or superscript printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC T

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'54'

Decimal Value 27 84

This command cancels subscript or superscript printing started with the ESC S command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands40260071‐001A

ESC W

Sets or cancels double width printing (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC W n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'57' n

Decimal Value 27 87 n

Range 0 = n = 1

Enables or disables double width printing. See the following table:

n Selection

0 Double Width Printing disabled

1 Double Width Printing enabled

ESC w

Sets or cancels double height printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC w n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'77' n

Decimal Value 27 119 n

Range 0 = n = 255

Enables or disables double-height printing of all characters. The first line of a page is not doubled if the

ESC w command is sent on the first line; all following lines are printed at double-height. Double-height

printing overrides superscript, subscript, and condensed. Superscript, subscript, and condensed print

resumes when double-height printing is canceled. See the following table:

n Selection

0 Double Height Printing disabled

1 Double Height Printing enabled

ESC x

Selects Letter Quality or Draft. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC x n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'78' n

Decimal Value 27 120 n

This command selects either LQ or Draft printing according to the following values:

n Selection

0 Draft printing

1 Letter Quality printing

If you select proportional spacing with the ESC p command during Draft printing, the printer prints an LQ

font instead. When you cancel proportional spacing with the ESC p command, the printer returns to Draft

printing.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands41260071‐001A

Sets compressed printing. (IBM)

ASCII Code SI

Hexadecimal Value X'0F'

Decimal Value 15

This command sets horizontal spacing to 17 or 20 cpi. DC2 code cancels this mode and returns spacing to

10 characters per inch.

Sets compressed printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code SI

Hexadecimal Value X'0F'

Decimal Value 15

This command is accepted at any position within the line. DC2 code cancels compressed printing. The

setting of this command depends on the horizontal spacing previously set

10 CPI . 17 CPI

12 CPI . 20 CPI

DC2 code cancels compressed printing.

Sets double width printing (one line) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code SO

Hexadecimal Value X'0E'

Decimal Value 14

This code causes subsequent data in the same line to be printed as double width characters. It is

cancelled by the CR, LF, VT, FF and DC4 codes or when the buffer is full.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands42260071‐001A

Character Set

ESC [ T

Selects a Code page (IBM).

ASCII Code ESC [ T 4000HcLc

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'54' 04000000HcLc

Decimal Value 7 91 84 4000HcLc

This sequence allows you to change the current code page. If an unavailable code page is specified, this

command is ignored. The digits 04000000(hexadecimal) and 4000(decimal) are constant. To

calculate Hc Lc for a code page that is not shown: If your code page has an alphabetic character, such as

437G, add 10,000 to the code page number, then divide by 256.

 The whole number result is the Hc value

 The remainder is the Lc value.

Hc Lc Hc Lc Hc Lc Hc Lc

1 181 CP437 3 96 CP864 33 143 8859/1 4 229 CP1253

3 122 CP437G 3 97 CP865 33 144 8859/2 4 230 CP1254

33 129 CP437 Slavic 3 98 CP866 33 145 8859/3 4 231 CP1255

33 82 CP850 3 99 CP867 33 146 8859/4 4 232 CP1256

3 83 CP851 3 108 CP876 33 147 8859/5 4 233 CP1257

3 84 CP852 3 109 CP877 33 148 8859/6 33 130 FARSI 1

3 85 CP853 4 74 CP1098 33 149 8859/7 33 131 FARSI 2

3 87 CP855 33 123 96 GREEK 33 150 8859/8

3 89 CP857 33 124 GOST 33 151 8859/9

3 90 CP858 33 125 TASS 3 155 8859/15

3 92 CP860 33 126 MAZOWIA 4 226 CP1250

3 94 CP862 33 128 UKRANIAN 4 227 CP1251

3 95 CP863 33 138 KOI8-U 4 228 CP1252

ESC \

Prints characters from all characters table. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5C' n1 n2

Decimal Value 27 92 n1 n2

Range 0 = n1 = 255

0 = n2 = 255

This command prints the next n1 + n2 x 256 characters from the table of all printable characters.

The total number of characters that will be printed from the table of all printable characters is equal to n1 +

(n2 x 256). For example, to print 300 characters from the table of all printable characters: n1 = 44, n2 =1.

The control codes are not recognized as long as this sequence is active. The space character is printed as

an unassigned character.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands43260071‐001A

ESC ^

Prints a single character from the all characters table. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC ^ n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5E' n

Decimal Value 27 94 n

Range 0 = n = 255

This command prints the next character from the all characters table. This sequence prints only one

character from the all character table.

ESC 6

Selects the Character Set 2 (EPSON, IBM).

ASCII Code ESC 6

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'36'

Decimal Value 27 54

This command selects the character set 2.

ESC 7

Selects the Character Set 1 (IBM).

ASCII Code ESC 7

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'37'

Decimal Value 27 55

This command selects the character set 1.

ESC k

Selects the NLQ fonts. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC k n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'6B' n

Decimal Value 27 107 n

Selects one of the available fonts in Letter Quality. If Draft mode is selected when this command is sent,

the new LQ font is selected when the printer returns to LQ printing.

n Types

0 Courier

2 Gothic

ESC R

Selects Nation character set. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC R n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'52' n

Decimal Value 27 82 n

Range 0 = n = 13

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands44260071‐001A

This code causes the national character set to be selected according to the parameter n. See the following

table:

n National Character Sets n National Character Sets n National Character Sets

0 USA 5 Sweden 10 Denmark-II

1 France 6 Italy 11 Spain-II

2 Germany 7 Spain-I 12 Latin America

3 United Kingdom 8 Japan

4 Denmark-I 9 Norway

ESC t

Selects characters table. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC t n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'74' n

Decimal Value 27 116 n

Range 0 = n = 3

Selects the upper half (from 128 to 255) from the character table.

n Character Tables

0 Standard Italic Character Set

1 ASCII Character Set

2 Remaps DLL Character Set from position 0-127 to 128-255

Download Character

ESC %

Selects user-defined character set. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC & n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'25' n

Decimal Value 27 37 n

This command switches between normal (resident) and user-defined (downloaded) characters:

n Selection

1 Selects the use of downloaded character set in RAM

0 Selects the use of resident character set in ROM

ESC &

Defines user-defined characters. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC & NUL n m [ a d1 ... d11 ]

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'26' 00 n m [a d1 ... d11 ]

Decimal Value 27 38 00 nm a [ d1 ... d11 ]

Range 0 <= n <= 255

0 <= m <= 255

n<= m

0 <=a <= 255

0 <=d <= 255

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands45260071‐001A

The data within brackets above is repeated for each character you define.

The parameters in the command have the following meaning:

n and m The n and m parameters are two decimal numbers that define the first and the last

characters to be replaced in the character set in use.

a It sets parameters for characters to be user-defined.

d1 ...d11 They are the character data that is printed.

The format of the attribute byte “a” is the following:

You can define characters 11-dots wide by 8-dots high. You must specify whether to define the upper or

lower 8 dots of the 9 dots available.

You can also specify the columns not printed on the left and right of the characters during proportional

spacing. Set both these parameters with the a parameter, as described in the following table:

Attribute byte table

Beginning Column Ending Column Upper/Lower 8 pins

Column

Number

Value Column

Number

Value Pin group Value

0 0 0 0 Upper 8 pins 128

1 16 1 1 Lower 8 pins 0

2 32 2 2

3 48 3 3

4 64 4 4

5 80 5 5

6 96 6 6

7 128 7 7

8 8

9 9

10 10

11 11

Add up the values for all three setting; the total will be the a value.

ESC :

Copies characters from ROM to RAM. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC : NULn0

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3A' 00n00

Decimal Value 27 58 n0

This code copies the draft character generator in ROM into RAM area dedicated to the user-defined

characters. Also Courier or Gothic character generator font from ROM is copied to RAM memory according

to the following values of n parameter:

n Selection

0 Courier

1 Gothic

ESC =

Defines downloaded characters. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC = n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]

Hexadecimal Value 1B 3D n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]

Decimal Value 27 61 n m id p [a1 a2 d1 … d 11 ]

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands46260071‐001A

This sequence allows to design and then down-line load special characters not present in the character set

in use. Whenever you would like to start the DLL setting procedure, it should be better to copy the character

generator in ROM into RAM by sending the ESC = {0} {0} sequence that causes the DLL to be reset. Up to

256 characters can be defined using the DLL function.

The parameters in the command line have the following meaning:

n and m Indicate how many characters you should down-line load. n and m are calculated as follows:

{number of characters x 13}+2 = {total}

If {total} is less than {256}

{n} = {t}

{m} = {0}

If {total} is greater than {256}

{n} = {remainder of {t} divided by 256}

{m} = {integer result of {t} divided by 256}

id Indicates the printer model. In this case it is fixed to {20}.

Each DLL character is described using the following parameters:

p This is the decimal code of the first character of the character set in use that should be

replaced by the DLL character.

a1 This is the first attribute byte and it has the following meaning:

Bit 7: {0} indicates that the character is not a true descender.

{1} indicates that the character is a true descender.

This bit is ignored if bit 0 or bit 1 is set to 1.

Bit 6 to 2 Ignored

Bit 1, 0 Character description:

{00} no 12-high expansion. The bit 7 is valid.

{01} line drawing character. The dots in row 8 are extended

downward to rows 9, 10, 11 and 12. The bit 7 is ignored. It is

advisable to use this mode to create characters that should

replace 179 to 223 code characters.

{11} shading characters. The dots in row 1, 2, 3 and 4 are

repeated as rows 9, 10, 11 and 12. The Quality printing is

ignored. It is advisable to use this mode to create characters

that should replace 176 to 178 code characters.

a2 This is the second attribute byte. It specifies the proportional printing information. If

you do not wish to define a proportional character, set the bit 6 – 0 to {0}. When you

use the proportional printing for a DLL character with bit 6 – 0 set to {0}, the databytes

of the character will be printed.

Bit 7: Ignored

Bit 6, 5, 4 Interpreted as binary number. These bits specify the number

of leading bytes that should be ignored. This number is the

offset. Up to 7 bytes can be ignored. The counts begins with

byte 1.

Bit 3 to 0 Interpreted as binary number. These bits specify the number

of dots-columns that should be printed. Each character must

be followed by a blank byte that is not included in the count

of the character width. Character widths greater than 11 are

treated as 11.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands47260071‐001A

Bit-Image

ESC *

Sets dot graphics printing. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC * m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'2A' m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Decimal Value 27 42 m n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Range m = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7;

0 < n1 < 255;

0 < n2 < 31

This command prints dot-graphics in 8-dot columns, depending on the following parameters: number of dot

columns = (n1 + (n2 x 256))

m Specifies the dot density.

n1, n2 specify the total number of columns of graphics data according to the formula:

The following table shows the 8-dot graphics mode:

m OPTION Horizontal Density (dpi) Alternate Code

0 Normal density 60 ESC K

1 Dual density 120 ESC L

2 Double speed, Double density 120 (virtual) ESC Y

3 Quadruple-density 240 (virtual) ESC Z

4 CTR Graphics I 80

5 Plotter Graphics 72

6 CTR Graphics II 90

7 Double Density Plotter Graphics 144

ESC ?

Reassigns dot graphics mode. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC ? nm

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3F' nm

Decimal Value 27 63 nm

Reassigns one of the dot graphics mode (described in the command ESC *) to one of the following

commands: ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y and ESC Z. The nparameter specifies a character (K, L, Y, or Z)

which is reassigned to specific mode m= 0,1,2,3.

m n m n

0 (K): ESC K graphic command 2 (Y): ESC Y graphic command

1 (L): ESC L graphic command 3 (Z): ESC Z graphic command

ESC K

Normal density dot graphics printing (60 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4B' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Decimal Value 27 75 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Range 0 = n1 = 255

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands48260071‐001A

0 = n2 = 31

0 = p= 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 60 horizontal dots per inch (dpi) by 180 vertical dpi.

The parameter values are calculated as follows:

n1 Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.

n2 Integer result of the previous division.

p1 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the

graphics pattern.

p2 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the

graphics pattern.

px Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the

graphics pattern.

ESC L

Double density dot graphics printing (120 dpi) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4C' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Decimal Value 27 76 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Range 0 = n1 = 255

0 = n2 = 31

0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 120 horizontal dpi by 180 vertical dpi.

The parameter values should be calculated as follows:

n1 Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.

n2 Integer result of the previous division.

p1 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the

graphics pattern.

p2 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the

graphics pattern.

px Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the

graphics pattern.

ESC Y

Double density dot graphics printing at double-speed graphics (120 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'59' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Decimal Value 27 89 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Range 0 = n1 = 255

0 = n2 = 31

0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 120 horizontal dpi by 180 vertical dpi.

The parameter values should be calculated as follows:

n1 Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.

n2 Integer result of the previous division.

p1 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands49260071‐001A

graphics pattern.

p2 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the

graphics pattern.

px Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the last column of the

graphics pattern.

ESC Z

Quadruple density dot graphics printing (240 virtual dpi) (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5A' n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Decimal Value 27 90 n1 n2 p1 p2 ... px

Range 0 = n1 = 255

0 = n2 = 31

0 = p = 255

Terminator code. This command prints dot graphics at 240 horizontal dot per inch by 180 vertical dpi.

The parameter values should be calculated as follows:

n1 Remainder of the number of columns divided by 256.

n2 Integer result of the previous division.

p1 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the first column of the

graphics pattern.

p2 Sum of the values corresponding to the dots that should be printed in the second column of the

graphics pattern.

Data Input Control

CAN

Cancels line. (EPSON)

ASCII Code CAN

Hexadecimal Value X'18'

Decimal Value 24

This code clears all printable characters and bit-image graphics on the current line. This code moves the

print position to the left-margin position.

CAN

Cancels data. (IBM)

ASCII Code CAN

Hexadecimal Value X'18'

Decimal Value 24

This code clears all data stored in the preceding print buffer but does not change the current print position.

DC1

Selects printer. (IBM)

ASCII Code DC1

Hexadecimal Value X'11'

Decimal Value 17

This command causes the printer to be enabled after it has been disabled by the ESC Q command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands50260071‐001A

DC1

Selects printer. (EPSON)

ASCII Code DC1

Hexadecimal Value X'11'

Decimal Value 17

This command causes the printer to be enabled after it has been disabled by the DC3 command.

DC3

Deselects printer. (EPSON)

ASCII Code DC3

Hexadecimal Value X'13'

Decimal Value 19

This code deselects the printer. The printer remains deselected until it receives a DC1 command or power

is turned off then on again. The printer ignores the ESC @ command (initialize printer) when it is

deselected.

DEL

Deletes the last character. (EPSON)

ASCII Code DEL

Hexadecimal Value X'7F'

Decimal Value 127

This command causes the printer to delete the last printable character sent to the printer. Printer control

codes are not affected. The printer ignores this command if it follows a command that moves the

horizontal print position (ESC $, ESC \, or HT).

ESC #

Cancels MSB control. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC #

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'23'

Decimal Value 27 35

This command cancels any controls on the Most Significant Bit (MSB) (bit number 7) set by ESC = or

ESC > commands. The printer then accepts all MSB data as is.

ESC =

Sets MSB to 0. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC =

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3D'

Decimal Value 27 61

This command sets the MSB (bit number 7) of all incoming data to 0. All data is affected, including

graphics data.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands51260071‐001A

ESC >

Sets MSB to 1. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC >

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'3E'

Decimal Value 27 62

This command sets the MSB (bit number 7) of all incoming data to 1. All data is affected, including

graphics data.

ESC Q

Deselects Printer. (IBM)

ASCII Code ESC Q n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'51' n

Decimal Value 27 81 n

This sequence tells the printer not to accept data from the host. The host must reset the printer or select

the printer by using DC1 (Select Printer) to accept data. To deselect the printer, use ESC Q35.

Miscellaneous

BEL

Buzzer (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code BEL

Hexadecimal Value X'07'

Decimal Value 7

This code sounds the printer buzzer.

Print and space back one position (IBM/EPSON).

ASCII Code BS

Hexadecimal Value X'08'

Decimal Value 8

This code causes printing to be continued from one column to the left of the current carriage position. The

printer ignores this command if it would move the print position to the left of the left margin.

ESC @

Initializes the printer. (EPSON)

ASCII Code ESC @

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'40'

Decimal Value 27 64

This sequence causes the printer:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands52260071‐001A

 To go back to the current printer setup settings

 To cancel any selected print attributes

 To reset the column counter

 To set the horizontal tabulations every 8 columns

 To clear all vertical tabulations

Only the selection of the Draft or Quality printing DLL, and the selected character generator are

maintained.

ESC[ K

Sets initial conditions. (IBM 2381 + only)

ASCII Code

ESC [ K n1 n2 init id

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'4B' n1 n2 init id

Decimal Value

27 91 75 n1 n2 init id

This command causes the printer to reset to its initial status:

n1, n2 The n1 and n2 parameters specify the number of bytes in the escape sequence normally,

n1 = 2 and n2 = always 0.

init The init parameter specifies which condition the printer should be initialized: normally init =

0,1,4,5,254,255.

init Description

0 Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font remains unchanged.

If parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. If the emulation mode

is changed, the download font is initialized. This command only copies data from the

selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM. The

data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.

1 Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font is initialized. If

parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command only

copies data from the selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it

in working RAM. The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.

4 Initializes the printer to factory settings. The download font remains unchanged. If

parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. If the emulation mode

is changed, the download font is initialized. This command only copies the default

settings from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM.

The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.

5 Initializes the printer to factory settings. The download font is initialized. If

parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command only

copies the default settings from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it

in working RAM. The data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM is not affected.

254 Initializes the printer to user-default settings. The download font is initialized. If

parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings.

This command changes the data stored in the selected macro. It copies data from

the selected macro, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM

and in the selected macro. It also changes the default macro to the value of parm 3.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands53260071‐001A

255 Initializes the printer to default settings. The download font is initialized. If

parameters are specified, they overwrite the default settings. This command

changes the data stored in the macro's nonvolatile RAM. It copies default settings

from ROM, adds parameter changes, if any, and stores it in working RAM and all

macros. It also sets the default macro to

disable.

id The id parameter specifies the printer for which the following parameter bytes are

intended. If the ID does not address your printer, the mode bytes that follow are ignored.

The ID values are Hex = X'B6', Dec = 182.

parm1 Specifies the following functions:

Bit Not set Set

7 Discard byte Process this byte Ignore this byte

6 Reserved

5 Alarm Alarm enabled Alarm disabled

4 Automatic CR No CR on vertical movement CR on vertical movement

3 Automatic LF No LF after CR LF after CR

2 Page length 11 inches 12 inches

1 Slashed zero Zero without slash Zero with slash

0 Character set CS1 CS2

parm2 Specifies the following functions:

Bit Not set Set

7 Discard byte Process this byte Ignore this byte

6 Pass over from CP437 CP850

CP437-CP850

5 Reserved

4 Reserved

3 Reserved

2 Reserved

1 Line length 13.6 inch 8 inch

0 Reserved

Only the selection of the Draft or Quality printing DLL, and the selected character generator are maintained.

ESC U

Sets printing direction (IBM/Epson).

ASCII Code ESC U n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'55' n

Decimal Value 27 85 n

Selects bidirectional or unidirectional printing according to the parameters below:

n Direction

0 Bidirectional printing

1 Unidirectional (left to right) printing

Unidirectional printing provides better alignment of vertical lines while bidirectional printing is faster.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands54260071‐001A

ESC[ u n

Bar Codes selection. (IBM -Epson)

ASCII Code ESC [ u n

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'75' n

Decimal Value 27 91 117 n

This command is recognized only if the Bar Code menu option is set to “Alternate” mode.

0 Exit Bar Code mode

1 Enter Bar Code mode. Subsequent data are barcode data strings as set by ESC [ v n

ESC [ v n m

Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson)

ASCII Code ESC [ vnm

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'76' nm

Decimal Value 27 91 118 nm

Set barcode parameters according to the table below. Parameter values that are not supported result in

the command being ignored.

n Parameter Description m values m default

0 Barcode style see below table 4

1 Barcode height 1-120 (1/12" increments) 12

2 Human readable line 0=disable 1=enable 1

3 Narrow bar width 2-225 3

4 Wide bar width 2-225 7

5 Narrow space width 2-225 3

6 Wide space width 2-225 7

7 Intercharacter space width 2-225 3

8 Rotation and HRC font 0.1=no rotation and current font for HRC 0

2=90 3=180 4=270 and special HRC font

9 Horizontal print density 1=120 2=144 3=180 dpi 1

10 Check digit 0=disable 1=enable 0

11 HRC font for rotate barcode 3=OCRA 4=OCRB 3

12 Barcode height 0-240 (1/24" increments) 24

Supported Bar Code Styles

m Style

0 Interleaved 2 of 5

1 Bidirectional 2 of 5

2 Matrix 2 of 5

3 Industrial 2 of 5

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands55260071‐001A

Supported Bar Code Styles

m Style

4 Code 3 of 9 (default)

5 EAN-8

6 EAN-13

7 Code 11

9 Codabar (default start/stop = a/t)

10 Codabar (default start/stop = b/n)

11 Codabar (default start/stop = c/*)

12 Codabar (default start/stop = d/e)

13 UPC-A

14 UPS-E

15 Code 93

16 Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)

17 Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)

18 Code 128 (subset A, B, and C)

19 MSI

20 UPC 2 Supplemental

21 UPC 5 Supplemental

22 EAN 2 Supplemental

23 EAN 5 Supplemental

50 Postnet

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter1EPSON/IBMCommands56260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands57260071‐001A

Chapter 2. Native Emulation Commands

The printer in the Native Mode supports the following printer commands.

Format Control

DC4 DC4 ESC 1

Sets vertical spacing n/180 inch.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 1 n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'31' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 49 n

Range 0 = n = 255

This command sets vertical spacing to n/180 inch for subsequent line feeds.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1

Sets vertical spacing 12 lines/30 mm.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'31'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 51 49

This command sets vertical spacing to 12 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3

Sets vertical spacing to 3 lines/30 mm.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'33'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 51 51

This command sets vertical spacing to 3 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4

Sets vertical spacing 4 lines/30 mm.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'34'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 51 52

This command sets vertical spacing to 4 lines per 30 mm.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands58260071‐001A

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6

Sets vertical spacing 6 lines/30 mm.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'36'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 51 54

This command sets vertical spacing to 6 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8

Sets vertical spacing 8 lines/30 mm.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'33' X'38'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 51 56

This command sets vertical spacing to 8 lines per 30 mm.

DC4 DC4 ESC A

Sets the horizontal spacing to 15, 17.1, 20 CPI.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC A n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'41' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 65 n

This is terminator code and causes the current contents of the print buffer to be printed. The subsequent

characters are printed at the horizontal spacing specified by the n parameter.

n Spacing

4 15 cpi

5 17 cpi

6 20 cpi

Native Character Set

DC4 DC4 ESC g

Selects LQ fonts.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC g n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'67' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 103 n

Range 0 = n = 255

If down-line loading is selected, the command is stored and activated as soon as the down-line loading is

canceled.

Boldface is available if the ESC p1 (proportional) is sent.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands59260071‐001A

n Types

0 Courier

1 Gothic

182 DLL

The OCR-A and OCR-B print styles are selected by the DC4 DC4 ESC S command.

DC4 DC4 ESC S

Selects character set ISO Character Sets or Code Pages.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC S n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'53' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 83 n

n Types n Types

1 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 137 CP 852 Eastern Europe

2 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 138 CP 876 OCR-A

3 ISO 8859/3 Latin 3 139 CP 877 OCR-B

4 ISO 8859/4 Latin 4 140 CP 855 Cyrillic

5 ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic 141 CP 866 Russian

6 ISO 8859/6 Latin/Arabic 142 GOST Cyrillic

7 ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek 145 CP 437G Greek

8 ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew 146 CP 853 Turkish

9 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 147 CP 857 Turkish

15 ISO 8859/15 Latin 9 148 CP 867 Turkish

128 CP 437 USA 149 CP 858 Euro PC Multilingual

129 CP 850 Multilingual 199 96 Greek

130 CP 860 Portugal 200 CP 1250

131 CP 863 Canada/France 201 MAZOWIA

132 CP 865 Denmark/Norway 202 CP 1251

133 CP 851 Greek 203 CP 1252

134 CP 862 Hebrew

135 CP 864 Arab

136 TASS Cyrillic

DC4 DC4 ESC p

Selects printing style type.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC p n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'70' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 112 n

n Setting

0 HS Draft

1 Normal Draft

2 DP Text

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands60260071‐001A

Bar Codes

DC4 DC4 ESC !

Bar Code Selection.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC ! htfFroqbsBSiEM

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'21' ! htfFroqbsBSiEM

Decimal Value 20 20 27 33 ! htfFroqbsBSiEM

This command is recognized only if the menu option “BAR CODE” is set to “NATIVE” mode.

h = Bar Code Height at n/6”, 1 < h < 30

t = Standard Bar Code to use

t Name

1 8-digits European Article Numbering EAN-8

2 13-digits European Article Numbering EAN-13

3 Universal Product Code Type A UPC-A

4 Universal Product Code Type E UPC-E

5 UPC/EAN 2 Digit Supplement UPC-EAN 2

6 UPC/EAN 5 Digit Supplement UPC-EAN 5

7, 8, 9 8-digits European Article Numbering EAN-8

10 General Purpose Bar Code Code-GP

11 Code 2 of 5 3-BAR (Data Logic) C25-3BAR

12 Binary Coded Decimal CODE BCD

13 MSI-Plessey MSI

14 AIM-USD-8 / Code-11 Code 11

15 AIM-USD-7 / Code-93 Code 93

16 Code 2 of 5 Bidirectional C25-BID

17 Code 2 of 5 Interleaved C25-INT

18 Code 2 of 5 Industrial C25-IND

19 Code 2 of 5 Matrix C25-MTX

20 Code 3 of 9 Code-39

21 8-digits European Article Numbering EAN-8

22 Codabar (all types) CODABAR

23 Code 128 CODE-128

24 USPS-PostNet POSTNET

f = Readable character printing

f = 1 printing enabled

f = 0 printing disabled

F = Font selection for the printable characters

F Selection

0 Selected font by r value

1 Default font for text

1 Special font for OCR-A o OCR-B bar codes according to the t value

3 Special font for OCR-A bar codes

4 Special font for OCR-B bar codes

r = Bar code rotation

r Selection

0 No rotation

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands61260071‐001A

1 Rotation at 0°

2 Rotation at 90°

3 Rotation at 180°

4 Rotation at 270°

o = A check digit is inserted as the last character of the received string according to the bar code

q = The horizontal graphic density of the bar code

q Selection

0 1/120"

1 1/180"

b = Narrow bar width in n/180", 3 < b <18

s = Narrow space width in n/180", 3 < s <18

B = Wide bar width in n/180", 6 < B <72

S = Wide space width in n/180", 6 < S <72

i = Spacing between characters in n/180", 3 < i <72

EM = Check sequence terminator

Bar Code Description

EAN-8 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n1pEM

The EAN-8 bar code data field must only contain numeric data and must be eight bytes long

including the check digit. The EAN-8 character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric

figures. n indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12.

pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex.

X'01') if they are to be printed. The range of values for the nand pparameters can be

increased of 32 dec.

EAN-13 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n2pEM

The EAN-13 bar code data field must only contain numeric data and must be 13 bytes long

including the check digit. The EAN-13 character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric

figures. n indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12.

If you want to print the Human Readable Characters, pmust have the value 1 (hex. X'01');

otherwise this value must be NUL (hex. X'00'). The range of values for the nand pparameters

can be increased of 32 dec.

UPC-A DC4 DC4 ESC ! n3pEM

The UPC-A bar code data field allows 10 numeric characters plus one system number digit

and one check digit at the leftmost and rightmost positions, respectively. The UPC-A

character repertoire provides 0 to 9 ASCII numeric figures. nindicates the bar code height in

units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human

Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed. The range

of values for the nand pparameters can be increased of 32 dec.

UPC-E DC4 DC4 ESC ! n4pEM

If 11-digit strings are received and the ocheck digit field is missing or takes values 0 or 2,

question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, when possible. If the ofield takes a

value of 1, the 12th digit is inserted by the printer as a result of the internally available

algorithm applied to the received string.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands62260071‐001A

If 10-digit strings are received and the ocheck-digit is missing or takes NULL value, question

marks are printed in place of HRC string, if possible. If the ofield takes a value of 1, a default

0 System-Digit is automatically inserted by the printer and the 12th digit is also inserted as

result of he internally available algorithm applied to the final string.

If the final UPC-A string cannot be compressed to an 8-digits string, or the received System-

Digit is different than 0 or 1, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if

possible.

The LEFT and RIGHT delimiters, System-Digit, and the Check-Digit are printed as

descending bars to make a field to host a 6-digits HRC string. The System-Digit HRC to the

left of the LEFT delimiter (at about the middle of the symbol) when the ffield is missing or set

to 1. In this case, the Check-Digit shows in HRC to the right of the RIGHT delimiter (at about

the middle of the symbol), when ofield takes values 2 or 3. Otherwise it never shows on the

HRC string.

UPC-EAN 2 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n5pEM

The ADD ON-2 bar code data fields contain numeric data only. Otherwise question marks

are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.

If 3-digit strings are received within a DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM control sequence and the o

check-digit option field is missing or takes NULL value, the symbol encodes the first 2 digits

and the 3rd received digit is used as the check digit, even though this may affect its

readability. If the o field takes a value of 1, the 3rd digit is matched as opposed to the

internally generated check-digit. Question marks are printed in place of HRC string when

mismatched, if possible.

If 2-digit strings are received and ocheck digit field is missing or takes NULL value, question

marks are printed in place of the HRC string, when possible. If the ofield takes a value of 1,

the check digit are computed applying the internally available algorithm to the received string

in order to properly encode the symbol.

If the ffield is missing or takes a value of 1, the 2-digit HRC string is printed above the

Bar/Spaces symbol and its height is part of the overall symbol's height. The check-digit never

shows on the HRC string. If the ffield takes a value of 0, the symbol's encoding prints at full

height.

UPC-EAN 5 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n6pEM

The ADD ON-5 bar code data field contains numeric data only. Otherwise question marks

are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.

If 6-digit strings are received within a DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM control sequence and ocheck-

digit option field is missing or takes NULL value, the symbol encodes the first 5 digits and the

6th received digit is used as a check digit, even though this may affect its readability. If the

ocheck digit option takes a value of 1, the 6th digit is matched as opposed to the internally

generated check digit. Question marks are printed in place of the HRC string when

mismatching, if possible.

If 5-digit strings are received and the ocheck digit field is missing or takes a NULL value,

question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. If the ofield takes a value

of 1, the check digit is computed applying the internally available algorithm to the received

string in order to properly encode the symbol If the ffield is missing or takes a value of 1, the

5-digit HRC string is printed above the Bar/Spaces symbol and its height is part of the overall

symbol's height; the check-digit never shows on the HRC string. If the ffield takes a value of

0, the symbol’s encoding prints at full height.

CODE GP DC4 DC4 ESC ! n10pEM

The CODE-GP bar code allows bar codes to be constructed from the two basic elements

(BAR and SPACE) by sending 0,1 digits: digit 0 produces a BAR and digit 1 produces a

SPACE.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands63260071‐001A

These two elements may be combined in any sequence, giving the possibility of producing

bars and spaces of any width that is a multiple of the basic element width. The default

bar/spaces width is 1/60" (q= 0,1) but these values may be set by the user according to its

specific needs. Data fields do not have a defined format length and contain 0,1 data only.

Otherwise question marks are printed in place of HRC string, if possible.

No Human Readable Interpretation is possible No TEXT STRING below or above the

bar/space symbol can be printed. The fand ofields are ignored.

C25-3BAR DC4 DC4 ESC ! n11pEM

The C25-3BAR bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain numeric

data only. Otherwise, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. If the

ocheck digit option field takes a value of 1, an internally generated check digit complying with

general 2/5 family algorithm is added to the encoded string. However, it will not show on the

required HRC string.

Code BCD DC4 DC4 ESC ! n12pEM

The CODE-BCD bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain

numeric data only. Otherwise question marks will be printed in place of the HRC string, if

possible. No internal check digit algorithm is available for this standard. The ofield is

meaningless.

MSI Plessey DC4 DC4 ESC ! n13pEM

The MSI bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and must contain numeric

data only. Otherwise question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible. To

releave the host from calculating the MSI check digits, internal algorithms are provided that

are accessible by the host application program, giving the proper supported value to the

ocheck-digit option field, according to the following options:

0 Print the bar code symbol with no

printer-generated check digits

1 Print the bar code symbol with IBM

Modulus-10 check digit -generated

by the printer and put at the end of

the numeric string. This is the 2nd

check digit. The 1st check digit is

IBM Modulus-10 also.

2 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer and

put at the end of the data. The 2nd check

digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st check

digit is also IBM Modulus-10.

3 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer

and put it at the end of the data. The

2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.

The 1st check digit is NCR Modulus-

11. If the modulus is 10, it is an error

and question marks are printed in

place of the HRC string, if possible.

4 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer and

put it at the end of the data. The 2nd

check digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st

check digit is IBM Modulus-11. If the

modulus is 10, it is an error and question

marks are printed in place of the HRC

string, if possible.

5 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer

and put it at the end of the data. The

2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.

The 1st check digit is the

complement to 11 of NCR Modulus-

11 algorithm applied to the received

string, If the modulus is 0 or 1, the

check digit is 0.

6 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer and

put it at the end of the data. The 2nd

check digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st

check digit is the complement to 11 of

IBM Modulus-11 algorithm applied to the

received string. If the modulus is 0 or 1,

the check digit is 0.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands64260071‐001A

7 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer

and put at the end of the data. The

2nd check digit is IBM Modulus-10.

The 1st check digit is the

complement to 11 of NCR Modulus-

11 algorithm applied to the received

string. If the modulus is 0 or 1, it is

an error and question marks are

printed in place of the HRC string, if

possible.

8 Print the bar code symbol with both

check digits generated by the printer and

put at the end of the data. The 2nd check

digit is IBM Modulus-10. The 1st check

digit is the complement to 11 of IBM

Modulus-11 algorithm applied to the

received string. If the modulus is 0 or 1,

it is an error and question marks are

printed in place of the HRC string, if

possible.

The printer-generated second check digit does not show on the required HRC string.

Code 11 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n14pEM

The CODE-11 bar code fields do not have a defined format length and contain data

belonging to the character set listed below:

0123456789

Otherwise question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible.

This barcode type defines a variable WIDE/NARROW ratio. The bar code is printed at 1/180"

horizontal and vertical graphical printing resolution to ensure high readability rate. Each digit

encoding is separated from the next by a 1/90"—1/60" wide default Intercharacter Gap.

CODE-11 has unique a START/STOP character. The printer generates the couple related to

each symbol. It is visually interpreted by an OPEN TRIANGLE and will always appear on the

HRC string because its size is usually varied to signify the number of check digits being used

in the particular symbol:

 SMALL open triangle means ONE check-digit

 LARGE open triangle means TWO check-digit

The ffield is meaningless and always defaults to the HRC string print.

Code 93 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n15pEM

The CODE-93 bar code fields do not have a defined format length and contain data

belonging to the standard ASCII character set, including control codes.

Since the GS and EM control codes are used, the DC4 DC4 ESC (... EM “Print bar-code”

control sequence is part of the supported character set. The host application must SET THE

HIGHER-ORDER BIT of the above control codes to allow the printer to distinguish between

encodable data and string terminators.

The complete ASCII standard character set is encoded using 47 combinations of 9

bar/space narrow elements arranged into 3 variable width bars with their adjacent variable

width spaces. Each of the bars in the supported combinations can be 1, 2, or 3 modules

wide. The START/STOP character has a 4-module wide bar. CODE-93 directly implements

the basic subset as shown below:

0123456789 A BCDEFGHIJKL MNOP QRS T UVWX Y Z-.SPACES$/+%

($) (%) (/) (+) (as special control characters)

# (as unique START/STOP character)

The other STANDARD-ASCII codes not presented above are represented by means of a

combination of one control character in the above set followed by a symbol in the

alphabetical set. The HRC string is printed BELOW the symbol when ffield is set to 1 without

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands65260071‐001A

check digits. Non-printable ASCII characters are represented in the “control code” format (for

example, CR is ^M, where “control” is represented as DARK-SQUARE symbol).

2of5 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n16pEM

Bidirectional The BID-25 bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and

contain numeric data only. Otherwise, question marks are printed in place of the HRC string,

if possible. If the ocheck digit option field takes a value of 1, an internally generated check

digit is added to the encoded string that will not show on the required HRC string.

2of5 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n17pEM

Interleaved The 2/5-INTERLEAVED bar code does not have a defined format length.

However, the total sum of the characters must be even. nindicates the bar code height and

must be in the range 1 to 12. p must be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters

are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

2of5 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n18pEM

Industrial The 2/5 INDUSTRIAL bar code. Data format length is variable and the supported

character set only provides ASCII numeric figures 0 to 9. nindicates the bar code height in

units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human

Readable Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

2of5 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n19pEM

The 2/5 MATRIX bar code. Data format length is variable and the supported character set

only provides ASCII numeric figures 0 to 9. nindicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch

and must be in the range 1 to 12. pmust be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable

Characters are to be printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

Code 39 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n20pEM

The CODE 39 bar code. Data format length is variable and must always start and end with

an asterisk. It can contain the alphanumeric character listed below:

0123456789

ABCDEFGHIJKL MNOP QRS T UVWX Y Z -. SPACE$/+%*(as start / stop character)

The parameter indicates the bar code height in units of 1/6 inch and must be in the range 1

to 12. The pparameter must be NUL (hex. X'00') if no Human Readable Characters are to be

printed, and 1 (hex. X'01') if they are to be printed.

CODABAR DC4 DC4 ESC ! n22pEM

The Codabar bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain data

belonging to the character set listed hereafter:

0123456789-$:/.+

ABCDEN T *abcdent (only as START/STOP characters)

The printer allows any combination of START/STOP characters. If the first and last

characters of the received string do not belong to the START/STOP characters subset,

question marks are printed in place of the HRC string, if possible

CODE 128 DC4 DC4 ESC ! n23pEM

The CODE-128 bar code data fields do not have a defined format length and contain data

belonging to the standard ASCII character set, including control codes. Since the GS and

EM control codes used within the DC4 DC4 ESC (...EM “Print Bar Code” control sequence

are part of the supported character set, the host application must SET THE HIGHER-

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands66260071‐001A

ORDER BIT of the above control codes to allow the printer to distinguish between encodable

data and string terminators.

POSTNET DC4 DC4 ESC ! n24pEM

The POSTNET bar code data fields contain only numeric data and do not have a defined

format length. POSTNET bar codes have no printed HRC string. The LOW/TALL bars that

encode the symbol comply with the U.S.P.S standard regardless of the p field value.

DC4 DC4 ESC (GS

Prints bar code symbols.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC (GS n1 data GS n2 data ... EM

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'28' X'1D' n1 data ... 19

Decimal Value 20 20 27 40 29 n1 data ... 25

Range 1 = n = 12

0 = p = 1

This sequence prints the bar code symbol according to the previous selection. If you want to print more

than one bar code symbol of the same type and height, GS n defines the distance from the beginning of

the line or between two bar code symbols in multiples of 1/60 or 1/90 of an inch, depending upon the

selected barcode density (120 or 180 dpi). At the end of the line EM must close this command.

Miscellaneous

DC4 DC4 ESC @

Re-initializes the printer.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC @

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'40'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 64

This command resets the printer mode and clears the buffer of printable data.

DC4 DC4 ESC J

Sets amplification factor.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC J hv

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'4A' hv

Decimal Value 20 20 27 74 hv

This command sets the required amplification factor to be applied to the current font.

h It is the horizontal amplification factor; the value range is 1 to 4. It is applied to the basic symbols.

It is the vertical amplification factor; the value range is 1 to 4.

0 values for either the hand vparameters keep the related current amplification factor unchanged.

The internally available symbol's amplification algorithms support the following character attributes that

may be selected by means of the available control sequences within the currently active emulation: double

width, double-height, emphasized, double strike, subscript, superscript, italics, proportional, and

compressed.

Doublewide and double-high attributes must be lower than 2.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands67260071‐001A

DC4 DC4 ESC N

Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front 2 path.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC N n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'4E' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 78 n

Range 0 = n= 1

n Selection

0 Selects and loads the fanfold from the Front2 path. If the paper is present, the printer automatically

parks the fanfold that is not requested before loading the new one (after having pressed the PARK

key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

1 Parks the fanfold loaded from the Front2 path to allow the tear off function (after having pressed the

PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

DC4 DC4 ESC R

String rotation.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC R n string EM

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'52' n string EM

Decimal Value 20 20 27 82 n string EM

n Selection

0 No rotation.

1 Rotation at 0°

2 Rotation at 90°

3 Rotation at 180°

4 Rotation at 270°

DC4 DC4 ESC r

Digit rotation.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC r

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'72'

Decimal Value 20 20 27 144

This command is used to set the required character rotation to be applied to the selected font.

n Selection

0 No rotation.

1 Rotation at 0°

2 Rotation at 90°

3 Rotation at 180°

4 Rotation at 270°

DC4 DC4 ESC T

Selects/loads or parks the fanfold from the Front1 path.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC T n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'54' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 84 n

Range 0 = n = 1

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands68260071‐001A

n Selection

0 Selects and loads the fanfold from the Front1 path. If the paper is present (cut sheet/fanfold), the

printer automatically parks this fanfold that is not requested before loading the new one (after having

pressed the PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

1 Parks the fanfold loaded from the Front1 path to allow the tear off function (after having pressed the

PARK key in response to the TEAR IF NECESS/PARK PAPER message).

DC4 DC4 ESC Y

Selects emulation.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC Y n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'59' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 89 n

Selects the printer emulation type according to the n parameter value:

n Emulation

0 Default printer emulation

1 EPSON FX Series

2 IBM Proprinter XL III

5 IBM 2381+

DC4 DC4 ESC Z

Makes AGA in column.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC Z n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'5A' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 90 n

The n parameter is the column number at 10 cpi where the AGA (Automatic Gap Adjustment) is made.

DC4 DC4 ESC u

Selects the user macros.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC u n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'75' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 117 n

Range 0 = n = 4

n Selection

1 Selects User Macro 1

2 Selects User Macro 2

4 Selects User Macro 3

5 Selects User Macro 4

DC4 DC4 ESC D

Sends the operator panel messages to the serial I/F.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC D n

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'44' n

Decimal Value 20 20 27 68 n

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands69260071‐001A

This command enables or disables sending operator panel messages to the serial I/F. The string to send

is the following: STX “message (16 ASCII byte-characters)”EXT.

n Selection

0 enabled

1 disabled

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter2NativeEmulationCommands70260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands71260071‐001A

Chapter 3. ANSI Emulation Commands

The following printer commands are supported by this printer according to the ANSI X3.64 emulation.

Most dimensional parameters in ANSI protocol are expressed in “decipoints”. For example:

1 decipoint = 1/720 inch

72 decipoints = 1/10 inch

120 decipoints = 1/6 inch

720 decipoints = 1 inch

2880 decipoints = 4 inches

All parameter values must be expressed as ASCII numeric rather than binary values.

Parameters, within commands with multiple parameters, must be separated by a semicolon “;”.

See “Basic Program Sample” at the end of this chapter and result printed by the printer.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands72260071‐001A

Character Set Control

ESC [ p1 x

Selects national character set (Select National Characters -SNC).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 x

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'78'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 120

This command selects the national character set table according to the p1 parameter value. See the

following tables:

Table 1. 7-bit Substitution

p1 NATION p1 NATION

0 USA 13 Swedish/Finnish A

1 Germany 14 Swedish/Finnish B

2 French A 15 Swedish/Finnish C

3 French B 16 Swedish/Finnish D

4 French Canadian 17 Switzerland

5 Netherlands 18 USA (ISO)

6 Italian 19 Yugoslavia

7 United Kingdom 20 United Kingdom A

8 Spanish 21 Turkey

9 Danish/Norwegian A 22 Greece

10 Danish/Norwegian B 25 Cyrillic

11 Danish/Norwegian C

12 Danish/Norwegian D

See the tables in “ANSI National Variations”.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands73260071‐001A

Table 2. 8-bit Substitution

p1 CHARACTER SETS p1 CHARACTER SETS

437 Code Page 437 8579 Kamenicky

850 Code Page 850 8580 CWI

851 Code Page 851 8581 Roman-8

852 Code Page 852 8582 IN2

853 Code Page 853 8583 Code Page 864E

855 Code Page 855 8584 Reserved

858 Code Page 858 8585 Bulgarian

(Euro symbol included) 8586 to 8590 Reserved

860 Code Page 860 8591 ISO 8859-1 Western Europe

863 Code Page 863 8592 SO 8859-2 Eastern Europe

864 Code Page 864 8593 ISO 8859-3 Southern Europe

865 Code Page 865 8594 ISO 8859-4 Northern Europe

866 Code Page 866 8595 ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic

867 Code Page 867 8596 ISO 8859-6 Arabic

1250 Code Page 1250 8597 ISO 8859-7 Greek

5915 ISO 8859-15 8598 ISO 8859-8 Hebrew

(Euro symbol included) 8599 ISO 8859-9 Southern Europe 2

8570 to 8575 Reserved 8600 to 8700 Reserved for other ISO Tables

8576 Mazowia

8577 Turkish

8578 Greek

See the tables in “Character Sets”.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands74260071‐001A

Character Pitch and Print Modes

ESC [ p1; ... pn m

Select graphics rendition (SGR).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; ... pn m

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' ... pn X'6D'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 ... pn 109

This command selects fonts, pitch, print modes, and character styles according to the parameter settings:

p DEFINITION

0 Normal Print Mode

1 Bold Print Mode

2 Subscript Mode

3 Superscript Mode

4 Underline Mode

5 Expanded Mode

6 Proportional

7 Italic Mode

8, 9 Reserved

10 Draft Font

11 Draft Font

12 LQ Gothic

13 Draft Font

14 LQ Courier

15 Draft Italic

16 LQ Gothic Italic

17 Draft Italic

18 LQ Courier Italic

19 Draft

20 Reserved

21 Double Underline Mode

22 Cancel Bold Mode

23 Reserved

24 Cancel Underline Mode (Single & Double)

25 Cancel Expanded Mode

26 Cancel Proportional Mode

Subscript and Superscript modes are enabled through the System Menu (ANSI OPTIONS-S/SCRIPT YES).

Refer to the Administrators Manual.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands75260071‐001A

ESC [ p1; p2 SP B

Graphic size modification (GSM).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 SP B

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'42'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 32 66

This command sets the height and/or width of expanded and oversized characters.

The p1 and p2 parameters are the percentages by which the height and width will be multiplied,

respectively. The default values of p1 and p2 are 100%.

The maximum expansion factor is18700 for oversize mode and 800 for expanded mode, respectively.

ESC [ p1 t

Special print mode (Oversize/Expanded/Bar code Mode -SPM).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 t

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'74'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 116

This sequence selects or deselects oversize expanded or bar code mode according to the p1 parameter

value. See the following table:

p1 FUNCTION

0 Cancel special mode

1 Select oversize mode

2 Select expanded mode

3 Select bar code mode

It can select just one special print mode at a time.

Shift out.

ASCII Code SO

Hexadecimal Value X'0E'

Decimal Value 14

This code enables Expanded/Oversize mode as determined by the last received ESC [ p1 t command.

Shift in.

ASCII Code SI

Hexadecimal Value X'0F'

Decimal Value 15

This code disables Expanded/Oversize mode as determined by the last received ESC [ p1 t command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands76260071‐001A

ESC [ p1; pn {

Unidirectional printing (UDP).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn {

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7B'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 123

This command selects the unidirectional or bidirectional printing according to the p parameter values. See

the following table:

p FUNCTION

0 Cancel unidirectional printing

1 Print unidirectional LQ and DP

2 Print unidirectional Dot Graphics

Horizontal Movements

Back space.

ASCII Code BS

Hexadecimal Value X'08'

Decimal Value 8

The BS code moves the print head one character to the left at the current cpi.

Carriage return.

ASCII Code CR

Hexadecimal Value X'0D'

Decimal Value 13

This code causes the print head to be moved to the left margin on the current line.

Space.

ASCII Code SP

Hexadecimal Value X'20'

Decimal Value 32

This code positions one character space to the right of the print position.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands77260071‐001A

ESC [ p1 '

Horizontal position absolute (HPA).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 '

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'60'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 96

This command causes the print position to be moved to the decipoint location specified by p1. This

sequence can be used to print within the left, top, and bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 a

Horizontal position relative (HPR).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 a

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'61'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 97

This command moves the print position to the right, relative to the current position. The p1 parameter

specifies the number of decipoints. This command cannot be used to move beyond the right margin.

ESC [ p1; p2 s

Left/right margin set (SLR).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 s

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'73'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 115

This command sets the left and right margin values. The p1 parameter specifies the decipoint value of the

left margin. The p2 parameter specifies the decipoint value of the right margin value. The default value for

the left margin is 0. The value for the right margin is the maximum width supported by the printer

configuration (that is 13.6*720=9792).

ESC [ p1 j

Horizontal position backward (HPB).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 j

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'6A'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 106

This command causes the current horizontal position to be moved backwards as specified by the p1

parameter (decipoints).

Horizontal tab.

ASCII Code HT

Hexadecimal Value X'09'

Decimal Value 9

This code causes the print head to be moved to the next tab stop.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands78260071‐001A

ESC H or HTS

Horizontal tab setting.

ASCII Code ESC H or HTS

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'48' (7-bit) or X'88' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 72 (7-bit) or 136 (8-bit)

This command causes a horizontal tab stop to be set to the decipoint value of the current print position.

ESC [ p1; pn u

Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions multiple horizontal tab set (HTS).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn u

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'75'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 117

This command sets up to 22 horizontal tab stops at each decipoint position specified by p parameters.

When specifying more than one position, enter the parameters in ascending order.

Vertical Movements

Line feed.

ASCII Code LF

Hexadecimal Value X'0A'

Decimal Value 10

This code positions the paper one line space as indicated by the current line spacing value.

ESC D or IND

Index.

ASCII Code ESC D or IND

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'44' (7-bit) or X'84' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 68 (7-bit) or 132 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one line space as indicated by the current line

spacing value.

ESC E or NEL

Next line.

ASCII Code ESC E or NEL

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'45' (7-bit) or X'85' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 69 (7-bit) or 133 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one line space as indicated by the current line

spacing value. The column counter is reset to the left margin value.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands79260071‐001A

ESC K or PLD

Partial line down.

ASCII Code ESC K or PLD

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4B' (7-bit) or X'8B' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 75 (7-bit) or 139 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned down one half line space at the current line spacing

value. This can create an appearance of subscripting. This sequence is also used after an ESC L (partial

line up sequence) to recover the original active vertical position.

ESC L or PLU

Partial line up.

ASCII Code ESC L or PLU

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4C' (7-bit) or X'8C' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 76 (7-bit) or 140 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned up one half line space at the current line spacing value.

This can create an appearance of superscripting. This sequence is also used after an ESC K (partial line

down sequence) to recover the original active vertical position.

ESC M or RI

Reverse index.

ASCII Code ESC M or RI

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4D' (7-bit) or X'8D' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 77 (7-bit) or 141 (8-bit)

This command causes the paper to be positioned up one line space at the current line spacing value.

ESC [ p1 d

Vertical position absolute (VPA).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 d

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'64'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 100

This command causes the current vertical position to be set to the decipoint value specified by the p1

parameter relative to the top most line of the current form length. This sequence can be used to print

within the top and the bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 e

Vertical position relative (VPR).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 e

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'65'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 101

This command causes the current vertical position to be advanced to the position specified by the p1

parameter (in decipoints) relative to the current print line position.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands80260071‐001A

ESC [ p1; p2 f

Horizontal and vertical position absolute (HVP).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 f

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'66'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 102

This command causes the current print position to be moved to the vertical (p1) and horizontal (p2)

decipoint locations specified relative to the top left corner of the page.

This sequence can be used to print within the right, left, top and bottom margins.

ESC [ p1 k

Vertical position backward (VPB).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1 k

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'6B'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 107

This command causes the current vertical position to be moved backwards as specified by the p1

parameter (decipoints) relative to the current print line position.

ESC [ p1; pn g

Tab clear (TBC).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn g

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'67'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 103

This command clears horizontal and vertical tab stops. If no parameter is present, the horizontal tab stop

at the current position is cleared (default).

p DESCRIPTION

0 (default) Clear horizontal tab at current position

1 Clear vertical tab at current position

2 Clear all horizontal tab stops

3 Clear all vertical tab stops

Vertical tab.

ASCII Code VT

Hexadecimal Value X'0B'

Decimal Value 11

This code causes printing to be moved to the left margin at the next vertical tab stop.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands81260071‐001A

ESC J or VTS

Vertical tab setting.

ASCII Code ESC J or VTS

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'4A' (7-bit) or X'8A' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 74 (7-bit) or 138 (8-bit)

This command causes a vertical tab stop to be set to the decipoint value of the current vertical position.

ESC [ p1; pn v

Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions (Multiple Vertical Tab Set -VTS).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn v

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'76'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 118

This command sets up to 12 vertical tab stops at each decipoint position specified by p parameters. The

tab stops are measured from the top of the page. When specifying more than one position, enter the

parameters in ascending order.

Form feed.

ASCII Code FF

Hexadecimal Value X'0C'

Decimal Value 12

This code causes the data in the print buffer to be printed out and then advances the paper to the top of

the next form.

ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r

Form definition (FD).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'3B' p3 X'72'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 59 p3 114

This command sets the page length, top and bottom margins.

The p1, p2 and p3 parameters specify the decipoint values.

pn FUNCTION

p1 Page Length

p2 Top Margin Position From the Beginning of the Page

p3 Bottom Margin Position From the End of the Page

The maximum page length value is 15840 decipoints (22 inches).

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands82260071‐001A

ESC [ p1; p2 <SP> G

Sets the line/character spacing.

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 <SP> G

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'47'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 32 71

This command sets the spacing between lines (p1 parameter) and the horizontal character pitch (p2

parameter) in decipoints.

If the vertical spacing value exceeds the current form length, this setting is ignored.

Interface Control

NUL

Ignored.

ASCII Code NUL

Hexadecimal Value X’00’ or NUL

Decimal Value 00

This code is ignored.

ENQ

Enquiry.

ASCII Code ENQ

Hexadecimal Value X'05'

Decimal Value 5

This code is used to request the message string defined by the OSC command when parameter p1=8 is

transmitted to the host.

DC1

Selects printer (Data Control 1).

ASCII Code DC1

Hexadecimal Value X'11'

Decimal Value 17

In parallel interface, this code reselects the printer after the printer has been deselected by a DC3 code.

In serial interface, this code is sent from the printer to the host to indicate that the printer is ready to

receive data.

DC3

Deselects printer (Data Control 3).

ASCII Code DC3

Hexadecimal Value X'13'

Decimal Value 19

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands83260071‐001A

In parallel interface, this code causes the printer to enter the standby condition until a DC1 code is

received.

In serial interface, this code is sent from the printer to the host to indicate that it is not ready to receive

data.

Operating System Control

BEL

Bell.

ASCII Code BEL

Hexadecimal Value X'07'

Decimal Value 7

This code causes the buzzer to sound for about 0.5 second.

DEL

Delete.

ASCII Code DEL

Hexadecimal Value X'7F'

Decimal Value 127

In parallel interface, this code causes the last received character to be deleted.

ESC

Escape.

ASCII Code ESC

Hexadecimal Value X'1B'

Decimal Value 27

This code is used as an escape sequence introducer.

ESC\ or ST

String terminator.

ASCII Code ESC \ or ST

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5C' (7-bit) or X'9C' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 92 (7-bit) or 156 (8-bit)

This command closes the other escape sequences including the operating system and dot graphics

commands.

ESC Q or PU1

Executes Selftest.

ASCII Code ESC Q or PU1

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'51' (7-bit) or X'91' (8-bit)

Decimal Value 27 81 (7-bit) or 145 (8-bit)

In serial interface, upon receipt of this command the printer transmits 1B 50 30 1B 5C.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands84260071‐001A

ESC c

Resets to initial state (RIS).

ASCII Code ESC c

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'63'

Decimal Value 27 99

This command writes the printer parameters from the stored format assigned to the current path into the

current format.

ESC k

Prints test character (PTC).

ASCII Code ESC k

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'6B'

Decimal Value 27 107

This sequence causes one line of the print head test character to be printed.

ESC [ p1; ... pn h

Sets mode (SM).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; ... pn h

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' ... pn X'68'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 ... pn 104

This command sets a specific print mode according to the parameter value. If the first parameter (p1)is

preceded by a “>” symbol then all parameters are interpreted as proprietary defined parameters. If the “>”

character is not specified, all parameters are interpreted as ANSI defined parameters.

The proprietary defined parameter values are:

p MNEMONIC MODE FUNCTION

1 PRM0 Proportional Print Mode

2 CSI Single Character CSI Mode

3 BLD Bold Mode

4 CS2 Character Set 2 Mode

The ANSI defined parameter values are:

p MNEMONIC MODE FUNCTION

0 Ignored

20 LNM Auto CR on LF

ESC p1; pn l

Resets mode (RM).

ASCII Code ESC p1; pn l

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'6C'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 108

This sequence resets the print mode(s) indicated by the p1/pn parameter(s).

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands85260071‐001A

ESC [ p1; p2 SP~

Selects emulation (EMU).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 SP~

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' p2 X'20' X'7E'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 p2 32 126

This sequence selects the emulation according to p values. The p1 parameter is an emulation identifier

value while p2 is a reset control value.

The proprietary defined parameter values are:

p1 p2 FUNCTION

0 ANSI

1 -20 Reserved

21 IBM Proprinter XL 24/24E

22 EPSON LQ 1050

0 Hold values (default). The current settings remain valid after changing the printer

emulation.

1 Full reset. The status of such parameters reverts to defaults dependent on the

selected emulation.

To select ANSI mode from the Proprinter XL 24 mode and maintain the parameters, the sequence would

be: <ESC>[0; 0<SP>~ Leading zeros and defaulting parameters are not guaranteed to be parsed and

therefore should not be used by the application. Parameter p1 & p2 will be expressed as ASCII, not binary,

values. In the example above, “0” is “30H”, not “00H”.

Paper Path Selection

ESC [ p1; pn p

Assign source for forms.

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; p2 p

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'70'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 32 112

This command controls the modes of paths for parking, loading paper. The p parameter is an ASCII value.

See the following table:

P PAPER PATH CONTROL

0-7 Reserved

8 Park paper in the current path. Fanfold can be moved backwards for two form lengths. This creates a

“Paper Out” fault condition that exists until paper is loaded from the control panel.

9 Load Paper from the selected paper path.

10 Select and load paper from the Front2 (is the optional Front 2 push tractor assembly is installed).

The current paper will be parked or ejected.

11 Select and load paper from the Front 1. The current paper will be parked.

13 Select and load paper from the Front 2. (is the optional Front 2 push tractor assembly is installed).

The current paper will be parked or ejected.

14 Reserved

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands86260071‐001A

Barcode Functions

ESC [ p1; pn }

Sets bar code parameters (BC).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn }

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7D'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 125

This command allows selection of the bar code characteristics such as style height, symbol rotation and so

on. The command ESC [3 t enables the bar code mode while ESC [0 t disables the mode.

p1: Bar code style

p1 FUNCTION

0 Interleaved 2 of 5

1 Bidirectional 2 of 5

2 Matrix 2 of 5

3 Industrial 2 of 5

4 Code 3 of 9 (default)

5 EAN-8

6 EAN-13

7 Code 11

9 Codabar (default start/stop = a/t)

10 Codabar (default start/stop = b/n)

11 Codabar (default start/stop = c/*)

12 Codabar (default start/stop = d/e)

13 UPC-A

14 UPC-E

15 Code 93

16 Code 128 (subset A, B and C)

17 Code 128 (subset A, B and C)

18 Code 128 (subset A, B and C)

19 MSI

20 UPC 2 Supplemental

21 UPC 5 Supplemental

22 EAN 2 Supplemental

23 EAN 5 Supplemental

50 Postnet

p2: Barcode Height

p2 FUNCTION

1 Minimum bar code height (1/12 inch)

120 Maximum bar code height (10 inches)

12 Default bar code height (1 inch)

p3: Human Readable Input (HRI)

p3 FUNCTION

0 Disables printing of the HRI

1 Enables printing of the HRI (default)

p4: Narrow Bar

Default width value: 2 (120, 144 and 180 dpi)

p5: Wide Bar Width

Default width value: 3 (120, 144 dpi), 4 (180 dpi)

p6: Narrow Space Width

Default width value: 6 (120, 144 and 180 dpi)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands87260071‐001A

p7: Wide Space Width

Default width value: 7 (120, 144 dpi), 8 (180 dpi)

p8: Intercharacter Space Width

Default width value: 3 (120, 144 dpi), 4 (180 dpi)

p9: Rotation

p9 FUNCTION

0 0 degrees using current font

1 0 degrees using special HRI font

2 90 degrees using special HRI font

3 180 degrees using special HRI font

4 270 degrees using special HRI font

p10: Horizontal Print Density for Bar Codes Printed

p10 FUNCTION

1 120 dpi horizontal density

2 144 dpi horizontal density (Reserved)

3 180 dpi horizontal density

p11: Check Digit

p11 FUNCTION

0 No check digit requested (default)

1 Check digit requested

p12: Human Readable Font -Reserved

p13: Bar Code Height (in 1/24th-inch increments) -Reserved

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands88260071‐001A

Basic Program Sample

100 DEFSTR

110 WIDTH

120 LPRINT

121 LPRINT

130 LPRINT

140 LPRINT

150 LPRINT

160 LPRINT

170 LPRINT

180 LPRINT

190 LPRINT

200 LPRINT

210 LPRINT

220 LPRINT

230 LPRINT

240 LPRINT

250 LPRINT

260 LPRINT

270 LPRINT

280 LPRINT

290 LPRINT

300 LPRINT

310 LPRINT

320 LPRINT

340 LPRINT

350 LPRINT

260 LPRINT

370 LPRINT

371 LPRINT

380 LPRINT

381 LPRINT

390 LPRINT

400 LPRINT

410 REM

420 LPRINT

430 REM

440 LPRINT

441 LPRINT

450 LPRINT

460 REM

470 LPRINT

471 LPRINT

480 LPRINT

490 LPRINT

500 LPRINT

510 LPRINT

520 FOR

530 LPRINT

540 NEXT

550 LPRINT

560 LPRINT

570 FOR

580 LPRINT

590 NEXT

600 LPRINT

610 LPRINT

620 END

DEFSTR

WIDTH

LPRINT

REM

LPRINT

REM

LPRINT

E:ESC=CHRS(27) ’Define Escape character

.LPT1:*,255

.FOLLOWING ARE SOME OF THIS PRINTER’S .;

.FEATURES USING THE ANSI EMULATION.

ESC;.[;72 C.;.10 CPI (PICA).

ESC;.[;60 G.;.12 CPI (ELITE).

ESC;.[;48 G.;.15 CPI.

ESC;.[;72 C.;.10 CPI.

ESC;.[6m.;.PROPOERTIONAL MODE.

ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TDO NORMAL.

ESC;.5m.;.DOUBLE-WIDE MODE.

LPRINT ESC;.0m’:.BACK TO NORMAL.

LPRINT ESC;.[1m.;.BOLD PRINTING.

LPRINT ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.

LPRINT ESC;.[1m.;.BOLD PRINTING.

LPRINT ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.

ESC;.L.;.PARTIAL LINE UP .;

ESC;.K.;./ .;

ESC;.L.;.BACK TO NORMAL.

ESC;.[4m.;.UNDERLINE MODE.

ESC;.[0m.;.BACK TO NORMAL.

123.;

’456.

.1234567890123456789012345678901234567890.;

.12345678901234567890.

ESC;.[10m.;.DRAFT PRINT MODE.

ESC;.[720;2880s.

.LEFT MARGIN NOW BEGINS AT 1 INCH AND .;

.RIGHT MARGIN NOW ENDS AT 4 INCHES.

ESC;.[0;9792S.

.LEFT MARGIN NOW BEGINS AT 0 INCH AND .;

.RIGHT MARGIN NOW ENDS AT 13.6 INCHES.

ESC;.[62m.;.LQ PRINT MODE .

ESC;.[120; G.;

[=1 TO 3

.1/6 INCH LINE FEED.

ESC;.[90; G.;

J=1 TO 3

.1/8 INCH LINE FEED.

ESC;.[120; G.;.NOW 1/6 INCH LINE FEED.

.A FORMFEED <FF> FOLLOWS THIS LINE.;CHR$(12)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands89260071‐001A

Basic Program Printed Output

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter3ANSIEmulationCommands90260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands91260071‐001A

Chapter 4. Intelligent Printer Commands

This chapter explains the concepts of the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). IPDS is an orderable

feature for your printer. The intent of this chapter is to provide a basic overview of how IPDS works. The

Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference provides detailed information about IPDS programming in general

while Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,” provides a detailed description of the IPDS commands

that the Printronix Model S828 printer uses. If the programming information in the Intelligent Printer Data

Stream Reference is different from the programming information in this manual, use this manual to program

the Printronix Model S828 printer.

Overview

The Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) is a structured-field data stream for managing and controlling

printer processes. IPDS uses all points addressability that allows users to position text, images, graphic

pictures, bar codes, and overlays at any defined point on a printed page. Later pages in this chapter

explain each of these data types and their uses.

IPDS offers the flexibility of creating data and commands independent of the type of attachment protocol

used by the printer or its system. Using the same data stream, printers can attach to control units or any

type of network link that does not restrict the transmission of data to the printer.

IPDS commands within the data stream enable the host processor to control and manage the downloading

of symbol sets and stored objects, such as overlays and page segments. The printer can later use these

stored objects to construct a printed page.

The IPDS command structure also provides the means for returning error information to the host, for

returning query information, and for performing error recovery actions.

Physical Medium

The S828 IPDS defines the physical medium as an area with boundaries of width and depth that define

the limits of this page. The maximum print position (MPP) defines the width of the current page in

characters.

MPP x 1/CPI = width in inches (CPI is the number of characters per inch).

The maximum page length (MPL) defines the depth of the current page in lines.

MPL x 1/LPI = depth in inches (LPI is the number of lines per inch).

The top margin on this page is the top-of-form position, as selected by pressing SET TOP OF FORM on

the operator panel. Figure 2 shows the physical medium layout.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands92260071‐001A

Figure 2. The Physical Medium

The physical medium defined above is assumed to coincide with the actual physical medium (form) as that

terminology is used in the following discussion.

IPDS Coordinate Systems

IPDS uses coordinate systems to define any point on a page. All IPDS commands containing location

parameters use these coordinate systems to define distance measurements. The coordinate systems

specify these distances in logical units called units.

Many IPDS commands contain parameters that specify values for position or size in units. For example,

one unit may equal approximately 0.018 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Before using these values, the S828

Printer truncates the specified values to multiples of 0.18 mm (0.0007 in. [1/1440 in.]) for all unit parameters

except those associated with DP, and DP Text baseline positioning. The S828 Printer truncates DP, and

DP Text baseline positioning parameters to multiples of 0.36 mm (0.014 in. [1/72 in.]). The unit parameters

are identified in Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,”.

X and Y Medium Coordinate System

The Xm and Ym coordinates, known as the medium coordinate system, relate directly to the physical

medium. The Xm, Ym coordinate system is fixed for each medium or form size. IPDS commands cannot

change the origin and the orientation of these coordinates. The origin (Xm=0, Ym=0) is always at the top

left hand corner of the physical medium. Positive Xm values begin at the origin and increase along the top

of the sheet, from left to right. Positive Ym values begin at the origin and increase along the left side of the

sheet moving downward toward the bottom of the sheet. Figure 3 shows the Xm, Ym coordinate system:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands93260071‐001A

Figure 3. The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System

Logical Page Layout

IPDS describes the printed output in terms of logical pages. The logical page does not have to be

contained completely on the physical medium. However, printing can only occur where the two areas

overlap. Figure 4 shows the physical-logical page relationship.

Figure 4. The Physical-Logical Page Relationship

The logical page reference corner is the corner of the logical page that is at the smallest Xp, Yp position.

This corner does not necessarily have to coincide with the physical medium origin (Xm=0, Ym=0). The

logical page size in the X dimension is the 'X-Extent', and the logical page size in the Y dimension is the

'Y-Extent'. IPDS commands specify the logical page size and location. Figure 5 shows the relationship

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands94260071‐001A

between the X and Y coordinates and the logical and physical medium.

Figure 5. The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page

I and B Coordinate System

In addition to the X,Y coordinate system, IPDS uses another coordinate system, the I-B coordinate system.

These coordinates describe the placement and orientation of text or images on the logical page. The

printer places characters along the I-axis for a line of text. The B-axis is the direction in which the printer

places lines of text on the logical page. IPDS commands can change both the origin and the orientation of

the I and B axes (see Figure 5).

Direction: As the printer places text characters on the page, the inline coordinate increases. The direction

of this increase is the positive inline direction or +I. The baseline coordinate also increases as the printer

places text lines on the page. The direction of this increase is the positive baseline direction or +B.

Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B directions. Chapter 5, “IPDS

Programming Information,” contains specific information about these commands.

Distance: The inline coordinate increases a predetermined distance as the printer places the text

characters on the page. This distance is the character increment. The baseline coordinate also increases a

predetermined distance as the printer places lines of text on the page. This distance is the baseline

increment. Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B distances. Chapter 5,

“IPDS Programming Information,” contains specific information about these commands.

Initial coordinates: The coordinates of the first print position on the logical page are the initial

coordinates. The initial inline print coordinate is Ii. The initial baseline print coordinate is Bi.

Current coordinates: The coordinates of the current print position on the logical page are the current

coordinates. The current inline print coordinate is Ic. The current baseline print coordinate is Bc. Figure 6

shows the various I and B coordinates on the logical page:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands95260071‐001A

Figure 6. The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page

Notes:

1. The S828 IPDS Printer text character box is 180 units high by 144 units wide at 10 CPI when the XpYp

units equal 1,440 per inch. The left edge of the character box is at the specified inline position and the

bottom edge of the character box is 20 units below the specified baseline position.

2. If the bottom edge of the character box falls below the printable area on the physical medium, the

character will not print. In this situation, a baseline move (Relative Move Baseline or Absolute Move

Baseline) text command can place the character box totally within the printable area.

Processing IPDS Commands

The structured field format of IPDS allows one or more commands to be sent to the printer in a continuous

stream. Each command is self-describing; the command length, type, optional parameters, and data are all

part of each specific command. The printer processes each command in the order it is received. Every

IPDS command contains a flag byte. Setting the Acknowledgment Required bit on in this flag byte

indicates to the printer the end of a command stream sequence. The printer then sends an Acknowledge

Reply to the host. Figure 7 shows an example of an IPDS data stream:

Figure 7. An Example of the IPDS Data Stream

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands96260071‐001A

IPDS Command Format

All of the printer commands use the following format:

Length Command Flag Correlation ID Data

Note: Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit. A

description of each field follows.

Length

Length is a two-byte field that specifies the length of this command. This count includes the two-byte

length field, the command field, the flag byte, and the optional fields (Correlation ID and Data Fields). The

Length field can be any value from 5 to 32,767 (X'7FFF').

Command

Command is a two-byte field that specifies the IPDS command code. See next table for a list of valid

command codes.

Flag

Flag is a one-byte field that contains the IPDS command stream flags.

Bit 0 of this byte is the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ) flag. If this bit is on, the host requests the printer

to send an Acknowledge Reply.

Bit 1 of this byte is the Correlation ID flag. If this bit is B’1’, a two-byte correlation number follows this flag

byte. If this bit is B'0', the optional correlation number is not present and the following byte or bytes contain

the data field.

Bit 2 of this byte is the acknowledgement continuation flag. If this bit is B'1', the host is requesting

continuation of the current Acknowledge Reply. If this bit is B'0', the host is not requesting continuation.

Bits 3-7 of the flag byte are reserved and must be zero.

Correlation ID

Correlation ID is a two-byte value that specifies an identifier for this command. The Correlation ID is an

optional field and is only present if bit 1 of the flag byte is B'1'. The printer can use any value between

0000 and FFFF for this ID. If an error occurs on a command prior to acceptance for processing, the printer

sends a negative acknowledgement (NACK) to the host. If the printer recognizes the command that

caused the error, the Correlation ID field in the NACK will contain the ID of the command responsible for

the NACK. Correlation ID is also returned in response to commands that request information and

commands that request an acknowledgement.

Data

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands97260071‐001A

Data is an optional field and is not present for all commands. This field contains specific subcommands,

parameters, and data appropriate for the given command. The length of the data field can range from 0 to

32760 (X'7FF8') if the correlation ID is present. If the correlation ID is not present, the length of the data

field can range from 0 to 32762 (X'7FFA').

Table 3. Valid IPDS Command Codes for the Printronix S828 IPDS Printer

Command Hex Code Description

SHS D697 Set Home State

STM D6E4 Sense Type and Model

NOP D603 No Operation

LSS D61E Load Symbol Set

XOH D68F Execute Order Home State

XOA D633 Execute Order Any State

BP D6AF Begin Page

EP D6BF End Page

LCC D69F Load Copy Control

LPD D6CF Logical Page Descriptor

LPP D66D Logical Page Position

WBCC D680 Write Bar Code Control

WBC D681 Write Bar Code

WGC D684 Write Graphics Control

WG D685 Write Graphics

WIC D63D Write Image Control

WI D64D Write Image

WT D62D Write Text

BO D6DF Begin Overlay

DO D6EF Deactivate Overlay

IO D67D Include Overlay

BPS D65F Begin Page Segment

DPS D66F Deactivate Page Segment

IPS D67F Include Page Segment

LE D61D Load Equivalence

LFE D63F Load Font Equivalence

DF D64F Deactivate Font

END D65D End

Acknowledge Requests and Replies

The following sections explain:

● Acknowledge Reply (ACK)

● Host Acknowledgment Requests

● Printer Acknowledgement Replies

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands98260071‐001A

Acknowledge Reply (ACK)

The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally

requested information to the host application program.

The application program uses the Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to

initiate error recovery actions when necessary.

The format for the Acknowledge Reply is:

Length D6FF Flag Correlation ID Data

The printer sends an acknowledgment:

● Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on

● Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response must be

sent.

A negative reply (NACK), if required, has priority over a positive reply (ACK).

Length

Length is the total length of the ACK reply, including this field. The maximum length of this command is

255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation ID present), the data field can be up to

250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the maximum data field length is 248 bytes.

D6FF

D6FF in the command ID field indicates this is an Acknowledge Reply from the printer to the host.

Flag

Flag is a one-byte field that specifies the flags for this command. Bits 1, 2, and 7 are the only bits used in

this byte. All other bits are reserved and must be zeros. If bit 1 is BX'1', a Correlation ID is present in this

command. If bit 1 is BX'0', no Correlation ID is present. If bit 2 is B'1', the response can be continued in a

later Acknowledge Reply. If bit 2 is B'0', the response is complete in this Acknowledge Reply.

Correlation ID

Correlation ID is a two-byte field that contains the identifier from a previously received command, such as

Sense Type and Model. If the printer receives a command that requires an Acknowledgment Reply, and if

that command contains a correlation ID, the printer also includes the same correlation ID in its

corresponding field. Also, if an error occurs and the printer can recognize the command that caused the

error, the printer includes the correlation ID of that command in the NACK.

Data

Acknowledgement Type Page/Copy Counters Special Data (SD)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands99260071‐001A

DATA is the field that follows the correlation ID field or the flag byte if no correlation ID is present. The

length of this field can be 0-250 (X'00'-X'FA') if no correlation ID is present, and 0-248 (X'00'-X'F8') if the

correlation ID is present.

The first byte of the data field is the acknowledgment type. Values of 00, 01, 04, and 06 for this byte

indicate a positive acknowledgment (ACK). A value of X'80' for this byte indicates a negative

acknowledgment (NACK). Any other values for this byte are invalid.

The next 4 bytes of the data field are the page/copy counters. The first two page/copy counter bytes

(most significant bytes) are a stacked page counter. This counter identifies how many pages have

successfully stacked and printed. The last two page/copy counter bytes (least significant bytes) are

reserved and must be zero.

Following the page/copy counter bytes is the Special Data (SD) area. Depending on the acknowledgment

type, this field can be omitted, can contain requested printer information, or can contain sense information.

The following chart summarizes the acknowledgments and the special data areas:

Type Meaning Special Data Area Contents

X'00' ACK None

X'01' ACK Type and Model

X'04' ACK Resource List

X'06' ACK Printer Information

X'80' NACK Sense Bytes

For a detailed explanation of the Special Data (SD) area contents, see Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming

Information”.

Host Acknowledgment Requests

The host requests an acknowledgment from the printer by setting the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ)

flag bit on in the IPDS command (see “IPDS Command Format”). This request occurs in two

instances:

1. In any command of a command sequence when the host wants a positive acknowledgment (ACK) that

the printer has received and accepted the command sequence for processing.

2. In commands sent by the host to request the return of printer information.

If the printer receives a command that is normally used to request the return of printer data but the ARQ

flag is not on, the printer ignores this command.

A positive acknowledgment (ACK) at the end of a command stream is equivalent to an ACK on each and

every command preceding the command that has the ACK. An ACK is an indication from the printer that

all commands since the last acknowledgment are accepted for processing.

Printer Acknowledgment Replies

The printer sends an Acknowledge Reply to the host to:

● Indicate that a received command or command sequence requesting acknowledgment has been

accepted for processing

● Return requested printer information

● Report errors

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands100260071‐001A

The printer sends a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK) to the host to indicate that an error has

occurred.

The printer can send an ACK or a NACK in response to an ARQ. If an error occurs, the printer can send a

NACK without receiving an ARQ.

The following general rules apply to the printer replies:

● If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command also requests specific

printer information, then:

1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and

2. The printer sends the requested information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.

● If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command does not request

specific printer information, then:

1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and

2. The printer does not include any information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.

● If the printer generates the Acknowledge Reply as a result of detecting an error, then the printer sends a

Negative Acknowledgment (NACK) to the host. Under this condition, the printer also sends to the host

information concerning the error. This error information is in the data field portion of the Acknowledge

Reply.

● The Exception Handling Control command instructs the printer on error processing. For more

information about the Exception Handling Control, see Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,”.

● The printer can only return one error per NACK.

● If the printer receives a command requesting an acknowledgment, the printer expects the host to wait

for the acknowledgment before sending further commands. If the printer receives additional commands

from the host within the same transmission after the acknowledgment, the commands are ignored.

IPDS Data

There are various forms of data that the printer uses for creating the output page. These include text,

graphics, bar codes, and images. The printed page can include any combination of this data.

Text data contains lines of character information which the printer places in sequence on the page.

Graphics data contains lines, arcs, markers, and other elements which present a printed picture.

Bar code data is a data type that supports applications requiring precision printing of encoded information

in a form that is recognizable by scanning devices.

Image data contains rectangular arrays of information. The array consists of a sequence of scan lines.

Each scan line consists of picture elements (pels). The image data contains one (dot position) bit per pel.

The text, graphics, bar code, and image data types each have their own unique commands. Chapter 5,

“IPDS Programming Information,” contains a detailed description of these commands.

Blocks of graphics, image, or bar code data are presented as a single unit to the printer. The printer

enters the appropriate Block State (graphics block, image block, or bar code block) to create the entire

data group for that block of data.

Page segments and overlays are any combinations of text, graphics, bar codes, and images. The printer

can store these segments and overlays for later use as the page is created. For information about segments,

see “Include Page Segment (IPS)”. For information about overlays, see “Begin Overlay (BO)”. Figure 8

shows various data types on a page.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands101260071‐001A

Figure 8. A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer

Notes:

1. Overlays and page segments can be merged on this page.

2. Text and data blocks can be positioned at different places on this page.

3. A logical page can be positioned anywhere with respect to the physical medium.

Mixing Rules

IPDS allows the same physical pel to be overwritten an unlimited number of times. Overwriting can occur

both within a block and across blocks. For example, within text blocks, overwriting can be caused by using

the Overstrike control. Within a graphics block, overwriting occurs whenever one graphics area or figure

overlays another. Across block overwriting can occur whenever one IPDS block physically overlays any

portion of another IPDS block.

Within each block, the S828 IPDS Printer further defines background pels and foreground pels. Foreground

pels are:

● The pels of a character

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands102260071‐001A

● The pels of a rule

● The pels of an image

● The pels of a graphic line or arc

● The pels of a filled area

● The pels of a bar code.

Background pels are all other pels.

Text data, because it prints at a different physical resolution than the data in the other blocks, does not

logically mix with any other data type. The only mixing that takes place between text data and any other

data type is the (possible) physical mixing of ink on forms.

For the S828 IPDS Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data within a given block of image, graphics, or bar

code data is quite simple: background pels are transparent; foreground pels are opaque. Thus,

background pels always show through what is underneath (what was received earlier), while foreground

pels cover it up. In other words, a pel prints in the color of its last overwriting.

Note: Color of medium is a valid color for image, graphics, and bar code data. Thus, foreground pels in

this color cover up pels of any other color that are underneath.

For the S828 IPDS Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data across blocks is the same as it is within

blocks except for text. Thus, across image and graphics, or bar code blocks, background pels are

transparent, while foreground pels are opaque.

IPDS Operating States

There are various operating states using the IPDS commands. The following states define the operating

environment for this printer:

● Home state

● Page state

● Overlay state

● Page segment state

● Block state.

While in the page, overlay, or page segment state, the printer can enter a block state. The block state

causes the printer to process a block of data. There are image blocks, graphics blocks, and bar code

blocks. Thus, the printer can enter any of the data block states from any of the operating states.

Home State

Home state is the initial IPDS operating state. The printer returns to home state at the end of each page,

page segment, or overlay. In addition, the printer can enter the home state by receiving a Set Home State

command. The S828 IPDS Printer also goes to home state when a NACK is returned.

While in the home state, the printer receives control and initialization commands to prepare for a print

operation. In this state, the printer can also receive commands that request the return of printer information

to the host application program.

Page State

Page state is the operating state for printing a logical page. The printer enters the page state from the

home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page command.

In the page state, the printer can receive commands that merge previously defined and loaded overlay and

page segments with the current page information. The printer can also receive Write Text commands that

position text on the logical page. The presence of Write Image (block) Control, Write Graphics (block)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands103260071‐001A

Control, or Write Bar Code (block) Control commands in the data stream indicates that the printed page

contains individual blocks of image, graphics, or bar code data for positioning on the page. These

commands cause a state transition to occur to an appropriate page block state. In the block state, the

printer establishes the initial conditions and processes the block of data onto the page. Receiving an End

command in a page block state terminates that state and returns processing back to the page state.

Figure 9 shows the relationship between the home state, page state, and block states.

Figure 9. The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States

Overlay State

Overlay state is the operating state that stores data in the printer. The printer enters the overlay state from

the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Overlay command.

A parameter in the Begin Overlay command provides an identifier for later references to this overlay. The

printer saves the currently active Logical Page Descriptor value, the Load Font Equivalence value, and the

Load Equivalence value as part of the stored overlay definition.

The same commands that the printer uses in the page state are also valid while in the overlay state.

Figure 10 shows the relationship between the home state, overlay state, and block states.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands104260071‐001A

Figure 10. The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State

Page Segment State

The printer enters the page segment state from the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page

Segment command. A parameter in the Begin Page Segment command provides an identifier for later

references to this segment.

Page segments assume the environment (Logical Page Descriptor, Load Font Equivalence, and Load

Equivalence) that is active at the time the segment is presented.

While in a page segment state, the printer can only receive commands to write text, image, bar code, and

graphics blocks.

Figure 11 shows the relationship between the home state, page segment state, and block

states.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands105260071‐001A

Figure 11. The Relationship between Home State, Page Segment State, and Block States

Summary of the IPDS States and Commands

Next table shows all the valid IPDS commands for the S828 IPDS Printer and the initial and ending states for

each command. The printer must be in the initial state shown for each command for that command to be

valid. The ending state is the resulting state the printer enters after a valid command processes.

Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for the S828 IPDS Printer

Cmd Hex Code Description Initial State Ending State

SHS D697 Set Home State Any Home

STM D6E4 Sense Type and Model Any No Change

NOP D603 No Operation Any No Change

LSS D61E Load Symbol Set Home Home

XOH D68F Execute Order Home State Home Home

XOA D633 Execute Order Any State Any No Change (See Note 1)

BP D6AF Begin Page Home Page

EP D6BF End Page Page, Page Segment, Home

or Overlay

LCC D69F Load Copy Control Home Home

LPD D6CF Logical Page Descriptor Home Home

LPP D66D Logical Page Position Home Home

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands106260071‐001A

Table 4. IPDS Command Code Summary for 828 IPDS Printer (continued)

Cmd Hex Code Description Initial State Ending State

WBCC D680 Write Bar Code Control Page, Page Segment, Page Bar Code Block, Page

or Overlay Segment Bar Code Block, or

Overlay Bar Code Block

WBC D681 Write Bar Code Page Page Bar Code Block, No Change

Page Segment Bar Code

Block, or Overlay Bar

Code Block

WGC D684 Write Graphics Control Page, Page Segment, Page Graphics Block, Page

or Overlay Segment Graphics Block,

or Overlay Graphics Block

WG D685 Write Graphics Page Graphics Block, No Change

Page Segment Graphics

Block, or Overlay

Graphics Block

WIC D63D Write Image Control Page, Page Segment, Page Image Block, Page

or Overlay Segment Image Block,

or Overlay Image Block

WI D64D Write Image Page Image Block, Page No Change

Segment Image Block,

or Overlay Image Block

WT D62D Write Text Page, Page Segment, No Change

or Overlay

BO D6DF Begin Overlay Home Overlay

DO D6EF Deactivate Overlay Home Home

IO D67D Include Overlay Page or Overlay No Change

BPS D65F Begin Page Segment Home Page Segment

DPS D66F Deactivate Page Segment Home Home

IPS D67F Include Page Segment Page or Overlay No Change

LE D61D Load Equivalence Home Home

LFE D63F Load Font Equivalence Home, Page, Page No Change

Segment, or Overlay

DF D64F Deactivate Font Home Home

END D65D End See Note 2 See Note 2

Notes:

1. The Discard Buffered Data subcommand in the Execute Order Any State command causes the printer to

enter the home state.

2. The End command is valid in any page block, overlay block, or page segment block state and causes the

printer to return to the corresponding page, overlay, or page segment state.

Figure 11 shows all of the IPDS states and their commands. Notice that some commands can only occur in a

specific state, some commands can occur in more than one state, and some commands can occur in any

state. Also note that the printer can only enter the page state, the page segment state, and the overlay state

from the home state.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands107260071‐001A

Figure 11. The Complete IPDS State Diagram

A Typical IPDS Command Sequence

The following chart shows an example of a typical IPDS command sequence. This sequence contains five

basic categories:

1. Initialization

2. Preparation

3. Page Segment

4. Overlay

5. Page

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands108260071‐001A

Each category starts with a command from the host to the printer and ends with an acknowledgment from

the printer to the host. An analysis of each category follows this example.

Note: . indicates a command from the host to the printer. . indicates a reply from the printer to the host.

Table 5. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence

Printer Command CMD Command Name Description

State Direction

Initialization STM Sense Type and Model Request Device Information

Sequence

ACK Acknowledgement Response Return Type/Model Information

Preparatory SHS Set Home State Set Printer Home State

Sequence LPD Logical Page Descriptor Define Logical Page

LPP Logical Page Position Locate Logical Page

LCC Load Copy Control Load Page Copy Information

LFE Load Font Equivalence Load Font Mapping

ACK Acknowledgement Response Acknowledge Successful Operation

Page BPS Begin Page Segment Set Printer to Page Segment State

Segment WT Write Text Store Text Data in Page Segment

Sequence WT Write Text Store Text Data in Page Segment

WT Write Text Store Text Data in Page Segment

Block WIC Write Image Control Start Page Segment Image Block

State State

WI Write Image Store Image Data in Page Segment

End Block END End End Image Block State

State WT Write Text Store Text Data in Page Segment

WT Write Text Store Text Data in Page Segment

EP End Page Return to Home State

ACK Acknowledgement Response Acknowledge Successful Operation

Overlay BO Begin Overlay Enter Overlay State

Sequence WT Write Text Store Text Data in Overlay

WT Write Text Store Text Data in Overlay

IO Include Overlay Include Another Overlay

Block WGC Write Graphics Control Enter Overlay Graphics Block State

State WG Write Graphics Store Graphics Data in Overlay

WG Write Graphics Store Graphics Data in Overlay

End Block END End End Overlay Graphics Block State

State WT Write Text Store Text in Overlay

WT Write Text Store Text in Overlay

IO Include Overlay Include Another Overlay

IPS Include Page Segment Include Page Segment in Overlay

EP End Page Return to Home State

ACK Acknowledgement Response Acknowledge Successful Operation

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands109260071‐001A

Table 3. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence (continued)

Printer Command CMD Command Name Description

State Direction

Page BP Begin Page Enter Page State

Sequence WT Write Text Send Text Data to Printer

IO Include Overlay Print Overlay

IPS Include Page Segment Print Page Segment

Block WIC Write Image Content Start Page Segment Image Block

State State

WI Write Image Send Image Data to Printer

End Block END End End Image Block State

State WT Write Text Send Text Data to Printer

WT Write Text Send Text Data to Printer

IO Include Overlay Print Overlay

IPS Include Pate Segment Print Page Segment

EP End Page Complete All Printing and Return to

Home State

ACK Acknowledgement Response Acknowledge Successful Operation

Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence

Before any printing begins, it is necessary to specify certain parameters and conditions for the printer. The

following sample command sequence accomplishes this task:

● STM (Sense Type and Model)

● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply)

● SHS (Set Home State)

● LPD (Logical Page Descriptor)

● LPP (Logical Page Position)

● LCC (Load Copy Control)

● LFE (Load Font Equivalence)

● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).

Note: This sequence is only a typical example. It is not mandatory for the host to send all of these

commands.

STM (Sense Type and Model): The host sends the STM command to sense the printer characteristics.

ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with

type and model information to the host. This information includes printer number (S828), model, and the

various function set vector information.

SHS (Set Home State): The host sends the SHS command to make sure the printer is in the home state

before the start of a print job.

LPD (Logical Page Descriptor): The LPD command sets print characteristics for the logical page. These

parameters include:

● Page size

● Initial coordinates

● Initial left margin

● Intercharacter increment

● Baseline increment

● Font ID

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands110260071‐001A

● Text color.

LPP (Logical Page Position): The LPP command positions the upper-left corner of the logical page (as

defined by the LPD command) with respect to the top-of-form setting. This command locates the logical

page on the physical medium.

LCC (Load Copy Control): The LCC command specifies which overlays to include on each subsequent

page and which suppressions to activate for each page. Suppression allows selective suppression of data

while printing.

LFE (Load Font Equivalence): The LFE command maps a local font identifier (from within the text,

graphics, or bar code data) to a global ID used for resource management. This command also specifies

for each font attributes, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, and italics.

ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with

the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This command

indicates to the host that the printer is now ready to accept data for print operations. This is the end of the

initialization and preparation sequence.

Page Segment Sequence

The page segment sequence creates one or more page segments for later printing. The following

command sequence illustrates the loading of a sample page segment:

● BPS (Begin Page Segment)

● WT (Write Text)

● WIC (Write Image Control)

● WI (Write Image)

● END (End)

● WT (Write Text)

● EP (End Page)

● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).

Note: This sequence is only an example. A page segment can contain any combination of text, image,

graphics, or bar code data.

BPS (Begin Page Segment): The host sends the BPS command to the printer, causing the printer to

leave the home state and enter the page segment state. The page segment state creates a segment of

page data to save within the printer for later printing. The BPS command contains an identifier (ID) for

later use in selecting this segment. This segment can contain combinations of text, images, bar codes, and

graphics.

WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a

page segment state, this text information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the

page segment. The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the page segment state.

WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.

Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.

WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of image data to the printer. One or more of these

commands create the actual image for later printing.

END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page

segment state with the image stored for later use.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands111260071‐001A

WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text

data can be added to the page segment. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, this segment

could also include additional graphics data, image data, or bar code data.

EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page segment state and return to the

home state Printronix recommends that this command contain an acknowledgment request to let you know

of successful execution of the page segment.

ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with

the ACK command to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This

command indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the segment data and stored this

information for later printing.

Overlay Sequence

The overlay sequence creates one or more overlays for later printing. The following command sequence

illustrates the loading of a typical overlay:

● BO (Begin Overlay)

● WT (Write Text)

● IO (Include Overlay)

● WGC (Write Graphics Control)

● WG (Write Graphics)

● END (End)

● WT (Write Text)

● IO (Include Overlay)

● IPS (Include Page Segment)

● EP (End Page)

● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).

Note: This sequence is only an example. An overlay can contain any combination of text, image blocks,

graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.

BO (Begin Overlay): The host sends the BO command to the printer causing the printer to leave the

home state and enter the overlay state. The overlay state creates an overlay of data to save within the

printer for later printing. The BO command contains an identifier (ID) for later use in selecting this overlay.

WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in an

overlay state, this information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the overlay.

The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the overlay state.

IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current

overlay. This command contains an ID field that selects the desired overlay.

WGC (Write Graphics Control): The WGC command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state.

Parameters in this command specify the placement, size, and orientation of the graphics block.

WG (Write Graphics): The WG command sends graphics data to the printer. The graphics data

(contained in drawing orders) specifies the various elements of the graphic. These include color, size, line

type, line width, and other parameters. One or more WG commands present the graphics picture.

END (End): The END command terminates the graphics block state. The printer remains in the overlay

state with the graphics block as part of the overlay.

WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text

data can be added to the overlay. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, image data, bar code

data, or additional graphics data could also be included in the overlay.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands112260071‐001A

IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current

overlay.

IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge

onto the current overlay. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment.

EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the overlay state and return to the home

state. Printronix recommends that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful

transmission of the overlay.

ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with

the ACK reply, to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply

indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the overlay data and stored this information for later

printing.

Page Sequence

The page sequence causes data to print on the current page. This data can include previously stored

overlays or page segments, as well as text data. The following commands illustrate a typical page

sequence:

● BP (Begin Page)

● WT (Write Text)

● IO (Include Overlay)

● IPS (Include Page Segment)

● WIC (Write Image Control)

● WI (Write Image)

● END (End)

● WT (Write Text)

● IO (Include Overlay)

● IPS (Include Page Segment)

● EP (End Page)

● ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).

Note: This sequence is only an example. A page can contain any combination of text, image blocks,

graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.

BP (Begin Page): The host sends the BP command to the printer, causing the printer to leave the home

state and enter the page state.

WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a

page state, this text information prints at this time. The host can send multiple WT commands to the

printer while in the page state.

IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current

page. This command contains an ID field, which selects the desired overlay.

IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge

onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page

segment now prints on the current page.

WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.

Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.

WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of bit image data to the printer. One or more of these

commands create the actual image for printing. Because the printer is now in the page state, the image

prints as it is received by the printer.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands113260071‐001A

END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page state.

WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text

data can be added to the page. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, graphics data, bar code

data, or additional image data could also be included on the page.

IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current

page. This overlay now prints on the current page.

IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge

onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page

segment now prints on the current page.

EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page state and return to the home

state. Printronix that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful execution of the

page data.

ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with

the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply

indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the page data, and all selected segments, images, or

overlays have successfully printed.

Chapter 5, “IPDS Programming Information,” contains a more detailed description of all the IPDS commands.

Error Handling

An exception (error) occurs when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or

parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS error handling structure assigns a

unique exception code to each type of error. The printer sends these codes to the host, as sense bytes, in

the NACK (negative acknowledgment reply). See Chapter 6, “IPDS Exception Reporting Codes,” for a

description of the exception codes.

The host can control how the printer responds to the exceptions. The Exception Handling Control

(see“Exception Handling Control (EHC)”) order permits independent control over three exception

handling functions:

● The exceptions to report with a NACK reply

● The implementation of Alternate Exception Actions (AEA) when a valid parameter value is received but

not supported by the printer

● The termination or continuation procedure to follow if the alternate error action is not taken or if there is

no alternate error action associated with this error.

The host application program can use the Exception Handling Control order to accomplish many specific

control capabilities necessary in data printing environments. For example, through the proper selection of

settings, it is possible to:

● Enforce control over printing of page information

● Enable automatic skipping of data types not supported by the printer

● Suppress the return of meaningless or redundant exception reports when alternate actions are

acceptable to the user.

The host can issue the Exception Handling Control order in any printer state. This allows the host to

manage exception processing at any level desired by the host application.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter4IPDSCommands114260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation115260071‐001A

Chapter 5. IPDS Programming Information

This chapter contains programming information for the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) commands.

The information is for the experienced programmer. A knowledge of data stream requirements, hexadecimal

numbering systems, and data processing terminology and concepts is assumed.

In addition to the information in this chapter, Chapter 4, “Intelligent Printer Commands,” contains introductory

information about the IPDS.

IPDS Initialization Defaults

When the printer power switch is initially turned On (|), various IPDS data stream parameters are set to

their initialization default values. These values remain in effect until overridden by specific data stream

commands from the host application program.

Table 6 contains the initialization defaults for this printer:

Table 6. IPDS Initialization Defaults

Default Description Hex Value

Units Base Value 00 (10 in.)

Input Media Source Determined by Operator Panel Paper Source setting

Width of the Physical Medium MPP Value, Operator Panel Selection

Length of the Physical Medium MPL Value, Operator Panel Selection

Width of the Logical Page in Units (X-Extent) 4A40 (Decimal 13.2 in. Width, 1440 Units Per In.)

Length of the Logical Page in Units (Y-Extent) 3DE0 (Decimal 11 in. Length, 1440 Units Per In.)

Ordered Data Flags 00 (Unordered Page, Block, and Text Flags)

X-Axis Orientation 0000 (0 Degrees)

Y-Axis Orientation 2D00 (90 Degrees)

Current I Text Position 0000

Current B Text Position 00A0 The Default Font Type Baseline (see Note 1)

X-Displacement 0000 Logical Page X-Displacement from Physical Medium Origin

Y-Displacement 0000 Logical Page Y-Displacement from Physical Medium Origin

Initial Inline Margin in Units 0000

Intercharacter Adjustment 0000

Baseline Increment LPI value, Operator Panel Selection

Local Font ID FF (see Note 3)

Text Color Black

Code Page ID Language value, Operator Panel selection

Font Quality Print Quality value, Operator Panel selection

Font Type Determined by Print Quality and CPI value Operator Panel

selection (see Note 2)

Exception Handling Control Report Undefined Characters, Position Checks, and All

Other Exceptions. Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action.

Terminate, Print Page, and Go to Home State.

Notes:

1. Text printing on the first line requires an initial Y-displacement value of 00A0.

2. The printer default font is Gothic for DP and fast draft print quality and Courier for DP Text and NLQ

print quality. To determine the current values for CPI, language and quality, refer to the Administrators

Manual for your printer.

3. When Local Font ID equals FF is used, the latest inline sequence established in “Logical Page

Descriptor (LPD)” determines whether to print in a left-to-right or right-to-left sequence. The default

when the printer is powered on is the left-to-right sequence.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation116260071‐001A

Parameter Values

The Printronix S828 Printer allows flexibility in selecting various options to perform a wide range of functions.

Parameter values are initially set at the factory. The printer uses these values to format the page and to

control forms movement. The parameter values also allow the operator to select the printer address,

language, and print mode and compatibility options, and to turn the alarm on or off.

The printer can use the initial factory set values, or the operator can change these values. Any new value

selection made at the operator panel becomes the new parameter value immediately upon selection. If this

configuration is saved by the operator into the power-on custom set, this value remains as the new

parameter value, even after the printer power switch is turned Off (O).

The operator can select the following parameter values at the operator panel and change them:

● Characters per inch (CPI)

● Lines per inch (LPI)

● Maximum print position (MPP)

● Maximum page length (MPL) (See Note)

● Language

● Print quality

● Alarm (Enabled/Disabled)

● Graphics and Bar Code mode

● Left margin

● Emulation mode

Note: An MPL setting that results in a page length less than 762 mm (3 in.) causes a throughput

reduction. A maximum reduction of about 50 percent occurs at an MPL setting of one line per page.

The application program can override any of the parameter values, except for turning the alarm on or off

changing the address selection, changing the emulation determines what parameter value the printer uses:

1. The printer uses the program specified value.

2. If no program command has specified the value, the printer uses the current parameter value.

Command Format

All the printer commands use the following format:

Length Command Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The following chart shows the purpose of each field:

Byte Field Description

0-1 Length Total Command Length, Including the Length Bytes

2-3 Command Command Type

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation117260071‐001A

Byte Field Description

4 Flag Bit 0

0 = Acknowledge Response Not Required

1 = Acknowledge Response Required

Bit 1

0 = Correlation ID Not Included

1 = Correlation ID Included

Bit 2

0 = Acknowledge Reply Response is Complete

1 = Second Buffer of XOH - OPC Reply Required

Bit 3 - 6

Reserved (Always Zero)

Bit 7

0 = Persistent NACK is inactive

1 = Persistent NACK

5-6 Correlation ID Identifier Name (Valid Only if Byte 4, Bit 1 Is On)

7-n Data Specific Subcommands, Operands, Parameters, and Data Fields as Appropriate for

the Given Command

Notes:

1. Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit.

2. If the Correlation ID field is not present (byte 4, bit 1 is zero), the data field starts at byte 5 instead of

byte 7.

3. Both positive or negative values fitting in the data fields are allowable. Negative values are in

twos-complement form.

4. Some bits or bytes in the data fields are Reserved. The printer does not always check the contents of

these fields. However, Printronix recommends that such fields equal the specified value (if one exists) or

zero.

5. The printer will not detect a condition where the specified command length (bytes 0 through 1)

exceeds the actual number of bytes received. If this occurs, the printer will not process the command

until the printer receives the specified number of bytes.

6. If the host wants to request the second buffer, the request must be the next command following the

request for the first buffer of an acknowledgment. However, it is not required that the host request the

second buffer of an acknowledgment.

Supported IPDS Command Codes

Command Hex Code Description

SHS D697 Set Home State

STM D6E4 Sense Type and Model

NOP D603 No Operation

LSS D61E Load Symbol Set

XOH D68F Execute Order Home State

XOA D633 Execute Order Any State

BP D6AF Begin Page

EP D6BF End Page

LCC D69F Load Copy Control

LPD D6CF Logical Page Descriptor

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation118260071‐001A

Command Hex Code Description

LPP D66D Logical Page Position

WBCC D680 Write Bar Code Control

WBC D681 Write Bar Code

WGC D684 Write Graphics Control

WG D685 Write Graphics

WIC D63D Write Image Control

WI D64D Write Image

WT D62D Write Text

BO D6DF Begin Overlay

DO D6EF Deactivate Overlay

IO D67D Include Overlay

BPS D65F Begin Page Segment

DPS D66F Deactivate Page Segment

IPS D67F Include Page Segment

LE D61D Load Equivalence

LFE D63F Load Font Equivalence

DF D64F Deactivate Font

END D65D End

Command Function Sets

Function sets divide the printer commands into various categories. Each function set provides all the

necessary controls for its functional area. These function sets are:

● Device Control function set

● Text function set

● Image function set

● Graphics function set

● Bar Code function set

● Overlay function set

● Page Segment function set

● Loaded Font function set.

Device Control Function Set Commands

The Device Control function set contains the commands the printer uses to set up the page, communicate

device controls, and manage the Acknowledge protocol. The following commands are the device control

function set:

Command Hex Code Description

NOP D603 No Operation

STM D6E4 Sense Type and Model

SHS D697 Set Home State

ACK D6FF Acknowledge Reply

LFE D63F Load Font Equivalence

LCC D69F Load Copy Control

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation119260071‐001A

Command Hex Code Description

LPP D66D Logical Page Position

LPD D6CF Logical Page Descriptor

BP D6AF Begin Page

DF D64F Deactivate Font

EP D6BF End Page

END D65D End

XOH D68F Execute Order Home State

XOA D633 Execute Order Any State

The following pages describe the device control function set commands in detail.

No Operation (NOP)

Length D603 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

An NOP command is valid in any printer state. The printer does not perform any operation as a result of

receiving this command. The printer ignores any data in this command.

Sense Type and Model (STM)

Length D6E4 Flag Correlation ID (Optional)

This command is valid in any state. The Sense Type and Model command requests the printer to respond

with device dependent information, which identifies the printer and the function it supports. The printer

returns this information to the host application program in the Special Data (SD) portion of the

Acknowledge Reply to the STM command.

Acknowledge Reply for Sense Type and Model

Length D6FF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The format of the data field returned with the Acknowledge Reply is: acknowledgment type, page/copy

counters, and 6 bytes of general information, followed by a sequence of function set vectors identifying the

functions supported by this printer. The following chart shows the Data field:

Decimal Hex Description

0 0 01 (Acknowledgment Type)

1-4 1-4 Page/Copy Counters

5 5 FF (System/370™ Convention)

6-7 6-7 Printer Product Number 4247 (or 4230 or 4224 if printer is in emulation mode)

8 8 Printer Model Number (see note)

9-10 9-A 0000 (Reserved)

11-40 B-28 Device Control Function Set Vector

41-54 29-36 Text Function Set Vector

55-66 37-42 Image Function Set Vector

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation120260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Description

67-78 43-4E Graphics Function Set Vector

79-84 4F-54 Page Segment Function Set Vector

85-92 55-5C Overlay Function Set Vector

93-98 5D-62 Loaded Font Function Set Vector

99-110 63-6E Bar Code Function Set Vector

Note: The format for byte 8, the printer model number, is “03 - Ethernet Host Interface”

The function set vectors contain information relating to each specific command function set. The format of

each function set vector group follows:

Device Control Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

11-12 B-C 001E

13-14 D-E C4C3 Device Control Function Set Identifier

15-16 F-10 FF10 DC/1 Level Identifier

17-18 11-12 8010 XOA, Activate Printer Alarm

19-20 13-14 80F2 XOA, Discard Buffered Data

21-22 15-16 80F4 XOA, Request Resource List

23-24 17-18 80F6 XOA, Exception Handling

25-26 19-1A 80F8 XOA, Print Quality Control

27-28 1B-1C 9005 XOH, Erase Print Data

29-30 1D-1E 9007 XOH, Erase Font Data

31-32 1F-20 900D XOH, Stack Received Pages

33-34 21-22 9015 XOH, Select Input Media Source

35-36 23-24 9017 XOH, Set Media Size

37-38 25-26 F001 XOH, DSC Mode Persistent NACK Handling Supported

39-40 27-28 FF02 Three Byte Sense Data Supported

Text Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

41-42 29-2A 000E Vector Length

43-44 2B-2C D7E3 Composed Text Function Set Identifier

45-46 2D-2E FF20 PT/2 Level Identifier

47-48 2F-30 1001 Unordered Text Supported

49-50 31-32 4020 Limited Simulated Color Supported (see note 3)

(see note 1)

4000

(see note 2)

51-52 33-34 5041 Text Orientation (2 for NLS)

53-54 35-36 1000 Optimum Performance if Text Data in Ordered Page

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation121260071‐001A

Notes:

1. 4247 native mode.

2. 4224 and 4230 emulation mode.

3. For Limited Simulated Color support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are accepted

and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color exceptions. In

the S828 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of Medium, except where

not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics, image, or bar code. For

actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in the S828 Printer by printing

in black.

Image Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

55-56 37-38 000C Vector Length

57-58 39-3A C9D4 Image Function Set Identifier

59-60 3B-3C FF10 IM/1 Level Identifier

61-62 3D-3E 1001 Unordered Image Blocks Supported

63-64 3F-40 4022 Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported

65-66 41-42 1000 Optimum Performance if Image Blocks in Ordered Page

Graphics Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

67-68 43-44 000C Vector Length

69-70 45-46 E5C7 Graphics Function Set Identifier

71-72 47-48 FF20 GR/2 Level Identifier

73-74 49-4A 1001 Unordered Graphics Blocks Supported

75-76 4B-4C 4022 Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported

77-78 4D-4E A080 Zero Degree (°) Orientation Supported

Page Segment Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

79-80 4F-50 0006 Vector Length

81-82 51-52 D7E2 Page Segment Function Set Identifier

83-84 53-54 FF10 Page Segment Function Set Level Identifier

Overlay Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

85-86 55-56 0008 Vector Length

87-88 57-58 D6D3 Overlay Function Set Identifier

89-90 59-5A FF10 OL/1 Level Identifier

91-92 5B-5C 1505 5 Levels of Nested Overlays in Overlay State

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation122260071‐001A

Loaded Font Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

93-94 5D-5E 0006 Vector Length

95-96 5F-60 C3C6 Loaded Font Function Set Identifier

97-98 61-62 FF20 Symbol Sets

Bar Code Function Set Vector

Decimal Hex Value Description

99-100 63-64 000C Vector Length

101-102 65-66 C2C3 Bar Code Function Set Identifier

103-104 67-68 FF10 BC/1 Level Identifier

105-106 69-6A 1001 Unordered Bar Code Blocks Supported

107-108 6B-6C 4022 Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported (see

(see note 1) note 3)

4002

(see note 2)

109-110 6D-6E A0C0 0°, 90° Orientation Supported

Notes:

1. 4247 native mode.

2. 4224 and 4230 emulation mode.

3. For Limited Simulated Color support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are accepted

and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color exceptions. In

the S828 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of Medium, except where

not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics, image, or bar code. For

actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in the S828 Printer by printing

in black.

Set Home State (SHS)

Length D697 Flag Correlation ID (Optional)

This command is valid in any state. When the printer receives the Set Home State command, the current

page ends, all buffered data prints, and the printer returns to the home state. If the printer receives this

command while already in the home state, the printer treats this command as a No Operation command.

Acknowledge Reply (ACK)

Length D6FF 00 Data

Length D6FF 40 Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally

requested information back to the host application program. The application program uses the

Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to begin error recovery actions when

necessary. The printer sends an acknowledgment:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation123260071‐001A

● Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on

● Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response

must be sent.

A negative response has priority over a positive response.

If the printer can identify the command and the command has a correlation ID, the Acknowledge Reply

contains a correlation ID that matches the command.

The maximum length of this command is 255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation

ID present), the data field can be up to 250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the

maximum data field length is 248 bytes. The Acknowledge Reply data field contains the acknowledgment

type, page/copy counters, and a Special Data (SD) area. The printer loads the Special Data area with the

appropriate data when one of the following occurs:

1. The printer receives one of the following information request commands:

● Sense Type and Model

● Obtain Printer Characteristics

● Request Resource List.

2. An error occurs. Under this condition, the printer loads the special data area with the sense bytes and

sends a negative acknowledgment (NACK) to the host.

The format of the Acknowledge Reply data field follows:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 Acknowledgement Type

00 Positive - No Special Data (SD)

01 Positive - Sense Type/Model (STM) Data in SD

04 Positive - Request Resource List (RRL) in SD

06 Positive - Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC) in SD

80 Negative - Sense Bytes in SD

1-4 1-4 XX...XX

5-n 5-n XX...XX

Load Font Equivalence (LFE)

Length D63F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The Load Font Equivalence command maps font identifiers. The fonts do not have to exist in the printer

when the printer receives this command.

In the home state, this command creates a new font equivalence record that completely replaces the

current LFE record. In the page state:

● The font equivalence entries in this command add to the current LFE entries, or

● If identical local font identifiers (byte 1) exist, this command overlays the current LFE entries.

In the page segment or overlay state, a received LFE is stored as part of the page segment or overlay,

and it does not process until the Include Page Segment or Include Overlay command is received.

The font equivalences for a given page are those that are in effect when the Begin Page command

processes plus those added in the page state. There is a maximum of 20 different loaded font ID/print

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation124260071‐001A

quality combinations defined in home or page state. Page segments use the font equivalence tables active

at the time the Include Page Segment command processes. In addition, the LFEs that were stored as part

of the page segment add to the font equivalence tables during the include page segment process up to a

maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations.

Each Begin Overlay command starts the overlay with the loaded font IDs currently defined and will add its

LFE entries during the overlay’s definition up to a maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations

total. On a logical page, the sum of each included overlay’s number of loaded font ID/print quality

combinations (whether included through Include Overlay or through Load Copy Control commands) added

to the number of loaded font ID/print quality combinations on the logical page cannot exceed 58.

Each font equivalence entry is 16 bytes, in the following format:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 00-FE Local Font ID

FF Reserved (4248 mode) (See Note 4)

1-2 1-2 0001 - 7EFF Font Host Assigned ID (See Note 3)

3-4 3-4 Font Inline Sequence (Ignored)

5-6 5-6 0000 Reserved

7-8 7-8 XXXX Code Page ID (See Code Page ID Chart)

FFFF Use the Printer Defined Default Code Page ID

9-10 9-A XXXX Font (Style) ID (See Font ID Chart)

FFFF Use the Printer Defined Default Font

11-12 B-C 0000 Reserved

13 D 00 Reserved

14 E Font Attributes

Bit 0 Font Is Present in Printer (See Notes 1 and 2)

Bit 1-2 Reserved

Bit 3 Double High (See Notes 5 and 6)

Bit 4 Italicized Print (See Note 6)

Bit 5 Double Strike

Bit 6 Bold

Bit 7 Double Wide

15 F 00 Reserved (See Note 2)

Notes:

1. If the Font Present in Printer bit is on, this indicates to the printer that the font has previously been

downloaded or is permanently resident. If this bit is off, this indicates to the printer that the font is not

present in the printer and will, presumably, be downloaded (by an LSS command) prior to selection for

printing.

2. Additional font equivalence entries, each 16 bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format.

No more than 20 different loaded font ID/print quality combinations can be active at a given time.

3. Use the same Loaded Font ID when using the same Font ID and Code Page ID for several Local IDs.

This saves storage space and font allocation time in the printer.

4. Local ID byte 0 may use any value 1 to FE. A value of FF is supported if the printer is in 4224

Emulation Mode for compatibility, but is not recommended. See “Set Character Set” , “Logical Page

Descriptor (LPD)”, and “Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence” for more information regarding Local

IDs equal to FF.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation125260071‐001A

5. A double high font can be printed only on a page that is unordered. See “Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)”

for more information.

6. A font cannot be both double high and italicized.

Code Page ID Values

Hex Value Code Page Hex Value Code Page

0025 USA/Canada 01A4 Arabic

0100 International Set 1 01A7 Greek

0104 Canadian French 01A8 Hebrew

0111 Austria/Germany 01B5 PC Character Sets 1 and 2

0112 Belgium 01F4 International Set 1

0113 Brazil 0323 Hebrew (old)

0115 Denmark/Norway 033F Portugal (Alternate)

0116 Finland/Sweden 0341 Korean

0118 Italy 0346 Thai

0119 Japan (English) 0366 Latin 2/ROECE

011A Portugal 0367 Icelandic

011C Spain/Latin America 036B Greek (Old)

011D United Kingdom 0373 Cyrillic (Old)

011E Austria/Germany (Alternate) 037A Yugoslav

011F Denmark/Norway (Alternate) 037C OCR-A (NLQ Only)

0120 Finland/Sweden (Alternate) 037D OCR-B NLQ Only)

0121 Spain (Alternate) 03EA DCF Compatibility

0122 Japan/Katakana 0401 Cyrillic Multilingual

0125 APL (4224 Compatibility) 0402 Turkish

0129 France 0449 Farsi

0136 APL 0458 Baltic Multilingual

0462 Estonian 0154 OCR (4224 Compatibility) NLQ only

1149 euro 924

Font ID Values

Hex Value Font ID Hex Value Font ID

001A 10 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality) 00A0 Proportional spacing, Gothic

(DP Text and NLQ)

000B 10 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ) 00DE 15 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft

and DP Quality)

0013 10 CPI, OCR-A (NLQ) 00DF 15 CPI Courier (DP Text

and NLQ)

0003 10 CPI, OCR-B (NLQ) 0190 16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft

and DP Quality)

0055 12 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ) 0057 12 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft

and DP Quality)

Notes:

1. The Graphic Character Set Global (GCSGID) portion of the Global Font ID is ignored by the printer.

2. All combinations of CPGID and FGID are valid with the following exceptions:

● OCR-A Code Page and FGID 0013 are only valid in combination together.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation126260071‐001A

● OCR-B Code Page and FGID 0003 are only valid in combination together.

● The following Code Pages are not available with FGID X'00A0' (PSM)

– Code Page 290 Katakana

– Code Page 293 APL (4224)

– Code Page 310 APL

– Code Page 420 Arabic

– Code Page 833 Korean

– Code Page 838 Thai

– Code Page 880 Cyrillic (Old)

– Code Page 1002 DCF Compatibility

– Code Page 1025 Cyrillic Multilingual

– Code Page 1097 Farsi

Load Copy Control (LCC)

Length D69F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The Load Copy Control command controls the production of output from subsequently received input

logical pages. The LCC command is only valid while the printer is in the home state. This command

remains in effect until the printer receives the next LCC.

The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 02-24 Copy Subgroup Count (See Note 1)

1 1 01 Number of Copies

2-n 2-n XXXX Copy Modification (See Description)

C100 = Simplex

D101 - D1FF = Suppression ID

E101 - E1FE = Overlay ID

Notes:

1. Group Count is the number of bytes in this group definition entry. Valid ranges are from 2 to 36 (X'02'

to X'24') in units of 2.

2. Subsequent LCC commands nullify previous Overlay IDs or Suppression IDs from previous LCC

commands.

Copy Modification is an optional modification keyword list made up of two byte controls:

● The first byte is the keyword.

● The second byte is the associated parameter for this keyword.

Valid values for copy modification are:

● C100 - Simplex Printing

● D101 to D1FF - Suppression ID

● E101 to E1FE - Overlay ID.

Simplex Printing is printing on only one side of the document. This is the only type of printing the S828

Printer can perform.

Suppression ID allows the later suppression of text data. The first byte of the keyword, D1, specifies this

keyword as suppression. The second byte of the keyword specifies a suppression identifier. Valid

suppression ID values are 01 to FF. Print suppression occurs as follows:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation127260071‐001A

1. The LCC command specifies one or more suppression ID values. (Each ID must begin with the

keyword - D1.)

2. The printer receives a Begin Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with a suppression ID

that matches a value in the LCC command.

3. All subsequent text data does not print (text suppression), until the printer receives an End

Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with the same ID.

4. All text data received after the End Suppression control prints normally.

Overlay ID allows later processing of specified overlays. The first byte of the keyword, E1, specifies this

keyword as overlay. The second byte of the keyword specifies an overlay identifier. Valid overlay ID values

are 01 to FE. An overlay processes as follows:

1. The LCC command specifies one or more overlay ID values. (Each ID must begin with the keyword -

E1.)

2. The previously stored overlay with this specified identifier merges onto the following page at its

reference corner.

Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)

Length D6CF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

This command establishes the print characteristics for the logical page. The Logical Page Descriptor

command is only valid in the home state. See “Set Media Size (SMS)” for physical medium size information.

The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 00 Units Base Value Equals 10 in.

1 1 00 Reserved

2-3 2-3 05AD-7FFF X Units Per Unit Base Value

4-5 4-5 05A0-7FFF Y Units Per Unit Base Value

6 6 00 Reserved

7-9 7-9 000001 – Width of Page in Units

007FFF

(See Note 1)

10 A 00 Reserved

11-13 B-D 000001 - Length of Page in Units

007FFF

(See Note 1)

14 E 00 Reserved

15 F Ordered Page Flag (See Note 2)

Bit 0 Bit 0 0 Unordered Page

1 Ordered Page

Bits 1-7 Bits 1-7 Reserved

16-17 10-11 0000 Reserved

18-21 12-15 00000000 Reserved

22-23 16-17 0000 Reserved

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation128260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

24-25 18-19 0000 I-Axis Orientation of 0 Degrees

5A00 I-Axis Orientation of 180 Degrees (See Note 5)

FFFF Printer Default (0 Degrees) (See Note 3)

26-27 1A-1B 2D00 B-Axis Orientation of 90 Degrees

FFFF Printer Default (90 Degrees)

29-29 1C-1D 0000-FFFF Initial I Displacement in Units (See Note 4)

30-31 1E-1F 0000-FFFF Initial B Displacement in Units

32-33 20-21 0000-FFFF Initial Inline Margin in Units

FFFF Printer Default (Use Initialization Value) (See Note 4)

34-35 22-23 0000 Intercharacter Increment

0000-7FFF Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)

36-37 24-25 0000 Reserved

38-39 26-27 0000-7FFF Baseline Increment

FFFF Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)

40 28 00-FE Local Font ID

FF Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)

41-42 29-2A 0000 Printer Default (Black)

0008 Black

FF00 Printer Default (Black)

FF07 Printer Default (Black)

FFFF Printer Default (Black)

Notes:

1. The LPD command accepts logical page values from 0001 to 7FFF for this parameter. However,

attempts to print outside the intersection of the physical medium (as defined by the Set Media Size

command) and the logical page result in an error.

2. If the Ordered Page Flag is on, this indicates to the printer that subsequent data is in order and can

print as it is received. If page data is unordered, printing is deferred (buffered), because the printer

must place the received data in the proper sequence.

3. The high-order 9 bits of the two byte fields 18-19 and 1A-1B are interpreted as a 9-bit binary value that

describes the orientation of the X and Y axes.

4. If bytes 1C-1D and bytes 20-21 are all 0, each line begins at the leftmost print position for 0, 90

orientation and rightmost print position for 180, 90 orientation.

5. The S828 Printer can print right-to-left by selecting a 180, 90 degree orientation within the Load Page

Descriptor command or within the Set Text Orientation control sequence. The S828 Printer forces an

inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain upright printing when right-to-left

printing is selected.

Figure 12 shows how the Logical Page Descriptor command defines the logical page.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation129260071‐001A

Figure 12. Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page

Logical Page Position (LPP)

Length D66D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

This command positions the upper left corner of the logical page (defined by the Logical Page Descriptor

control) with respect to the physical medium. The Logical Page Position command is only valid in the

home state.

Figure 13 shows the LPP command positioning the logical page on the physical medium.

Figure 13. Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position

The physical medium dimensions do not change. The X and Y coordinates of the LPP command specify

the location of the Logical Page Reference Corner relative to the corresponding corner of the physical

medium. These coordinates are expressed in terms of the units in effect at the time the LPP command is

received.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation130260071‐001A

Only positive values are valid for the data field. The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 00 Reserved

1-3 1-3 000000-007FFF X Displacement

4 4 00 Reserved

5-7 5-7 000000-007FFF Y Displacement

8-9 8-9 0000 Reserved

Deactivate Font (DF)

Length D64F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The Deactivate Font command provides a means for the control unit to delete one or more fonts from the

printer.

End Page (EP)

Length D6BF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

This command causes the printer to return to the home state from the page, page segment, or overlay

state. If the printer is in the page state, the printer completes any deferred printing for the current page

and advances the forms to the top of the next page. Zero or more bytes of data may be transmitted with

this command but are ignored.

End (END)

Length D65D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The End command is the ending control for a graphics block, image block, or bar code block state. This

command completes a series of write image, write graphics, or write bar code commands. This command

does not transmit any data. At the completion of this command, the printer leaves the block state and

returns to the page, overlay, or page segment state.

Execute Order Home State (XOH)

Length D68D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

Subcommand Subcommand Data

The Execute Order Home State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) for formatting physical

mediums of data, printing groups of physical mediums, and managing the fonts, page segments, and

overlays. This command is only valid while the printer is in the home state.

The data field contains a two byte order, called the subcommand, and a subcommand data field. There is

only one subcommand for a single XOH command. The subcommand data field contains parameters for

that order.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation131260071‐001A

The valid orders for the XOH command for the S828 Printer are:

Order Description

0100 Print Buffered Data (PBD)

0500 Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)

0700 Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)

0D00 Stack Received Pages (SRP)

1500 Select Input Media Source (SIMS)

1700 Set Media Size (SMS)

F300 Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)

Print Buffered Data (PBD)

This subcommand causes the printer to print all buffered data pages prior to sending the Acknowledgment

Reply, if requested. The print buffer clears at the completion of this command.

Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)

This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered

Data order, then delete all page segments, overlays, and buffered page data (text, image, graphics, and

bar codes) from the printer storage.

Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)

This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered

Data order, then delete all font information from the printer storage.

Stack Received Pages (SRP)

This command is a synchronizing command. It is accepted by the S828 Printer, but it is functionally a

no-op because of the simple paper path.

Select Input Media Source (SIMS)

The Select Input Media Source (SIMS) subcommand selects an input media source ID and indirectly

selects the input for subsequent sheets. This subcommand applies to the sheet that the next received

page is printed on.

The size of the input media can be specified explicitly by the Set Media Size command or implicitly by the

assumptions the printer makes about the size of the media in the input media source selected by this

subcommand.

The set of valid Media Source ID values depend on what paper sources are currently installed. The

following tables give the valid values for the configurations described in each table.

If the printer is in 4247 mode or an emulation mode with one or two tractors installed, valid values are:

Table 7. Front and Rear with no linking

Bytes 0-1 X'1500' Select Input Media Source Order Code

Byte 2 X'00' Front Paper Source

X'01' Rear Paper Source (if configured)

X'FF' Printer Default Bin

Set Media Size (SMS)

The Set Media Size subcommand specifies the size of the physical medium.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation132260071‐001A

Refer to your printer's Administrators Manual for information on setting operator media size input.

Figure 14. Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium

The data field for the Set Media Size subcommand has the following format:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

01 Unit Base (10 cm.)

1-2 1-2 5A0-7FFF Units per Base Value (per 10 in.)

1626-7FFF Units per Base Value (per 10 cm)

3-4 3-4 000A-4A40 X-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units

FFF Use Current MPP

5-6 5-6 000A-7FFF Y-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units

FFFF Use Current MPL

Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)

This subcommand is a host request for information about the current printer environment characteristics.

The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special Data (SD)area of a subsequent

Acknowledge Reply. The printer reply is a series of self-defining fields describing the printer

characteristics. The OPC data is returned in more than one response buffer. The self-defining fields

contain specific information about the printer characteristics. If the ARQ flag was not set on for the XOH

command containing this order, then this order is equivalent to a No Operation.

Acknowledge Reply for Obtain Printer Characteristics:

Length D6FF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation133260071‐001A

The following charts describe the self-defining data fields.

Acknowledge Type and Counters:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 06 Acknowledgement Type (4 byte)

1-4 1-4 XXXXXXXX Page/Copy Counters

Printable Area Self-Defining Field: The page extents are set at initialization time to reflect

the operator panel settings. The Set Media Size command can change the page extents. For 4247 mode

and all emulation modes with one or two tractors installed:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0018 Length of this Field

2-3 2-3 0001 Printable Area ID

4 4 Media Source ID (See notes)

00 Front Continuous Forms

01 Rear Continuous Form

5 5 00 Reserved

6 6 00 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

7 7 00 Reserved

8-9 8-9 3840 Units per Base Value (Decimal 14400 per 10 in.)

10-11 A-B XXXX Current Forms X-Extent

12-13 C-D XXXX Current Forms Y-Extent

14-15 E-F 0000 Printable Area X-Offset

16-17 10-11 0000 Printable Area Y-Offset

18-19 12-13 XXXX Printable Area X-Extent (from Page Extent)

20-21 14-15 XXXX Printable Area Y-Extent from Page Extent

22-23 16-17 XX00 Input Media Source Characteristics

Bit 0 0 =No Duplex

Bit 1,2 01=Continuous Forms

Bit 3 1 =Media Source Available

Bit 4 0 =Reserved (Always 0)

Bit 5 0 =Reserved (Always 0)

Bit 6 0 =Reserved (Always 0)

Bit 7 0 =Reserved (Always 0)

Note: The Printable Area Self-Defining Field is returned once for each installed media source; that is, front

and rear tractor.

Symbol-Set Support Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0046 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0002 Symbol Set Support ID

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation134260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

4 4 10 Length of Self-Defining Parameter

5 5 01 Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch NLQ)

6 6 14 X-Box Size in Pels (20)

7 7 12 Y-Box Size in Pels (18)

8 8 00 Reserved

9 9 02 Repeating Group Length

10-11 A-B 000B 10 CPI Courier (NLQ)

12-13 C-D 0055 12 CPI Courier (NLQ)

14-15 E-F 00DF 15 CPI Courier (NLQ)

16-17 10-11 0013 10 CPI OCR-A (NLQ)

18-19 12-13 0003 10 CPI OCR-B (NLQ)

20 14 0C Length of Self Defining Parameter

21 15 01 Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)

22 16 14 X-Box Size in Pels (20)

23 17 09 Y-Box Size in Pels (9)

24 18 00 Reserved

25 19 02 Repeating Group Length

26-27 1A-1B 000B 10 CPI Courier (DP Text)

28-29 1C-1D 0055 12 CPI Courier (DP Text)

30-31 1E-1F 00DF 15 CPI Courier (DP Text)

32 20 0E Length of Self Defining Parameter

33 21 01 Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)

34 22 A0 X-Box Size in Pels (20)

35 23 09 Y-Box Size in Pels (9)

36 24 00 Reserved

37 25 02 Repeating Group Length

38-39 26-27 001A 10 CPI Gothic (DP)

40-41 28-29 0057 12 CPI Gothic (DP)

42-43 2A-2B 00DE 15 CPI Gothic (DP)

44-45 2C-2D 0190 16.7 CPI Gothic (DP)

46 2E 0C Length of Self Defining Parameter

47 2F 02 Variable Box Size Support (PSM NLQ)

48 30 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

49 31 00 Reserved

50-51 32-33 0960 Units per Unit Base (2400)

52 34 FF Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)

53 35 12 Y-Box Size in Pels (18)

54 36 00 Reserved

55 37 02 Repeating Group Length

56-57 38-39 00A0 PSM Essay (NLQ)

58 3A 0C Length of Self-Defining Parameter

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation135260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

59 3B 02 Variable Box Size Support (PSM DP Text)

60 3C 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

61 3D 00 Reserved

62-63 3E-3F 0960 Units per Unit Base (2400)

64 40 FF Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)

65 41 09 Y-Box Size in Pels (9)

66 42 00 Reserved

67 43 02 Repeating Group Length

67-68 44-45 00A0 PSM Essay (DP Text)

Image/Coded-Font Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 000A Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0003 Image/Coded-Font Resolution ID

4 4 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

5 5 00 Reserved

6-7 6-7 05A0 X Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)

8-9 8-9 05A0 Y Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)

Storage Pools Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 000F Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0004 Storage Pools ID

4 4 0B Length of Self-Defining Parameter

5 5 01 Triplet ID

6 6 00 Storage Pool ID

7-10 7-A 0006D000 Size of Storage Pool when empty

11-14 B-E 00000000 Reserved

Foreground Color Support Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0006 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0005 Foreground Color

4-5 4-5 0008 Black Ribbon

Installed Features Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex alue Description

0-1 0-1 0006 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0006 Installed Features ID

4-5 4-5 0B00 Continuous Forms Output

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation136260071‐001A

Available Features Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0006 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0007 Available Features

4-5 4-5 0B00 Continuous Forms Output

Resident-Symbol Set Support Self-Defining Field: For Ethernet interfaces:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 00B6 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0008 Resident Symbol Set Support

4 4 6A Length of this field

5 5 01 Code Page Support

6 6 56 Length of Code Page List

7 7 02 Length of CP Repeating Group Entry

8-9 8-9 01A7 CP423 Greek (Old)

10-11 A-B 01A8 CP424 Hebrew (New)

12-13 C-D 01B5 CP437 PC Extended

14-15 E-F 0323 CP089 Hebrew (Old)

16-17 10-11 0366 CP870 Latin 2/ROECE

18-19 12-13 0367 CP871 Icelandic

20-21 14-15 036B CP875 Greek (New)

22-23 16-17 0402 CP1026 Turkish

24-25 18-19 0100 CP256 International #1

26-27 1A-1B 01F4 CP500 International #2

28-29 1C-1D 0025 CP037 USA/Canada

30-31 1E-1F 0104 CP260 Canadian French

32-33 20-21 0111 CP273 Austrian/German

34-35 22-23 0112 CP274 Belgian

36-37 24-25 0113 CP275 Brazilian

38-39 26-27 0115 CP277 Danish/Norwegian

40-41 28-29 0116 CP278 Finnish/Swedish

42-43 2A-2B 0118 CP280 Italian

44-45 2C-2D 0119 CP281 Japanese English

46-47 2E-2F 011A CP282 Portuguese

48-49 30-31 011C CP284 Spanish and Spanish-Speaking

50-51 32-33 011D CP285 English (UK)

52-53 34-35 0129 CP297 French (Alternate)

54-55 36-37 011E CP286 Austrian/German (Alternate)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation137260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

56-57 38-39 0121 CP289 Spanish (Alternate)

58-59 3A-3B 0120 CP288 Finnish/Swedish (Alternate)

60-61 3C-3D 011F CP287 Danish/Norwegian (Alternate)

62-63 3E-3F 033F CP831 Portuguese (Alternate)

64-65 40-41 037A CP890 Yugoslav

66-67 42-43 0458 CP1112 Baltic Multilingual

68-69 44-45 0462 CP1122 Estonian

70-71 46-47 0474 CP1140 USA/Canada + euro

72-73 48-49 0475 CP1141 Austrian/German + euro

74-75 4A-4B 0476 CP1142 Danish/Norwegian +euro

76-77 4C-4D 0477 CP1143 Finnish/Swedish + euro

78-79 4E-4F 0478 CP1144 Italian + euro

80-81 50-51 0479 CP1145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro

82-83 52-53 047A CP1146 English UK + euro

84-85 54-55 047B CP1147 French + euro

86-87 56-57 047C CP1148 International 5 / Beligian New + euro

88-89 58-59 047D CP1149 Icelandic + euro

90-91 5A-5B 039C CP924 Latin 9 ISO 8859 +euro

92 5C 12 Length of Font ID List

93 5D 02 Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry

94-95 5E-5F 000B 10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

96-97 60-61 0055 12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

98-99 62-63 00DF 15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

100-101 64-65 001A 10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

102-103 66-67 0057 12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

104-105 68-69 00DE 15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

106-107 6A-6B 0190 16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

108-109 6C-6D 00A0 PSM ESSAY (DP Text and NLQ)

110 6E 28 Total Length of CP List

111 6F 01 CP Support

112 70 16 Length of CP List

113 71 02 Length of CP Repeating Group Entry

114-115 72-73 0122 CP290 Japanese Katakana

116-117 74-75 01A4 CP420 Arabic

118-119 76-77 0346 CP838 Thai

120-121 78-79 0370 CP880 Cyrillic (Old)

122-123 7A-7B 0401 CP1025 Cyrillic Multinational

124-125 7C-7D 03EA CP1002 DCF Compatibility (Release 2)

126-127 7E-7F 0125 CP293 APL (4224 Compatibility)

128-129 80-81 0136 CP310 APL

130-131 82-83 0341 CP833 Korean

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation138260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

132-133 84-85 0449 CP1097 Farsi

134 86 10 Length of Font ID List

135 87 02 Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry

136-137 88-89 000B 10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

138-139 8A-8B 0055 12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

140-141 8C-8D 00DF 15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)

142-143 8E-8F 001A 10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

144-145 90-91 0057 12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

146-147 92-93 00DE 15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

148-149 94-95 0190 16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)

150 96 0C Total Length of CP List

151 97 01 CP Support

152 98 04 Length of CP List

153 99 02 Length of CP Repeating Group Entry

154-155 9A-9B 0154 CP 340,OCR (4224 compatibility)

156 9C 06 Length of Font ID List

157 9D 02 Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry

158-159 9E-9F 0013 OCR-B Quality

160-161 A0-A1 0003 OCR-A Quality

162 A2 0A Total Length of CP List

163 A3 01 CP Support

164 A4 04 Length of CP List

165 A5 02 Length of CP Repeating Group Entry

166-167 A6-A7 037C CP 892,OCR-A

168 A8 04 Length of Font ID List

169 A9 01 Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry

170-171 AA-AB 0013 OCR-A Quality

172 AC 0A Total Length of CP List

173 AD 01 CP Support

174 AE 04 Length of CP List

175 AF 02 Length of CP Repeating Group Entry

176-177 B0-B1 037D CP 893,OCR-B

178 B2 04 Length of Font ID List

179 B3 02 Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry

180-181 B4-B5 0003 OCR-B Quality

Print Quality Support Self-Defining Field: These values apply if Host Fast Draft is

disabled in the printer configuration menu:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation139260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0007 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0009 Print Quality ID

4 4 01 DP Quality

5 5 56 DP Text Quality

6 6 AB NLQ

These values apply if Host Fast Draft is enabled in the printer configuration menu:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0008 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 0009 Print Quality ID

4 4 01 Fast Draft Quality

5 5 2B DP Quality

6 6 56 DP Text Quality

7 7 AB NLQ

XOA RRL RT & RIDF Support Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0006 Length

2-3 2-3 000A RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field

4-5 4-5 FF00 All Resources as Host Assigned Resource ID

Common Bar Code Type Self-Defining Field:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0007 Length of this field

2-3 2-3 000E RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field

4 4 0D Codabar Modifier Byte Options X'01' and X'02'

5 5 11 Code 128 Modifier Byte Options X'02'

6 6 1 8 POSTNET Modifier Byte Options X'00' - X'03'

Product Identifier Self-Defining Field: If the printer is in 4247 native or 4230 Emulation

Mode:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 003C Length

2-3 2-3 0013 Product Identifier

4 4 38 Length of this ID

5-6 5-6 0001 4247 with Page Counter Fix ID

7-12 7-C F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type

13-15 D-F E5F0F3 Model Number

16-18 10-12 C9C2D4 Manufacturer

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation140260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

19-20 13-14 F0F1 Plant of Manufacture

21-32 15-20 XX...XX Sequence Number

33-34 21-22 0000 Tag

35-43 23-2B XX...XX EC Level

44-59 2C-3B XX...XX Device Specific

If the printer is in 4224 emulation mode:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 003F Length

2-3 2-3 0013 Product Identifier

4 4 03 Length of this Field

5-6 5-6 0000 4224 with Page Counter Fix ID

7 7 38 Length of this Field

8-9 8-9 0001 4224 Product Identifier Parameter ID

10-15 A-F F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type

16-18 10-12 E5F0F3 Model Number

19-21 13-15 C9C2D4 Manufacturer

22-23 16-17 F0F1 Plant of Manufacture

24-35 18-23 XX...XX Sequence Number

36-37 24-25 0000 Tag

38-46 26-2E XX...XX EC Level

47-62 2F-3E XX...XX Device Specific

Execute Order Any State (XOA)

Length D633 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

Subcommand Subcommand Data

The Execute Order Any State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) that take effect

immediately, regardless of the current printer command state. This command is valid in any state.

Each data field contains a two byte order (subcommand), followed by a zero or more bytes of parameters

for that order. There is only one subcommand for a single XOA command.

The valid orders for the XOA command are:

Order Description

1000 Activate Printer Alarm (APA)

F200 Discard Buffered Data (DBD)

F400 Request Resource List (RRL)

F600 Exception Handling Control (EHC)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation141260071‐001A

Order Description

F800 Print Quality Control (PQC)

Activate Printer Alarm (APA)

The XOA Activate Printer Alarm (APA) subcommand signals the printer to activate the alarm mechanism.

As long as the printers alarm function is enabled, the alarm will be turned on in response to this command.

It will remain on until Stop is pressed.

After processing this command, the printer continues to process the incoming IPDS data stream. If

synchronization of actions is desired, the application must ensure if the appropriate commands are sent to

the printer.

Discard Buffered Data (DBD)

The XOA Discard Buffered Data (DBD) subcommand deletes all buffered data from the printer storage and

returns the printer to home state. Any data currently being received is deleted. If this order is syntactically

correct, no exceptions can result from its execution. The DBD order does not affect completely received

resources, such as fonts, page segments, and overlays; however, if the printer is in any resource state, the

printer deletes the partial resource before returning to home state. If the printer is in Ordered Page Mode,

the subcommand prints all buffered data to the point of the command, does a page eject, and returns to

Home State.

The DBD order is a synchronizing command. Any command following a synchronizing command is not

processed until all preceding commands have been completely processed. Also, the ACK of the DBD order

is not returned until DBD processing is complete.

Request Resource List (RRL)

This subcommand is a request from the host application program for the printer to identify resources

currently allocated in the printer. The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special

Data (SD) area of a subsequent Acknowledge Reply.

The subcommand and subcommand data field has the following format:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 F400 RRL Order Code

2 2 FF Device Defined Ordering

3-4 3-4 XXXX Entry Continuation Indicator (See Note 1)

5 5 03 - FF Entry Length

6 6 Resource Type Requested (See Note 2)

01 Single Byte Fonts

04 Page Segments

05 Overlays

FF All Resources

7 7 00 Resource ID Format

Host-Assigned Resource ID

8-9 8-9 XXXX Resource ID (See Note 2)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation142260071‐001A

Notes:

1. If the entire resource list does not fit in the Special Data Area of the Acknowledge Reply, continuation is

necessary which the S828 Printer will indicate using the Acknowledgement Continuation bit in the flag byte of

the Acknowledge Reply. If the host requests Acknowledgement Continuation by sending a command with

ARQ bit and the Continuation bit set, the printer will complete the RRL reply using Acknowledgement

Continuation. If the host requests RRL continuation (by sending an RRL command with nonzero values in

bytes 3 and 4), the printer will use continuation, the printer will default to RRL continuation.

2. For overlays, segments, and symbol sets, this is their two byte ID. This field is omitted when the resource

type equals All.

Acknowledge Reply for Request Resource List

Length D6FF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

The format of the resource list returned with the Acknowledge Reply is as follows:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0 0 FF Unordered List

1 1 01 End of List

06 Length of this Entry

2 2 Resource Type

00 Resource Size equals 0. The queried Resource Type, ID

Format, or ID is unknown, unsupported, or inconsistent.

01 Deletable Single Byte Coded Font

04 Deletable Overlays

05 Resource Size equals 0

FF The List Query requested is not supported.

3 3 01 Resource ID Format (RIDF)

Host-Assigned Resource ID

4 4 Resource Size Indicator

00 Resource Not Present

01 Resource Present

5-6 5-6 XXXX Resource ID

Note: Bytes 2 - 6 repeat for each resource type.

Exception Handling Control (EHC)

An exception (error) exists when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or

parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS structure provides Alternate

Exception Action (AEA) when the printer receives a valid parameter value, but the printer does not support

this value. The Exception Handling Control subcommand allows the host control of exception handling by

the printer. This subcommand specifies the action the printer is to take with respect to the reporting and

processing of exception (error) conditions. The format of the EHC subcommand is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 F600 EHC Order Code

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation143260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

2 2 Exception Reporting

Bit 0 Bit 0 Undefined Character Check

0 Do Not Report Exceptions

1 Report Exceptions

Bit 1 Bit 1 Page Position Check

0 Do Not Report Exceptions

1 Report Exceptions

Bit 2-6 Bit 2-6 Reserved

Bit 7 Bit 7 All other Errors

0 Do Not Report Exceptions

1 Report Exceptions

3 3 Alternate Exception Action

Bit 0-6 Bit 0-6 Reserved

Bit 7 Bit 7 0 Take Alternate Exception Action and Continue

1 Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action, Proceed per Byte 4

4 4 Exception Presentation Processing

Bit 0-5 Bit 0-5 Reserved

Bit 6 Bit 6 0 No Page Continuation

1 Page Continuation (Skip and Continue Action)

Bit 7 Bit 7 0 Discard Page

1 Print to point of exception

Exception Reporting: Byte 2 of the EHC subcommand handles exception reporting. Bits 0, 1, and 7 of

this byte may be set to report or not report exceptions as defined below. If the exception has no Alternate

Exception Action or the printer is told not to take the Alternate Exception Action, the exception is always

reported.

● Bit 0: Report Undefined Character Check

When this bit is set to 1, an undefined data character in a Write Text, Write Graphics, or Write Bar Code

command causes the printer to report an error to the host program. When this bit is set to 0, the printer

does not report Undefined Character Check errors.

● Bit 1: Report Page Position Check

Printing occurs only where the physical medium and the logical page overlap. When bit 1 is set to 1, an

attempt to print outside the overlap of the logical page and the physical medium causes the printer to

report an error. If bit 1 is set to 0, the printer does not report Position Check errors.

● Bits 2-6: Reserved

● Bit 7: Report all other exceptions

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation144260071‐001A

If this bit is set to 1, the printer reports all exceptions other than those defined by bits 0-1. If this bit is

set to 0, the printer does not report errors other than those specified above.

If the printer is in home state or the application requests an Acknowledge Reply in an IPDS command, the

printer reports exceptions with a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK). If an exception occurs within a

page, overlay, or page segment, the printer reports the NACK instead of sending a positive

acknowledgment of the page, overlay, or page segment.

The first asynchronous NACK is the only one reported, even though other synchronous NACKs may be

detected before the first NACK is reported. If the printer has a pending exception (the exception has

occurred but has not yet been reported), the printer reports the exception when exception handling control

directs.

Alternate Exception Action: Byte 3 of the EHC subcommand controls Alternate Exception Actions.

● Bits 0-6: Reserved

● Bit 7: Alternate Exception Action (AEA) control

This bit defines how printer processing continues when a data stream error occurs.

If the bit is set to 0, the printer continues processing with the Alternate Exception Action. If the error has

no Alternate Exception Action defined, the printer continues as though this bit contained a 1.

If this bit is set to 1 or no AEA is defined, the printer reports the error regardless of the value in the

Exception Reporting byte above. The printer continues processing as defined by the contents of the

Exception Presentation Processing byte below.

Exception Presentation Processing: Byte 4 of the EHC subcommand defines what the printer does

when exceptions occur in any state except home state.

● Bits 0-5: Reserved

● Bit 6: Page Continuation

If bit 6 is 0, the printer does the following:

– Terminates processing of the page, overlay, or page segment data

– Prints as much of the previously processed data as possible

– Enters home state.

If bit 6 is set to 1, the printer ignores bit 7 (Error Page Print) after taking a skip and continue action.

The printer remains in the current state and treats subsequent commands as No Operation (NOP) until

it encounters either the next valid command or a terminating condition.

1. Skip and Continue Action

Skip and Continue Actions are attempts by the printer to skip the remainder of the IPDS block

containing the exception and to print subsequent blocks or text on the page (if any).

The printer treats all subsequent commands other than Any State commands (NOP, SHS, STM, and

XOA) as No Operation (NOP) commands until it encounters either the next valid command or a

terminating condition. The printer remains in page, page segment, or overlay state. If the printer is in

a block state, the End command is the next valid command that returns the printer to page, page

segment, or overlay state. When the next valid command is encountered, the printer begins normal

processing again. The exception that caused the skip and continue action is reported when the end

of the page is reached, when an XOA command sets home state, or when a command with an ARQ

is received. The following conditions determine the next valid command:

– If the exception occurs in a Write Text command, a Load Font Equivalence command, or an

Include Page Segment command, the next valid command is End Page, Set Home State, or

XOA Discard Buffered Data.

– If the exception occurs in a block state, the next valid command is End.

– If the exception occurs in an Any-state command, the next valid command is the command that

follows.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation145260071‐001A

– If the exception occurs in any other command, the next valid command is one of the following (if

supported):

- Write Text

- Include Overlay

- Include Page Segment

- Write Text Control

- Write Image Control

- Write Image Control 2

- Write Bar Code Control

- Write Graphics Control

- End Page

- Set Home State

- XOA Discard Buffered Data

- Load Font Equivalence.

If the following terminating conditions occur, the printer returns to home state and reports the

indicated exception:

– An asynchronous exception occurs such that the printer cannot recover without host intervention.

The asynchronous exception is reported and the exception that caused the skip and continue

action is discarded.

– A command is received with the ARQ flag set on. The exception that caused the skip and

continue action is reported.

– A command is received with a length outside the valid IPDS range. The exception that caused

the skip and continue action is reported.

– A command is received that violates the IPDS state diagram. The exception that caused the skip

and continue action is reported.

During skip and continue actions, Any-state commands are treated as follows:

– SHS and XOA-DBD are next valid commands in all cases. They are processed, the skip and

continue action processing is terminated, the exception is reported, and normal command

processing resumes.

– Any-state commands with the ARQ bit set on are terminating conditions. They are not processed;

they terminate skip and continue processing, the exception is reported, and the printer returns to

home state.

– All other Any-state commands are processed as normal. However, subsequent non-Any-state,

non-next valid commands are skipped.

Exceptions detected in included overlays or page segments are treated as though the commands

were received as part of the page.

● Bit 7: Error Page Print

If both bits 6 and 7 are set to 1, bit 7 is ignored. If bit 6 is 0 and bit 7 is 1, the printer prints as much of

the page as possible and returns to home state.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation146260071‐001A

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 1 of 3)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation147260071‐001A

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 2 of 3)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation148260071‐001A

Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 3 of 3)

Print Quality Control (PQC)

The Print Quality Control subcommand allows the host to specify the desired print quality without changing

fonts (see notes). The quality selection (from the PQC subcommand) specifies the quality for printing text

associated with fonts selected by the Set Coded Font Local (SCFL) command and defined by the Load

Font Equivalence (LFE) command. A PQC specifying a print quality compatible with the desired font

should precede the SCFL command. The PQC has no effect when the default font (defined by the offline

operator panel selection) is in use.

The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:

Byte Value Description

Bit 0-1 F800 PQC Order Code

Bit 2 00 Reserved

01 - 55 DP

56 - AA DP Text

AB - FE NLQ

FF Depends on Operator Panel setting

Note: Host Fast Draft disabled.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation149260071‐001A

The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:

Byte Value Description

Bit 0-1 F800 PQC Order Code

Bit 2 01 - 2A Fast Draft Quality

2B - 55 DP

56 - AA DP Text

AB - FE NLQ

FF Depends on Operator Panel setting

Note: S828 only with Host Fast Draft enabled.

For printing multiple-density selections of graphics and bar codes, the following values are valid if bar

code/graphics density is set to computer selected:

Byte Value Description

Bit 0-1 F800 PQC Order Code

Bit 2 01 - 55 Low-Density Graphics/Bar Codes

56 - FE High-Density Graphics/High-Contrast Bar Codes

FF Depends on Operator Panel setting

Notes:

1. A PQC command can result in a font change in order to provide the desired quality level.

2. The printer changes fonts to satisfy quality selections for all supported code pages except OCR (340),

OCR-A (892), or OCR-B (893). It will not change the selected code page to provide a requested quality.

Text Function Set Commands

The text function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting text information on a logical

page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the text

function set:

The following pages describe the text function set commands.

Load Equivalence (LE)

Length D61D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

This command permits Begin and End suppression controls imbedded in data stored within the printer to

reference different external values. For example, internal suppression values of 06, 07, and 09 (from a

Begin Suppression control) can map to an external value of 02 from a Load Copy Control command, if the

printer previously has received an appropriate Load Equivalence command. Thus, the printer can use a

single Load Copy Control suppression pair for more than one suppression value (see “Begin Suppression

(BSU)”).

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation150260071‐001A

If a Load Copy Control command refers to a suppression identifier that has not been specified as an

external value in an LE command, the identifier (external value) will map to itself. This is the only case

where the identifier will map to itself unless specified.

This mapping remains in effect until the printer receives another Load Equivalence command, at which

time its values will totally replace this mapping.

This command consists of a two-byte parameter followed by a list of 0 to 127 four-byte entries in the

following format:

Decimal Hex Description

0-1 0-1 Mapping Type - X'0100' Is the Only Valid Value, Indicating Suppression

Equivalence Mapping.

2-3 2-3 Internal Value - Value of the Stored Parameter that the Begin Suppression and

End Suppression Controls use. Valid Values are from 1 to 255 (X'1' to X'FF').

4-5 4-5 External Value - Value that the Load Copy Control Command uses. This Is the

Value for Referencing the Internal Value. Valid Values are from 1 to 127 (X'1' to

X'7F').

Notes:

1. Additional entries, each four bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format as bytes 2

through 5.

2. The mapping of one internal ID to more than one external ID is an error.

Write Text (WT)

Length D62D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) Data

One or More Text Controls and Text Characters.

The Write Text command writes text presentation data to the printer. This command is only valid if the

printer is in the overlay, page, or page segment state.

The DATA field in this command can contain one or more text controls and text characters. A text control

begins with the text control escape sequence introducer, 2BD3. The format for this control is:

2BD3 Length Control Parameters

The length field of each text control is a one-byte value that gives the number of bytes in the text control.

This length value includes the length field itself but excludes the 2BD3 introducer. Multiple text controls

without intervening character data can chain together. Bit 7 (the least significant, or rightmost bit) of the

control field is the chain bit. If this bit is on, the following text control is chained to the previous control.

That is, chaining allows one escape sequence introducer for multiple text controls. With chaining, the first

text control contains the X'2BD3' introducer, and each subsequent text control starts with its own length

field, followed by its control field and any parameters for that control. The last text control in the chain

must have the chain bit off.

A Write Text command can span to another Write Text command. That is, if a Write Text command ends

after the control sequence has begun (the 2B has been received), and before all of the control sequence

parameters have been received, this Write Text command spans to the next Write Text command.

Spanning also occurs if a Write Text command ends between chained controls. Between the spanned

Write Text commands, only STM, XOA, and NOP commands are valid. All other commands received at

this time result in an error. The printer uses the following controls with the Write Text command:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation151260071‐001A

Control Description Control Description

CO (C1) Set Inline Margin (SIM) F4 (F5) End Suppression (ESU)

C2 (C3) Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA) E4 (E5) Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)

D0 (D1) Set Baseline Increment (SBI) E6 (E7) Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)

C6 (C7) Absolute Move Inline (AMI) EE (EF) Repeat String (RPS)

D2 (D3) Absolute Move Baseline (AMB) DA (DB) Transparent Data (TRN)

C8 (C9) Relative Move Inline (RMI) F8 (F9) No Operation (NOP)

D4 (D5) Relative Move Baseline (RMB) C4 (C5) Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)

D8 (D9) Begin Line (BLN) 74 (75) Set Text Color (STC)

F0 (F1) Set Coded Font Local (SCFL) 72 (73) Overstrike (OVS)

F6 (F7) Set Text Orientation (STO) 76 (77) Underscore (USC)

F2 (F3) Begin Suppression (BSU) 78 (79) Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)

Note: The controls shown in parenthesis are the text controls with their corresponding chain bit on.

Set Inline Margin (SIM)

2BD3 04 C0(C1) P1P2

Description: This control specifies the position of the inline margin in the (I) direction, when the printer

performs a Begin Line command. Receipt of this control does not change the current print position.

Parameters P1P2 form a two-byte value that specifies the margin in units. All values between 0 and

X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.

Note: Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.

Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA)

2BD3 04 C2(C3) P1P2

2BD3 05 C2(C3) P1P2

Description: This control specifies additional inline adjustment between graphic characters.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies an additional increment or decrement in the inline

direction between text characters in units. All values between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF'

causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.

Parameter P3 is a direction parameter and is optional. This parameter identifies whether the adjustment is

an increment or a decrement. If P3 has a value of 0 or X'FF', the adjustment is an increment. If P3 has a

value of 1, the adjustment is a decrement. If this parameter is missing, the default is an increment.

Set Baseline Increment (SBI)

2BD3 04 D0 (D1) P1P2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation152260071‐001A

Description: This control specifies a distance, which the printer adds to the current baseline coordinate

when the printer performs a Begin Line control.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the baseline increment in units. All values between

X'8000' and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD

command.

Absolute Move Inline (AMI)

2BD3 04 04 C6 (C7) P1P2

Description: This control moves the inline coordinate in the I direction. The move is to an absolute

position on the inline (I) axis.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new inline coordinate in units. All values

between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.

Notes:

1. Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.

2. Several Absolute Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace

Absolute Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Absolute Move Inline controls into a

single Absolute Move Inline control.

Absolute Move Baseline (AMB)

2BD3 04 D2 (D3) P1P2

Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate in the B direction. The move is to an absolute

position on the baseline (B) axis.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new baseline coordinate in units. All values

between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.

Note: Baseline coordinate values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results in

an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.

Relative Move Inline (RMI)

2BD3 04 C8 (C9) P1P2

Description: This control moves the inline coordinate relative to the current line coordinate position.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between

X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid. Negative values are in twos-complement form.

Notes:

1. Values as large as X'FFFF' are valid but might be off the page.

2. Several Relative Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace

Relative Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Relative Move Inline controls into a

single Relative Move Inline control.

Relative Move Baseline (RMB)

2BD3 04 D4 (D5) P1P2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation153260071‐001A

Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate relative to the current baseline coordinate

position.

Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between

X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid.

Note: Baseline displacement values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results

in an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.

Begin Line (BLN)

2BD3 02 D8 (D9)

Description: This control moves the inline and baseline coordinates to the first position on the next line.

The inline margin sets the inline coordinate. The baseline coordinate increases by the value in the Set

Baseline Increment control.

Set Coded Font Local (SCFL)

2BD3 03 F0 (F1) P1

Description: This control selects a previously assigned font, pitch, and code page. Load Font Equivalence

commands assign a local font identifier (LFID) to a specified font, pitch, and character set. The SCFL

control then specifies the LFID (in parameter P1) to use for printing. A Print Quality Control subcommand

specifying a print quality that is compatible with the LFID (defined by a previous Load Font Equivalence

command) must precede the SCFL control to provide the desired font and quality selections. Parameter

P1 is the LFID selection. Valid values for this parameter are 01 to X'FF'. A value of X'FF' specifies the LPD

value.

Set Text Orientation (STO)

2BD3 06 F6 (F7) P1-P4

Description: This control can be set to print right-to-left by selecting 180, 90 (X'5A00', X'2D00') degree

orientation. The S828 Printer forces an inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain

upright printing when right-to-left printing is selected. The only valid values are 0 and 180 degrees for the

inline direction and 90 degrees for the baseline direction. The Logical Page Descriptor command can also

be used to select right-to-left printing.

Parameters P1P2 specify the inline direction and must be a value of X'0000', X'5A00', or X'FFFF'.

Note: If the inline direction is set to 180 degrees, only fonts with 180 degree character rotation can be

used or else error 023F02 is flagged.

X'5A00' is an orientation of 180 degrees used to print in a right-to-left direction. X'FFFF' specifies to use

the inline direction from the LPD command. Parameters P3P4 specify the baseline direction and must be a

value of X'2D00' or X'FFFF'. X'FFFF' specifies to use the baseline direction value from the LPD command.

Refer to the description of the LFE command for supported combinations of LFE character rotation and

STO.

Begin Suppression (BSU)

2BD3 03 F2 (F3) P1

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation154260071‐001A

Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the

printed output.

Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. An End Suppression

control, with the same suppression identifier, must follow the Begin Suppression control. An error results

when BSU-ESU text controls are not paired properly or have different suppression IDs.

Suppression of the text output occurs only when activated by a Load Copy Control with a matching

suppression ID.

For additional information about suppression, see Suppression ID in the “Load Copy Control (LCC)” on

page 126.

End Suppression (ESU)

2BD3 03 F4(F5) P1

Description: This control marks the end of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the printed

output.

Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. A string of suppressed

text starts with a Begin Suppression control and ends with an End Suppression control having the same

suppression identifier.

Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)

2BD3 04 or 07 E4(E5) P1-P5

Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a horizontal rule (line) extending from the current

print position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until

the current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).

Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'

to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form.

Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three parameters are omitted or all

three must be included together. Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the baseline direction in

units. Valid values are from X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Also valid is X'FFFF'’ which selects the printer default of 5

pels wide.

Parameter P5 is ignored by the S828 Printer.

Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)

2BD3 04 or 07 E6(E7) P1-P5

Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a vertical rule (line) extending from the current print

position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until the

current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).

Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the baseline direction in units. Valid values are from

X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three

parameters are omitted or all three must be included together.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation155260071‐001A

Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'

to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form. Also valid is X'FFFF'. This selects the printer

default of 5 pels wide.

Parameter P5 is ignored by the S828 Printer.

Repeat String (RPS)

2BD3 04-FF EE (EF) P1-Pn

Description: This control contains a string of coded graphic characters that repeats on the current line.

Parameters P1P2 specify the repeat length. This is the total length of the generated string.

Parameters P3 through Pn are the repeat data. The data specified in bytes P3 through Pn repeats until

the output equals the repeat length specified in parameters P1P2. The data field can be a maximum of

253 bytes. The printer does not check the data for the control sequence introducer (X'2B'). If the repeat

length is zero, this control is a no-op. If the count equals 04, but the repeat length is greater than zero, an

error occurs.

Transparent Data (TRN)

2BD3 02-FF DA (DB) P1-Pn

Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of coded characters, which the printer does not

check for an embedded X'2B' escape sequence. The inline position increments for each position in the

string.

Parameters P1 through Pn are the graphic characters. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.

No Operation (NOP)

2BD3 02-FF F8 (F9) P1-Pn

Description: This control specifies a string of bytes that the printer ignores. The printer ignores all

parameter data. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.

Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)

2BD3 04 C4 (C5) P1-P2

Description: The Variable Space Increment is a two byte positive value that defines the width of the

variable space character in units. Parameters P1P2 are the width value. Valid values are 0 to X'7FFF'.

X'FFFF' equals the printer default. The variable space character is X'40' for EBCDIC code pages and X'20'

for ASCII code pages.

Set Text Color (STC)

2BD3 04 or 05 74 (75) P1-P3

Description: This control specifies the color attributes for text.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation156260071‐001A

Parameters P1P2 are the color attributes, as shown:

Hex Color Hex Color

0000 Black (Default) 0008 Black

FF00 Black FFFF Use Current Default

FF07 Black (Default)

Note: For Limited Simulated Color Support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are

accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color

exceptions. In the S828 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of

Medium except where not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics,

image, or barcode. For actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in

the S828 Printer by printing in black.

Parameter P3 is the precision parameter. This parameter is optional and has the following meaning:

00 If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.

Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.

01 If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer does not report an

exception, regardless of the EHC, and printing is in the default color.

FF If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.

Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.

Overstrike (OVS)

2BD3 05 72 (73) P1-P3

Description: This control identifies text that the printer overstrikes with a specified character. The

overstrike character prints using the font and character set that is active when the printer receives the

Overstrike command.

Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls white space to be overstruck, depending on

its value, as shown:

Bits 0-3 Reserved

Bit 4 0 Overstrike white space from Relative Move Inline

1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline

Bit 5 0 Overstrike white space from Absolute Move Inline

1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline

Bit 6 0 Overstrike white space from Space or Variable Space Character

1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character

Bit 7 0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values

1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.

Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.

The printer ignores parameter P2 for this control. Parameter P3 is the overstrike character.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation157260071‐001A

An OVS command with a bypass value of 00 ends overstrike mode.

Underscore (USC)

2BD3 05 76 (77) P1-P3

Description: This control identifies text the printer underscores at the baseline of the current line. The

underscore prints using the same print quality as the text.

Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls underscoring of white space, depending on

its value, as shown:

Bits 0-3 Reserved

Bit 4 0 Underscore white space from Relative Move Inline

1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline

Bit 5 0 Underscore white space from Absolute Move Inline

1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline

Bit 6 0 Underscore white space from Space or Variable Space Character

1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character

Bit 7 0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values

1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.

X'FF' No bypass in effect.

Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.

A USC command with a bypass value of 00 ends underscore mode.

Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)

2BD3 03 or 06 78 (79) P1-P4

Description: This control changes the position of the sequential baseline without change to the

established baseline. This control also stops and starts both subscript and superscript printing.

Parameter P1 is the direction parameter. Its values are:

00 Do not change baseline

01 Return to established baseline

02 Shift baseline away from the I axis (subscript) one additional temporary baseline

increment, per parameters P3 and P4

03 Shift baseline towards the I axis (superscript) one additional temporary baseline

increment, per parameters P3 and P4.

Parameter P2 is the precision parameter. Its values are:

00 Baseline shift is not simulated and the active font is used.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation158260071‐001A

01 A substitute font with characteristics identical to the current font may be used to simulate

baseline shift (superscript/subscript).

FF Same as 00.

Note: When subscript or superscript is active, double high printing will not occur.

Parameters P3 and P4 are the temporary baseline increments. Its values are:

0000 - 7FFF Temporary Baseline Increment

FFFF Half the current baseline increment.

Image Function Set Commands

The image function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting image data on a logical

page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the image

function set:

Command Code Description

WIC D63D Write Image Content

WI D64D Write Image

END D65D End

Write Image Control (WIC)

Length D63D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Write Image Control command causes the printer to enter the image block state. The command

sequence that follows directs an image presentation block area on the current page, overlay, or page

segment that is being constructed.

The parameters of this command define the input and output size of the image array and the necessary

information for interpreting the input data.

In the page state, the printer checks all the Write Image Control command parameter values for validity. If

the parameters are not within the valid ranges, an exception condition exists.

An image cannot print outside the page without an error. If any part of the image extends beyond the

physical or logical page, no image prints and an exception occurs.

The DATA field bytes have the following meaning for this command:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 1 - 7FFF Output - Pels per Scan Line

2-3 2-3 1 - 7FFF Output - Number of Scan Lines

4-5 4-5 1 - 7FFF Input - Pels per Scan Line

6-7 6-7 1 - 7FFF Input - Number of Scan Lines

8 8 00 No Compression Algorithm

9 9 00 Pel Data Format - One Bit per Pel

10-11 A-B 0101 No Magnification

0202 Scale by 2, Both X and Y

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation159260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

12-13 C-D 0000 Zero Degrees Scan Line Direction

14-15 E-F 2D00 90 Degrees Scan Line Sequence Direction

16 10 Coordinate Type (See note 1)

00 Absolute I, Absolute B

20 Absolute I, Relative B

40 Relative I, Absolute B

60 Relative I, Relative B

AD Absolute X, Absolute Y

17-19 11-13 FF8000 - 7FFF First Pel X or I Coordinate

20 14 00 Reserved

21-23 15-17 FF8000 - 7FFF First Pel Y or B Coordinate

24-25 18-19 0000, 0008, Color - Same as Text and Graphics Color Values (See note 2)

FF00, FF07,

FF08

Notes:

1. Only A0 can be used if the text is set to 180/90 degrees.

2. The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for

image data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of

unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',

X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.

Coordinate Type: Can be either an absolute or a relative value. Absolute values specify a location on the

logical page relative to the reference coordinates. Relative values specify a location on the logical page

relative to the current coordinates.

If byte 10 equals X'00', the S828 Printer uses the absolute values of I and B, as specified in bytes 11

through 13 and bytes 15 through 17 of this command. These values are the text inline and text baseline

coordinates, respectively.

If byte 10 equals’X'20', the S828 Printer uses the absolute value of I and the relative value of B. The

absolute I value is the text inline coordinate (bytes 11 through 13 of this command); the relative B value is

the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and the value specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this

command.

If byte 10 equals X'40', the S828 Printer uses the relative value of I and the absolute value of B. The

relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;

the absolute B value is the text baseline coordinate, specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this command.

If byte 10 equals X'60', the S828 Printer uses the relative value of I and the relative value of B. The

relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;

the relative B value is the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and bytes 15 through 17 of this

command.

If byte 10 equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block

is within a page, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and

Y-coordinate origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default

coordinates if no LPP command is received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an

LCC command, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation160260071‐001A

Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, WIC bytes

11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified

in the IO command.

Bytes C through D must equal 0 degrees scan line direction and bytes E through F must equal 90 degrees

scan line sequence direction. The Coordinate Type byte 10 is not used to modify the image direction.

Write Image (WI)

Length D63D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

This command transmits a block of image data to the printer. A sequence of one or more Write Image

commands follows the Write Image Control command and terminates with an End command.

The total number of bits of image is equal to the product of the number of source scan lines and the

number of bits on each scan line. Thus, the number of bytes sent is:

(Bytes 4 through 5 x bytes 6 through 7 of the WIC command) divided by 8

Note: If this calculation yields a fractional remainder, round the result to the next whole number. The

DATA parameter bytes contain the image bit string.

End (END)

For a description of the End control, see “End (END)”.

Graphics Function Set Commands

The graphics function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting graphic pictures on a

logical page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the

graphics function set:

Command Code Description

WGC D684 Write Graphics Content

WG D685 Write Graphics

END D65D End

Graphics is a data type the printer uses to present line art picture drawings in a graphics block area on a

page. A sequence of drawing orders produce arcs, lines, fillets, character strings, markers, and other

elements that define the drawing. These orders, grouped into one or more segments, present the picture.

The control unit sends a Write Graphics Control command to the printer to establish the control

parameters and initial drawing conditions for presenting the picture data. The picture segments themselves

are sent to the printer as data in one or more Write Graphics commands.

Knowing how the graphics picture is developed allows an understanding of the relationship between the

Write Graphics command and the Write Graphics Control command. The following pages explain the

drawing order coordinates, the graphic medium presentation space, and the graphic block area.

Drawing Order Coordinate System

The drawing orders specify graphics in an abstract space rather than directly on the page. This allows

repositioning graphics on a page without changing the drawing orders. Coordinates (Graphics X and Y)

specify the position of the graphic.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation161260071‐001A

Note: The Graphics X and Y coordinates are not the same as the media X and Y coordinates. The

horizontal axis is Graphics X; the vertical axis is Graphics Y. The intersection of the Graphics X and

Y axes is coordinate (0,0). The horizontal axis is positive to the right of center and negative to the

left of center. The vertical axis is positive to the top of center and negative to the bottom of center.

Therefore, both positive and negative values are valid. Negative values are specified in

twos-complement form.

All coordinates are in coordinate units, called drawing units that are the same as units in the Graphics

Data Descriptor (GDD) structured fields. Figure 16 shows the Graphics X and Y coordinate system.

Figure 16. The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System

Graphic Medium Presentation Space

The graphic medium presentation space is an abstract coordinate space where graphics are composed. It

is a conceptual structure defined by the limits of the coordinate space as shown in Figure 17.

Units are defined in “Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)”.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation162260071‐001A

Figure 17. The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits

Graphic Window

The graphic window is a user-defined, rectangular area within the graphic medium presentation space.

This area is the source from where information is selected for printing. Figure 18 illustrates the relationship

of the graphic window to the graphic medium presentation space.

Figure 18. The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space

Graphic Block Area

The graphic block area is the part of the current physical medium in which the graphics is printed.

The graphic block area can overlap other output (such as text or images) specified earlier for the same

page. Likewise, subsequent output specified by other commands for the same page can overlap the

graphic block area. Figure 19 shows the graphic block area and its relationship to the

physical medium.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation163260071‐001A

Figure 19. The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium

Positioning the Graphic Window in the Graphic Block Area

As mentioned previously, the graphic window can be any size within the graphic presentation space limits.

The graphic block area size can be the entire physical Medium or a portion of the physical medium.

The Write Graphics Control command, described in detail in “Write Graphics Control (WGC)”,

specifies the mapping of the graphic window to the graphic block area.

The term mapping refers to the transformation of an abstract space into its size and position on the

physical medium. There are three ways to map the abstract space. They are scale-to-fit, center-and-trim,

and position-and-trim mapping. These mapping methods are described in detail in “Area Mapping Control

Options”.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation164260071‐001A

Write Graphics Control (WGC)

Length D684 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

GAP GOC GDD

The Write Graphics Control command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state. The parameters

of this command define the size, placement, and orientation of the graphic block area and establish the

initial conditions for interpreting the graphic data. Receiving the End command in the graphic block state

terminates the processing of the graphic data.

The Write Graphics Control data consists of three consecutive structured fields:

● The Graphic Area Position control defines the position of the graphics picture on the page.

● The Graphic Output Control (GOC) defines the size of this picture on the page.

● The Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD) defines the size of the graphics window and the default

characteristics of the graphics picture.

Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data

field.

Note: The quality of the graphics output is affected by the graphics mode and direction parameter values

selected at the operator panel (see the Administrators Manual for your model printer), and by the Print

Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)”).

Graphic Area Position Control (GAP)

GAP GOC GDD

Length ID DATA

The Graphic Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the

Write Graphics Control command. This field defines the position and orientation of the graphic block area.

The top left corner of the graphic block area is defined relative to the reference coordinate system.

The format of the GAP field is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 000B - (n + 1) Length of this Field

2-3 2-3 AC6B Structured Field ID

4-5 4-5 8000 - 7FFF X Coordinate Position or Inline Coordinate Position of the

Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)

6-7 6-7 8000 - 7FFF Y Coordinate Position or Baseline Coordinate Position of the

Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)

8-9 8-9 0000 When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate

system with the inline orientation system equal to 0 degrees,

you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.

5A00 When you use the I,B reference system and the inline

orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 degree

orientation for graphics.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation165260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

10 A Reference Coordinate System:

00 Absolute I, Absolute B

20 Absolute I, Relative B

40 Relative I, Absolute B

60 Relative I, Relative B

A0 Absolute X, Absolute Y

11-n B-n Reserved

Figure 20 shows the Graphic Block Area Position control specifying the top left reference point for the

graphic block area.

Figure 20. Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area

Byte A of the GAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system used for

determining the top left corner of the graphic block area can be either the media X,Y or the I,B coordinate

system.

If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5

specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.

If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4

and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate

position used prior to graphics.

If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4

and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the

text baseline coordinate.

If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5

add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text

baseline coordinate position used prior to graphics.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation166260071‐001A

If byte 10A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the

block is within a page, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate

origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP

command was received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command,

GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block

is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from

the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.

When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0

degrees, you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.

When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180

degree orientation for graphics.

Graphic Output Control (GOC)

GAP GOC GDD

Length ID DATA

The Graphic Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write

Graphics Control command. This field specifies the size of the graphic block area and a mapping option

for placing the graphic window into the graphic block area. This field is optional and does not need to be in

the Write Graphics Control command. If the GOC field is not present, the printer uses:

● The mapping option X'30' (where offset equals zero)

● X offset and Y offset equals zero

● Graphics block size equals the graphics medium presentation space window size defined in the GDD

self-defining field.

The format of the GOC field is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 0010 - (n + 1) Length of this Structured Field

2-3 2-3 A66B Structured Field ID

4 4 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

01 Unit Base (10 cm)

5-6 5-6 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note 1)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note 1)

7-8 7-8 1 - 7FFF Width of Graphic Block Area in Units

FFFF Use Value From LPD Command

9-10 9-A 1 - 7FFF Height of Graphic Block Area in Units

FFFF Use Value From LPD Command

11 B Area Mapping Control Option (See Note 2)

10 Scale-to-Fit

20 Center-and-Trim

30 Position-and-Trim

12-13 C-D 8000 - 7FFF X Offset in Units (See Note 3)

14-15 E-F 8000 - 7FFF Y Offset in Units (See Note 3)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation167260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Value Description

16-17 10-n Reserved

Notes:

1. For bytes 5 through 6 (units per base value), 14400/10 in. is supported precisely. Multiples of 14400/10 in.

are also supported. If byte 4 specifies units in centimeters and byte B specifies 20 (center-and-trim) or 30

(position-and-trim), then bytes 5 through 6 must be equivalent to a supported value such as X'1626' or

X'2C4C'.

2. See “Area Mapping Control Options”.

3. The printer ignores the X and Y offset fields unless byte B equals X'30'. These values are the offset of the

top left corner of the graphic window relative to the top left corner of the graphic block area.

Figure 21 shows the Graphic Output Control parameters specifying the size of the graphic block area.

Figure 21. Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area

Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)

GAP GOC GDD

Length ID DATA

The Graphic Data Descriptor is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write Graphics Control

command. This field specifies the parameters for the graphic window in the graphic medium presentation

space (GPS) and sets the drawing default conditions. The graphic window limits define the range of

drawing order coordinate values that map to the graphic block area.

Without causing an error, the drawing orders can specify GPS coordinates in the X'8000' to X'7FFF' range.

The specified GDD graphic window limits select the part of the drawing order’s picture to consider for

mapping to the output area.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation168260071‐001A

The format of the GDD field is:

Decimal Hex Value Description

0-1 0-1 001C - (n + 1) Length of this Structured Field

2-3 2-3 A6BB Structured Field ID

4 4 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

01 Unit Base (10 cm)

5 5 00 Reserved

6-7 6-7 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)

8-9 8-9 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)

10-13 A-D 00000000 Reserved

14-15 E-F 8000 - 7FFF X Left Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units

16-17 10-11 8000 - 7FFF X Right Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units

18-19 12-13 8000 - 7FFF Y Top Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units

20-21 14-15 8000 - 7FFF Y Bottom Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units

22-25 16-19 00000000 Reserved

26-27 1A-1B 0000 Graphics Flags - Ignored

28-n 1C-n Initial Graphic Default Conditions - Self-Describing Instructions

that Set the Drawing Defaults for the Picture (See Note)

(Optional field)

Note: See “Self-Describing Instructions”. Figure 22 shows the Graphic Data Descriptor control parameters

specifying the size of the graphic window.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation169260071‐001A

Figure 22. Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space

Area Mapping Control Options

Byte B in the GOC data field is the area mapping control option byte. The option values are:

● 10 - Scale to fit

● 20 - Center and trim

● 30 - Position and trim.

Scale to Fit Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic block

area and the graphic data is scaled by the printer (to a printer-supported unit per unit base) so that the

picture within the graphic window fits entirely within the output area at the closest maximum scale.

Figure 23 shows the result of scale-to-fit mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown larger than

the graphic block area. The parameters in the Graphic Data Descriptor specify the size of the graphic

window (in GPS coordinate units). The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output

Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.

If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, the graphic window

is proportionally reduced to fit in the graphic block area. That is, the entire graphic drawing contained

within the graphic window appears in the graphic block area, reduced in size to fit in the graphic block

area.

This size reduction is done to scale, keeping the same proportions as the original graphic drawing.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation170260071‐001A

Notes:

1. The printer will not rescale graphics image data. If the image data does not fit within the output area,

clipping of the image data occurs.

2. Graphics markers are not scaled; they are always 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144-in.]) square. If markers are

drawn close to the boundary of a page and the page is then scaled down, the center points of the

markers are scaled closer to the boundary of the page but the marker size is still the same. The

markers may be clipped from the page if the scaling factor scales the centers of the markers too close

to the edge.

Figure 23. Scale-to-Fit Mapping

Center and Trim Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic

block area and the graphic data is presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that goes

outside the graphic block area is clipped to the graphic block area boundary. Figure 24 shows the result of

center-and-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than a previously defined

graphic picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters in the Graphic Data

Descriptor specify the size of the graphic window (in graphic medium presentation space (GPS) units). The

parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output Control specify the size and location of the

graphic block area on the physical medium.

If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, a portion of the

graphic picture is eliminated. The centers of the graphic window and the graphic block area coincide, and

the boundaries of the graphic block area determine the limits of the graphic picture. Any portion of the

graphic picture extending beyond the graphic block area will not be drawn on the page.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation171260071‐001A

Figure 24. Center-and-Trim Mapping

Position and Trim Mapping: The upper left-hand corner of the graphic window is mapped to the graphic

block area using the specified offset and presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that

goes outside the graphic block area is clipped to the area boundary. Figure 25 shows the result of position-

and-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than a previously defined graphic

picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters in the Graphic Data Descriptor

specify the size of the graphic window. The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output

Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.

If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, a portion of the graphic picture is eliminated.

The top-left corner of the graphic window is either coincident with the top left corner of the graphic block

area, or it is offset from the top left corner of the graphic block area by a distance specified in the Graphic

Output Control. Only the portion of the picture contained within the overlapping areas of the graphic

window and the graphic block area will be drawn. The printer trims (eliminates) the portion of the graphic

picture outside this area.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation172260071‐001A

Figure 25. Position-and-Trim Mapping

Self-Describing Instructions

This portion of the Graphic Data Descriptor structured field contains zero or more self-describing

instructions that set the drawing defaults for the graphics picture. The general format of a self-describing

instruction is:

21 Length Set Mask Default Data

The first byte, 21, indicates that the following parameter is a Set Current Defaults instruction.

The Length byte is the length of the following data. If this value equals 4, the printer uses the standard

default values.

The Set byte indicates the type of attribute or parameter this instruction is specifying.

The bits 0 through 15 in the Mask bytes correspond to attribute items within the indicated set. The

individual set descriptions explain the meanings of these bits. When a mask bit equals one, the value of

the default byte selects one of two options. See the default byte description for details. When a mask bit

equals zero, the default does not change and the data does not include the value for the corresponding

attribute.

The Default byte has a value of either 0F or 8F. A value of 0F sets all indicated items to their standard

default values. A value of 8F and a mask bit equal to one requires the appropriate data for a new default

to be defined in the data field for the corresponding attribute. Unreferenced data bytes not addressed by

the mask field are ignored.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation173260071‐001A

The Data bytes contain immediate data that specifies values for the attributes in this instruction. If the

Default byte is 0F, these Data bytes are not present.

The Set byte specifies one of the following attributes or parameters:

Set Value Description

00 Drawing Attributes

01 Line Attributes

02 Character Attributes

03 Marker Attributes

04 Pattern Attributes

0B Arc Parameters

The following charts explain the meaning of the mask bits for each of the Set instructions. Refer to the

drawing order descriptions for supported attribute values.

Drawing Attributes Set (Set = 00):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0 Color 2

1-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) -

Line Attributes Set (Set = 01):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0 Line Type 1

1 Line Width 1

2-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

Character Attributes Set (Set = 02):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0 Angle X, Y 4

1 Cell size CW, CH 4

2 Direction 1

3 Precision 1

4 Symbol Set 1

5 Shear X, Y 4

6-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation174260071‐001A

Marker Attributes Set (Set = 03):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0-1 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

2 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

3 Precision 1

4 Symbol Set 1

5-6 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

7 Marker Symbol 1

8-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

Pattern Attributes Set (Set = 04):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0-4 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

5-6 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

7 Pattern Symbol 1

8-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

Arc Parameters Set (Set = 0B):

Mask Bit Item Name Length (Bytes)

0 P Value 2

1 Q Value 2

2 R Value 2

3 S Value 2

4-15 Reserved (Mask Bits = 0) –

If the self-describing instructions do not specify a current default, the printer uses the standard graphic

default for that parameter. The standard default values for the graphic segments are:

Description Value

Color Black

Line Type Solid

Line Width Normal

Character Angle No Rotation

Character Cell Standard Size (19 Dots High by 21 Dots Wide in 1/144 in. Units)

Character Direction Left to Right

Character Set Current Set (through the operator panel)

Character Font NLQ Courier

Marker Symbol Cross

Pattern Symbol Solid Shading

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation175260071‐001A

Description Value

Current Position X, Y = 0, 0

Arc Parameters P = Q = 1, R = S = 0

Foreground Mix Overpaint

Background Mix Leave Alone

Character Precision Character Precision

Marker Precision Character Precision

Marker Symbol Set Resident Set in Printer

Note: Standard NLQ text character images (18 1/144 in. high by 20 1/200 in. wide) map to the standard

size graphics character so that their upper left corners are coincident.

Write Graphics (WG)

Length D685 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

BSI One or More Drawing Orders

The Write Graphics command transmits graphic data to the printer. The data in this command consists of

picture segments that contain the drawing orders that define the picture in the graphic medium

presentation space. Any number of Write Graphics commands may follow the Write Graphics Control

command.

The Write Graphics command has a data length restriction of 32K. Within this data-length limit, the Write

Graphics command can transmit partial segments, full segments, multiple segments, or any combination of

these. Segments and drawing orders must be transmitted in the order in which they are to take effect.

When the printer encounters a partial segment, the printer expects the next graphics data to be the

remainder of the segment. This condition is called graphics spanning. For a spanned segment, the

segment length is the length of the entire segment before spanning. The Write Graphics command length

is the actual number of bytes being transmitted in the current command.

The valid sequence for graphics spanning is as follows:

● Write Graphics command with zero or more segments, followed by the start of a partial segment

● Zero or more XOA, NOP, or STM commands

● A new Write Graphics command with a continuation of the partial segment, followed by zero or more

segments.

All segments are run in deferred mode; drawing orders are included in the picture as they are received.

The printer does not retain or store the segments. Receipt of the first segment starts the drawing process.

Begin Segment Introducer (BSI)

BSI One or More Drawing Orders

The Begin Segment Introducer precedes all of the drawing orders that are together in the graphic

segment. The following chart shows the format of the BSI:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation176260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

0 0 70 Begin Segment Command

1 1 0C Length of the Following Parameters in BSI

2-5 2-5 NAME Name of Segment (Printer ignores this field)

6 6 00 Reserved

7 7 Bit 0-2 Reserved (Must be Zeros)

Bit 3 Prologue Flag

0 - No Prologue

1 - Prologue

Bit 4 Reserved

Bit 5-6 Segment Flags

00 - New Segment (Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)

11 - Append This Segment to the Previous Segment (Do Not

Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)

Bit 7 Reserved

8-9 8-9 LEN Length of Created Segment

10-13 A-D NAME Predecessor/Successor Name (The Printer Ignores This Field)

14-n E-n ORDER Drawing Order or Orders (The Number of Bytes in This Field

Must Equal the Length Field, Bytes 8-9)

If bit 3 of byte 7 is on, a prologue is the first sequence of drawing orders in a new segment. The prologue,

if present, is always at the beginning of a new segment's data and ends by an End Prologue order within

the same segment.

If bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are zero, the drawing attributes are re-initialized to the current default values. If

bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are equal to 11, this segment appends to the previous segment and the current

drawing attributes do not reinitialize.

Drawing Orders: One or more drawing orders follow each Begin Segment Introducer. The format of a

drawing order is:

Order Code

Order Code Parameter(s)

Order Code Length Parameter(s)

The order code specifies the type of graphics to print or the assigned drawing attribute.

The Length field, if present, is a one byte value that specifies the length of the drawing order following this

byte. See the specific drawing orders for information about the length field.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation177260071‐001A

The parameter bytes contain the specific characteristics for the drawing order. For information about the

parameters, see the specific drawing orders, following this description.

Code Drawing Code Drawing

00 No Operation 33 Set Character Cell Size

01 Comment 34 Set Character Angle

04 Reserved (Treated as a No-op) 38 Set Character Set

08 Set Pattern Set 39 Set Character Precision

0A Set Color (Graphics) 3A Set Character Direction

0C Set Mix 3B Set Marker Precision

0D Set Background Mix 3C Set Marker Set

11 Set Fractional Line Width 3E End Prologue

18 Set Line Type 43 Reserved (Treated as a No-op)

19 Set Line Width 60 End Area

21 Set Current Position 68 Begin Area

22 Set Arc Parameters 71 End Segment (Treated as a No-op)

26 Set Extended Color 81 Line at Current Position

28 Set Pattern Symbol 82 Marker at Current Position

29 Set Marker Symbol 83 Character String at Current Position

85 Fillet at Current Position C1 Line

87 Full Arc at Current Position C2 Marker

91 Image at Current Position C3 Character String

92 Image Data C5 Fillet

93 End Image C7 Full Arc

A1 Relative at Current Position D1 Begin Image

E1 Relative Line

The following sections describe the drawing orders.

No Operation

Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or

any attribute or any current parameter.

Comment

01 L1 P1..Pn

Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or

any attribute or any current parameter. This order can appear anywhere within the segment.

L1 is the length byte. This byte is a value between 1 and 255 and specifies the number of data bytes that

follow. Parameters P1 to Pn are the data bytes. The printer ignores the data within the order. However,

there must be at least one data byte within this order.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation178260071‐001A

Segment Characteristics

04 L1 P1..Pn

Description: This order is for compatibility with existing products and is a No Operation order.

Set Pattern Set

08 P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current pattern set attribute. Parameter byte P1 has the

following value:

00 Pattern default

Set Color

0A P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current graphic color attribute. The color for non-graphics (for

example, text) does not change with this order. The color attribute applies to all following graphic drawing

orders until another Set Color order or Set Extended Color order occurs or until a new graphic segment

initializes the graphic attributes. This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

Parameter P1 specifies the color, as follows:

Hex Color (See note)

00 Current Default

07 Black

08 Color of Medium

Note: The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values

for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of

unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'01' through X'06') are

simulated by printing in black.

If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black. If this occurs, the Exception Handling

Control determines whether to report this condition. The EHC also determines whether to continue

with the Write Graphics command.

For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in black. These selections

overpaints previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to print. For a

color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting (erasing) the

dots to print.

Set Mix

0C P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current mix attribute. The mix controls the way that the

printer combines the color of the foreground with the color of the medium presentation space. Parameter

byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation179260071‐001A

00 Use the default (overpaint)

02 Overpaint - The color attribute value of the foreground replaces the color attribute value of the

graphics medium presentation space.

Set Background Mix

0D P1

Description: This order sets the value of the background mix. The background mix controls the way the

printer combines the color of the background with the color of the graphics medium presentation space.

Parameter byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:

00 Use the default (leave alone)

05 Leave Alone - The color attribute value of the medium presentation space does not change.

Set Fractional Line Width

11 P1 P2

Description: The Set Fractional Line Width order sets the line width attribute. This order changes only the

line width attribute. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter which order, Fractional Line

Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte sequence that

specifies the line width, as follows:

Hex Value Line Width

0000 Current Default

0001 - 017FF Normal Line (One Dot Wide)

0180 - FFFF Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)

This order aids graphics interchange capability. See also “Set Line Width” .

Set Line Type

18 P1

Description: The Set Line Type order sets the value of the current line type attribute. This order does not

change any other graphic drawing order attributes.

Parameter P1 specifies the type of line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:

Hex Line Type

00 Current Default

01 Dotted Line

02 Short Dashed Line

03 Dash-Dot Line

04 Double Dotted Line

05 Long Dashed Line

06 Dash-Double Dot Line

07 Solid Line

08 Invisible Line

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation180260071‐001A

Set Line Width

19 P1

Description: The Set Line Width order specifies the line width for subsequent graphics. This order

changes the fractional line width attribute only. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter

which order, Set Fractional Line Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameter P1 specifies

the width of the line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:

Hex Line Type

00 Current Default

01 Normal Line (One Dot Wide)

02-FF Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)

Set Current Position

21 04 P1-P4

Description: This order sets the current graphics position for a subsequent drawing order. The position for

non-graphics (for example, text) does not change.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate in drawing units. Parameters

P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate in drawing units. The printer resolves the

coordinates to the nearest increment of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]).

Set Arc Parameters

Description: This order specifies the parameters for a full arc (circle or ellipse), which the Full Arc orders

use.

The center of this circle or ellipse is the origin (coordinate 0,0). The circle or ellipse is drawn in a

counterclockwise direction. Parameters P1 to P8 form four two byte values that specify the coordinates of

the major and minor axis ends, as follows:

P1P2 - The X coordinate of the major axis end

P3P4 - The Y coordinate of the minor axis end

P5P6 - The X coordinate of the minor axis end

P7P8 - The Y coordinate of the major axis end.

For an ellipse:

(P1P2) x (P5P6) + (P3P4) x (P7P8) = 0

For a circle of radius r, the parameters are:

P1P2 = P3P4 = r, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0

For an ellipse with major axis a and minor axis b, the parameters are:

P1P2 = a, P3P4 = b, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0

For the above ellipse, tilted at an angle A to the X axis, the parameters are:

P1P2 = a cos(A)

P3P4 = b cos(A)

P5P6 = -b sin(A)

P7P8 = a sin(A)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation181260071‐001A

This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

Set Extended Color

21 04 P1-P4

Description: This order functions the same as the Set Color order except that it specifies a length field

and the color parameter contains two bytes. The color for non-graphics (for example, text) does not

change with this order.This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

This order aids graphics interchange compatibility.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the color, as follows:

Hex Line Type

0000 Current Default

0008 Black

FF00 Black

FF07 Black

FF08 Color of Medium

Note: The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values

for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of

unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',

X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.

For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in the selected color. These

selections overpaint previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to be

printed. For a color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting

(erasing) the dots to print.

Set Pattern Symbol

28 P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current shading pattern attribute for subsequent area

shading. For additional information, see “Begin Area” and “End Area”.

Parameter P1 specifies the pattern attribute value. This value determines which particular pattern from the

pattern symbol set the printer uses to shade (fill) the interior of subsequent areas. The pattern attribute

values are:

Hex Line Type

00 Current Default

01 - 08 Density 1 to Density 8 (Decreasing)

09 Vertical Lines

0A Horizontal Lines

0B Diagonal Lines 1 (Bottom Left to Top Right)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation182260071‐001A

Hex Line Type

0C Diagonal Lines 2 (Bottom Left to Top Right)

0D Diagonal Lines 1 (Top Left to Bottom Right)

0E Diagonal Lines 2 (Top Left to Bottom Right)

0F No Shading

10 Solid Shading

40 Blank

Set Marker Symbol

29 04

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol attribute for subsequent markers. See

“Marker” and “Marker at Current Position” orders.

Parameter P1 specifies the marker symbol attribute value. This value determines which marker from the

marker symbol set the printer uses for subsequent orders. The following are the marker symbol values:

Hex Line Type

00 Current Default

01 Cross

02 Plus

03 Diamond

04 Square

05 Six Point Star

06 Eight Point Star

07 Filled Diamond

08 Filled Square

09 Dot

0A Small Circle

40 Blank

Set Character Cell Size

33 04 P1-P4

21 08 P1-P4

Description: This order specifies the size of the character cell for output characters with subsequent

Character String orders. The character cell size for non-graphics (for example, text) does not change with

this order. The Set Character Cell order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

There are two types of formats with this order. The first format has a length of 4 and has four parameter

bytes. The second format has a length of 8 and has eight parameter bytes.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation183260071‐001A

For both formats, parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the character in

drawing units. Parameters P3P4 form a two byte value that specifies the height of the character in drawing

units.

For the second format, the width and height of the character cell contain both integer and fractional values.

Parameters P5P6 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the width of the character in

drawing units. Parameters P7P8 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the height of

the character in drawing units. There is an implied decimal point between P1P2 and P5P6, and between

P3P4 and P7P8.

The printer pads the standard graphics character cell with spaces to achieve the desired spacing. The

printer also adjusts the character size within the specified cell in integer multiples of the standard size

graphics character. The minimum character image (resulting from graphics mapping) is the standard size

graphics character, even though the scaled character cell may be smaller. In this case, overlapping of

characters may occur.

Note: The printer clips the expanded graphics representation of the last vertical column of a downloaded

NLQ character (see Load Symbol Sets).

Set Character Angle

34 04 P1-P4

Description: This order specifies the angle of the baseline of graphic character strings that print using

subsequent character string orders. The non-graphics (for example, text) character angle does not change

with this order. Angles of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees are valid. This order does not change any other

graphic drawing order attributes.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate. Parameters P3 and P4 form

a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate. To meet the requirement that the angle be 0, 90, 180, or

270 degrees, either the X or the Y coordinate must equal zero, as follows:

If X > 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees (default).

If X = 0 and Y > 0, then the angle is 90 degrees.

If X < 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is 180 degrees.

If X = 0 and Y < 0, then the angle is 270 degrees.

If X = 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees.

If neither the X nor the Y coordinate is zero, the printer uses the current default for this drawing order.

Set Character Set

38 P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current character set attribute. The character set specified by

this command must use an NLQ font if printing high-density graphics or a DP font if printing low-density

graphics. Downloaded DP characters are not supported in graphics.

Parameter P1 specifies the local character set identifier. A value of 0 or X'FF' selects the current drawing

default. A value of X'01' to X'FE' selects a local ID for the character set. This local ID is mapped to a

global font ID by the Load Font Equivalence command. See “Load Font Equivalence (LFE)”.

Set Character Precision

39 P1

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation184260071‐001A

Description: This order sets the value of the current character precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies

the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1

must equal 01 or 02. P1 set to X'00' is the current default.

Set Character Direction

3A P1

Description: This order sets the value of the character direction attribute. Subsequent strings that print

using the Character String order will print in the direction specified relative to the character baseline angle.

See “Set Character Angle”. The character direction for non-graphics (text) does not change with this order.

This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.

Parameter P1 specifies the direction, as shown:

Hex Line Type

00 Current Default

01 Left to Right

02 Top to Bottom

03 Right to Left

04 Bottom to Top

Set Marker Precision

3B P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies

the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1

must equal 01 or 02.

Set Marker Set

3C P1

Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol set attribute. Parameter P1 specifies

the local character set identifier. This printer only uses the default marker set. Thus, P1 must equal 00.

End Prologue

3E P1

Description: This order ends the prologue section of a segment. It is only valid if the prologue flag bit is

on in the Begin Segment Introducer (BSI). When the BSI prologue flag bit is on, only the following orders

are valid before the End Prologue order:

● Comment

● No Operation

● Segment Characteristics

● All Set Attribute type orders.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation185260071‐001A

End Area

80 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order indicates the end of the boundary of an area specified with a Begin Area order.

This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes. However, orders between a Begin

Area/End Area pair can update the current position.

L1 is the length of the data, P1 to Pn. If no data is present, the length is zero.

Parameters P1 to Pn are optional data bytes, and if present, must be zeros.

Within the area boundaries, one or more closed figures can exist. A figure ends either by an End Area

order or by a order specifying a coordinate that implies the start of a new closed figure. These orders

include a Line, Relative Line, Arc, Full Arc, Fillet, or Set Current Position order.

Each closed figure should close properly; its start and end points should be identical. If not, the figure

closes arbitrarily with a straight line connecting the start and end points.

Begin Area

68 L1

Description: This order indicates the beginning of the boundary of an area that the printer shades. The

area definition must terminate with an End Area order.

The area boundaries consist of one or more closed figures. Each closed figure is made up of a continuous

set of straight lines, full arcs, and fillets defined using the Line at Current Position, Fillet at Current

Position, and Full Arc at Current Position orders. The pattern symbol and the shading color for the area

are the attribute values that are current prior to the Begin Area order. Only the following orders are valid

between a Begin Area and an End Area order:

● Comment

● Line or Relative Line

● Line at Current Position

● Relative Line at Current Position

● Set Arc Parameters

● Full Arc at Current Position

● Full Arc or Fillet

● Fillet at Current Position

● Set Color or Set Extended Color (see note)

● Set Line Type, Set Line Width, or Set Fractional Line Width (see note)

● Set Current Position.

Note: When used between Begin Area and End Area drawing orders, the orders Set Color, Set Extended

Color, Set Line Type, Set Line Width, and Set Fractional Line Width update the values of their

respective current attributes only for the Area boundary, if drawn. These orders do not update their

respective current values for the area fill pattern after an area has begun.

Use of the Line, Relative Line, Full Arc, and Fillet in the non At Current Position form can cause the printer

to arbitrarily close the area figure. The recommended orders to use within an area definition are those in

the At Current Position form.

The printer cannot nest Area orders. The Begin Area order does not change any other graphic drawing

attributes. However, orders between a Begin Area/End Area pair can update the current position.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation186260071‐001A

Parameter P1 is a flag byte that specifies whether boundary lines are to be drawn, as shown:

Bit 0 Reserved

Bit 1 0 = Do Not Draw Boundary Lines

1 = Draw Boundary Lines

Bits 2-7 Reserved

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, pattern, and pattern set when shading

the area. If boundary lines are drawn, the printer uses the current values of graphics color, line type, and

line width. The printer shades any commented region with an odd number of line crossings from infinity.

This shading uses the current values of pattern symbol, color, mix, and background mix from the Begin

Area order. The printer will not shade regions with an even number of line crossings from infinity. The

printer counts all coincident boundary lines when counting line crossings.

The current position is the last coordinate value of the preceding drawing order. The Set Current Position

order can move the current position to any drawing order coordinate within the limits of the GDD defined

medium presentation space window.

Note: When filled areas are drawn such that some boundaries coincide, it is recommended that they be

drawn with the same value for Parameter P1 so that the area boundary is drawn properly.

Line at Current Position

81 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines. The printer draws a line from the current

graphics position to the points specified by the first set of X and Y coordinates in the parameters. The

printer then draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair, if additional

coordinates are present.

The printer uses the current attributes for color, mix, line type, and line width in drawing the lines.

L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of

four. If L1 is zero, no line is drawn.

Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates of the end

points for a series of connected lines. This order updates the current graphics position to the last line end

point. If the order does not specify any points, the current graphics position does not change. P1 and P2

form a two byte sequence that specifies the X coordinate of the second end point. P3 and P4 form a two

byte sequence that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point. Additional X and Y coordinates, if

present, are specified in the remaining parameters, following the same format.

Marker at Current Position

82 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols, which the printer places at the points

specified by a pair of X and Y coordinates, beginning with the current graphics position. The Set Marker

Symbol order determines the marker that prints.

L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of

four. A value of zero for L1 is valid and results in only one marker symbol being drawn at the current

graphics position.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation187260071‐001A

Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates for each

additional marker symbol. The printer draws the first marker symbol at the current graphics position. P1

and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the second X coordinate. P3 and P4 form a two byte value

that specifies the second Y coordinate. Any remaining parameters specify additional coordinate values for

additional markers, using the same format.

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker, precision marker set, and

marker symbol for drawing the marker.

This order updates the current graphics position to the value of the last point coordinates. If this order

does not specify any points, the current graphics position will not change.

Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a

graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined

graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable

graphics area.

Character String at Current Position

83 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order draws a character string, starting at the current graphics position. A previous Set

Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character

Set order has been processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing

the string. The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the

character size, character angle, and character direction, respectively.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the character string. If L1 is zero, no character string is

drawn.

Parameters P1 to Pn, the character string, are one-byte values that specify the code points (characters) of

the character string to be drawn, using the currently active character set.

Fillet at Current Position

85 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a curved line that the printer draws tangential to a specified set of

connected, imaginary, straight lines. The printer uses the current graphics position for the first point and

the parameter (or parameters) specifies additional points to use.

The printer joins the points specified by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve to the lines,

as follows:

● The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and to the last line at its end point.

● If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.

L1 specifies the length of the parameter (or parameters) in this order. The value of L1 must be a multiple

of four. A value of zero for L1 is invalid.

The first end point for the imaginary line specifying the fillet is the graphics current position. Parameters P1

to Pn form two byte values that specify additional X and Y coordinates. These coordinates are additional,

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation188260071‐001A

sequential end points of the imaginary lines specifying the fillet.

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Full Arc at Current Position

87 L1 P1-P2

Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the current graphics

position. A previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no Set

Arc Parameters order has been received, then the printer draws an arc using the default values of the arc

parameters.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the scale. P1 specifies the integer portion of

the scale; P2 specifies the fractional portion of the scale (P2 divided by 256). For example, if P2 equals

X'40', the decimal value of P2 is 64. This value (64) divided by 256 equals the fraction one-fourth.

The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters. For a circle, the radius is P1P2 x r. A previous

Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r.

For an ellipse: The major axis is P1P2 x a, the minor axis is P1P2 x b, and a previous Set Arc Parameters

order specifies the values for a and b.

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.

This order does not update the current graphics position.

Begin Image at Current Position

91 06 P1-P6

Description: This order defines an image, with the top left corner of the image at the current graphics

position. An image consists of a rectangular region with a resolution of one pel, defined in increments of

0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Each pel, therefore, represents one dot in the printed image. One or more

Image Data orders follow the Begin Image at Current Position order. The Image Data orders contain the

image data itself. The Begin Image at Current Position order introduces a graphics image. Only Image

Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image and End Image orders.

Parameters P1 and P2 are always zero for this order. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that

specifies the width of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Parameters P5 and P6

form a two byte value that specifies the height of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144

in.]).

The printer uses the current values of color and mix when drawing the image.

Note: The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in

increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]), not in drawing units.

Image Data

92 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies the image data for all or part of an image introduced by a Begin Image

order. A Begin Image order must precede an Image Data order.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation189260071‐001A

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length (in bytes) of the image data that follows. Valid values for

L1 are X'00' through X'FF'.

Parameters P1 to Pn are values that specify the image dot data, a zero indicating the absence of a dot, a

one indicating the presence of a dot. The dots are 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]) apart horizontally and

vertically.

The image data is in the form of horizontal scan lines (rows), left to right. Each Image Data order specifies

only one scan line (row) of the image. Therefore, the number of Image Data orders following a Begin

Image order must be equal to the value specified in parameters P5 and P6 (the image height) of the Begin

Image order.

Each of the parameters, P1 to Pn, of the Image Data order specifies eight dots. Therefore, parameter L1

of the Image Data order must equal the image width divided by eight. Parameters P3 and P4 of the Begin

Image order specify the image width. If the image width is not a multiple of eight, the printer ignores any

extra dots specified by bits in the last parameter, Pn.

Note: The image data specified in the Image Data Orders between a Begin Image and End Image pair

must exactly fill the area specified by the width and height of the Begin Image order.

This order does not update the current graphics position.

End Image

93 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order defines the end of an image. A Begin Image order and zero or more Image Data

orders must precede the End Image order.

L1, the length, is a one-byte value that specifies the number of parameter bytes that follow. If no

parameter bytes follow, L1 is zero.

Parameters P1 to Pn are optional. The printer does not use these parameters; if they are present, the

printer discards them.

This order does not update the current graphics position.

Relative Line at Current Position

A1 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line at Current Position

order. With this order, the end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point, rather than an

absolute coordinate pair.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field. L1 must be a multiple of two. The

printer will not draw a line if L1 is zero.

Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset, in drawing

units. The first line end point is the graphics current position. P1 specifies the X coordinate for the second

point as an offset from the first point. P2 specifies the Y coordinate for the second point as an offset from

the first point. The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values, as

offsets from each previous end point, following the same format.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation190260071‐001A

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the line.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point. If there are no

offsets in this order, the current graphics position does not change.

Line

C1 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be

a multiple of four and cannot be zero. If L1 equals four, no line is drawn, but the printer updates the

graphics current position to the points specified by parameters P1 to P4.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the first X coordinate point. Parameters P3

and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the first Y coordinate point. Parameters P5 to P8, if present,

specify the second X and Y coordinate points. The printer draws a line from the point specified by the first

pair of coordinates to the point specified by the second pair of coordinates. If additional coordinate pairs

are present, the printer draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair.

This order uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.

Following this order, the printer updates the graphics current position to the last end point specified in the

order.

Marker

C2 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols to place at the points specified by pairs of

coordinates. The specified location is the center of the marker.

A previously specified Set Marker Symbol order determines the marker symbol the printer uses. If no

previous Set Marker Symbol order was processed, the printer uses the current graphics default marker

symbol. The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker precision, marker set,

and marker symbol when drawing the markers.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be

a multiple of four. If L1 equals zero, the printer does not draw a marker.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate point for the first marker.

Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate point for the first marker.

Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, specify the X and Y coordinate points for additional markers.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point.

Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a

graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined

graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable

graphics area.

Character String

C3 L1 P1-Pn

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation191260071‐001A

Description: This order draws a character string starting at the specified location. A previous Set

Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character

Set order was processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.

The printer places the character cell of the first character in the string at the specified graphics position.

The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the character

size, character angle, and character direction, respectively. The printer uses the current values of color,

mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing the string.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. L1 must be greater than

or equal to four. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the character string, but the printer updates

the graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the starting location.

Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the starting location.

Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, are one-byte values that specify the code points of the character string,

using the currently active character set.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Fillet

C5 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a curved line, which the printer draws tangential to a specified set of

connected, imaginary, straight lines.

The printer joins the points specified in the order by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve

to the lines. The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and is tangent to the last line at its end

point. If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the following parameters. L1 must be a multiple of four

and cannot equal zero. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the fillet, but the printer updates the

graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first point. Parameters

P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first point. Parameters P5 to Pn, if

present, form two byte values that specify the corresponding coordinate values for additional points. If only

two points are specified, the printer draws a straight line.

The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.

Full Arc

C7 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the specified point. A

previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no previous Set Arc

Parameters order was processed, the printer draws the arc using the graphics default arc parameters.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the center of the arc.

Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the center of the arc.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation192260071‐001A

Parameters P5 and P6 form a two byte, unsigned, floating point value that specifies the scale. P5 specifies

the integer portion of the scale; P6 specifies the fractional portion of the scale. There is an implied decimal

point between P5 and P6. Byte P6 represents the fraction given by the value of P6 divided by 256 (see

“Full Arc at Current Position”).

The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters, as follows:

For a circle: The radius is P5P6 x r. A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r. For an

ellipse: The major axis is P5P6 x a and the minor axis is P5P6 x b.

A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the values for a and b. The printer uses the current values

of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.

This order does not update the current graphics position.

Begin Image

D1 0A P1-P10

Description: This order defines an image at the graphics position specified by parameters P1 to P4. An

image consists of a rectangular region defined in increments of 1/144 in. One or more Image Data orders

follow the Begin Image order. The Image Data orders contain the image data itself. The Begin Image order

introduces a graphics image. Only Image Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image

and End Image orders.

Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the start of the image.

Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the start of the image.

Parameters P1 to P4 define the location of the top left corner of the image. Parameters P5 and P6 are

always zero for this order. Parameters P7 and P8 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the

image in increments of 1/144 in. Parameters P9 and P10 form a two byte value that specifies the height of

the image in increments of 1/144 in.

The printer draws the image in the current values of color and mix.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the image (parameters P1 to P4).

Notes:

1. The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in

increments of 1/144 in., not in drawing units.

2. By sending the image ordered (immediate) instead of unordered (deferred), the printer uses less

storage.

Relative Line

E1 L1 P1-Pn

Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line order, except that the

end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point.

L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. A value of zero for L1 is

invalid; L1 must be a multiple of 2. If the value of L1 is two, the printer does not draw the line. However,

the printer does update the graphics current position to the point specified by P1 and P2.

Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset in drawing

units. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first end point of

the line. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first end point

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation193260071‐001A

of the line. Parameter P5 is a signed, twos-complement, one-byte value that specifies the X coordinate of

the second end point as an offset from the first end point. Parameter P6 is a signed, twos-complement,

one-byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point as an offset from the first end point.

The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values as offsets from the

previous point, following the same format.

The printer draws the line in the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.

This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last offset point. If there are no

offset points with this order, the current graphics position does not change.

End (END)

For a description of the End control, see “End (END)”.

Related Drawing Orders

The following list contains drawing orders that relate to a selected order. That is, when defining parameters

for a specific order, the additional orders in the list are also affected or should be considered.

Table 8. Related Drawing Order

Set Color Set Extended Color

Line, Line at Current Position

Fillet, Fillet at Current Position

Begin Area, End Area

Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Image

Begin Image at Current Position

Image Data, End Image

Marker, Marker at Current Position

Character String

Character String at Current Position

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Fractional Line Width Set Line Width

Line, Line at Current Position

Fillet, Fillet at Current Position

Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Area, End Area

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Line Type Line, Line at Current Position

Fillet, Fillet at Current Position

Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Area, End Area

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Line Width Set Fractional Line Width

Line, Line at Current Position

Fillet, Fillet at Current Position

Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Area, End Area

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation194260071‐001A

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)

Set Current Position Line at Current Position

Fillet at Current Position

Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Image at Current Position

Marker at Current Position

Character String at Current Position

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Arc Parameters Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Set Extended Color Set Color

Line, Line at Current Position

Fillet, Fillet at Current Position

Begin Area, End Area

Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position

Begin Image

Begin Image at Current Position

Image Data, End Image

Marker, Marker at Current Position

Character String

Character String at Current Position

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Pattern Symbol Begin Area, End Area

Set Marker Symbol Marker

Marker at Current Position

Set Character Cell Size Set Character Angle (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)

Set Character Direction (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)

Character String

Character String at Current Position

Set Character Angle Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)

Set Character Direction (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)

Character String

Character String at Current Position

Set Character Direction Set Character Angle (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by It)

Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by It)

Character String

Character String at Current Position

End Area Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Pattern Symbol

Begin Area

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Begin Area Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Pattern Symbol

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

End Area

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation195260071‐001A

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)

Line at Current Position Line, Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Color

Set Extended Color

Set Current Position

Marker at Current Position Marker

Set Marker Symbol

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Current Position

Character String at Current Position Character String

Set Character Direction

Set Character Angle

Set Character Cell Size

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Current Position

Fillet at Current Position Fillet

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Current Position

Full Arc at Current Position Full Arc

Set Arc Parameters

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Current Position

Begin Image at Current Position Begin Image

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Image Data

End Image

Set Current Position

Image Data Begin Image

Begin Image at Current Position

Set Color, Set Extended Color

End Image

End Image Begin Image

Begin Image at Current Position

Image Data

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Relative Line at Current Position Line, Relative Line

Line at Current Position

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Current Position

Set Color, Set Extended Color

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation196260071‐001A

Table 8. Related Drawing Order (continued)

Line Line at Current Position

Relative Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Color

Set Extended Color

Marker Marker at Current Position

Set Marker Symbol

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Character String Character String at Current Position

Set Character Direction

Set Character Angle

Set Character Cell Size

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Fillet Fillet at Current Position

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Full Arc Full Arc at Current Position

Set Arc Parameters

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Begin Image Begin Image at Current Position

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Image Data

End Image

Set Current Position

Relative Line Line

Relative Line at Current Position

Line at Current Position

Set Line Type

Set Line Width

Set Fractional Line Width

Set Current Position

Set Color, Set Extended Color

Bar Code Function Set Commands

The bar code function set contains the commands and controls for presenting bar code information on a

logical page, a page segment, or an overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are

the bar code function set:

Command Code Description

WBCC D680 Write Bar Code Control

WBC D681 Write Bar Code

END D65D End

The following pages describe the bar code function set commands.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation197260071‐001A

Write Bar Code Control (WBCC)

Length D680 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

BCAP BCOC BCDD

The Write Bar Code Control command causes the printer to enter the bar code block state in the current

page, overlay, or page segment state. The parameters of this command define the size, placement, and

orientation of the bar code block. Parameters in this command also establish the initial conditions for

interpreting the bar code data.

Note: The quality of the bar code output is affected by the bar code mode and direction parameter values

selected at the operator panel (see the Administrators Manual for your model printer), and by the Print

Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)”).

A bar code block contains one or more bar code symbols with or without human readable interpretation of

the bar encoded information. Because an important application of bar code printing is printing bar code

symbols on labels, means are provided in the function set to repeat symbols. The repeated symbols must

be of the same type, but the length and content of the variable data can be different. General parameters

applying to all the repeated symbols are in a single Write Bar Code Control command. Parameters that

always change or can change from symbol to symbol are in the Write Bar Code command. A separate

Write Bar Code command must be used with the variable bar code data for each symbol.

Upon receiving the Write Bar Code Control command, the printer enters the appropriate bar code block

state. The printer then initializes control for processing bar code symbols in subsequent Write Bar Code

commands. Receiving the End Code in the bar code block state terminates the processing of bar code

data.

The Write Bar Code Control command data contains three consecutive structured fields:

● Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)

● Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)

● Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD).

Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data

field.

Note: For more detailed information on bar codes, see Appendix C, “S828 Bar Code and OCR Printing

Options,”.

Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)

BCAP BCOC BCDD

Length ID Data

The Bar Code Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the

Write Bar Code Control command. This field defines the origin and orientation of the bar code block

relative to the reference coordinate system. The format of the BCAP field is:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0-1 0-1 000B - XXXX Length of This Field

2-3 2-3 AC6B Structured Field ID

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation198260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

4-5 4-5 8000 - 7FFF X Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block

6-7 6-7 8000 - 7FFF Y Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block

8-9 8-9 0000 When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B

2D00 coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0

Note (2) degrees, you must use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar

codes.

5A00 When you use the I,B reference system and the inline

8700 orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or 270

degree orientation for bar codes.

10 A 00 Absolute I, Absolute B

20 Absolute I, Relative B

40 Relative I, Absolute B

60 Relative I, Relative B

A0 Absolute X, Absolute Y

11-x B-x Reserved

Notes:

1. Any positive or negative value fitting in the two byte field is allowable. Negative values are in

twos-complement form. Figure 26 shows the BCAP field specifying the top left reference point, or

origin, for the bar code block, relative to the logical page.

2. Bar codes with a unit/module width of 0.533 mm (0.021 in.) cannot be printed in high speed mode. Bar

codes with a unit/module width of 0.356 mm (0.014 in.) and a wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.5:1 cannot be

printed in high speed mode.

Figure 26. Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field

Byte A of the BCAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system for

determining the top left corner of the bar code area can be either the X,Y or the I,B coordinate system.

If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5

specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation199260071‐001A

If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes

4 and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate

position prior to bar codes.

If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes

4 and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the

text baseline coordinate.

If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5

add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text

baseline coordinate position prior to bar codes.

If byte A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block

is within a page, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified

in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP command

received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command, BCAP bytes 4-7

specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay

that is invoked using an IO command, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and

Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.

When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0

degrees, you must use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar codes.

When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or

270 degree orientation for bar codes.

Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)

BCAP BCOC BCDD

Length ID Data

The Bar Code Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write

Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the mapping option for the bar code block. This field is

optional and may not be present in the Write Bar Code Control command.

If the BCOC field is not present, the bar code block is equal to the bar code medium presentation space.

The format of the BCOC field is:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0-1 0-1 0010 – XXXX Length of This Structured Field

2-3 2-3 A66B Structured Field ID

4 4 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

01 Unit Base (10 cm)

5-6 5-6 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm)

7-8 7-8 1 - 7FFF Block Width (X-Extent of Block)

FFFF Use LPD Value

9-10 9-A 1 - 7FFF Block Height (Y-Extent of Block)

FFFF Use LPD Value

11 B 30 Area Mapping Option - Position

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation200260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

12-13 C-D 8000 - 7FFF X Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units

14-15 E-F 8000 - 7FFF Y Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units

16-x 10-x Reserved

Figure 27 shows the BCOC field specifying the size of the bar code block on the logical page.

Figure 27. Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control

Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD)

BCAP BCOC BCDD

Length ID Data

The Bar Code Data Descriptor structured field is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write

Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the parameters that define the bar code symbols that

print. The format of the BCDD field is:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0-1 0-1 001B – XXXX Length of This Structured Field

2-3 2-3 A6EB Structured Field ID

4 4 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

01 Unit Base (10 cm)

5 5 Reserved

6-7 6-7 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm)

8-9 8-9 05A0 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 in.)

1626 - 7FFF Units per Unit Base (10 cm)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation201260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

10-11 A-B 1 - 7FFF X-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Width)

FFFF Use BCOC bytes 7-8 if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use

LPD value.

12-13 C-D 1 - 7FFF Y-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Height)

FFFF Use BCOC bytes 9-A if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use

LPD value.

14-15 E-F Reserved

16 10 Bar Code Type

00 Reserved

01 3 of 9 Code

02 MSI

03 UPC - Version A

04 Reserved

05 UPC - Version E

06 UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)

07 UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)

08 EAN-8

09 EAN-13

0A 2 of 5 Industrial

0B 2 of 5 Matrix

0C 2 of 5 Interleaved

0D Codabar

0E-10 Reserved

11 Code 128

12-15 Reserved

16 EAN Two Digit Add On (Magazine)

17 EAN Five Digit Add On (Paperback)

18 POSTNET (See Note 6)

17 11 Modifier (See Note 1)

18 12 01-FE Local Font ID (See Note 4)

FF Printer Default

19-20 13-14 Color support (See note 7)

0000 Printer Default (Black)

0008 Black

FF00 Printer Default (Black)

FF07 Color of Medium

FF08 Printer Default (Black)

FFFF Use Current Default

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation202260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

21 15 Unit/Module Width (See Note 2)

0E 0.36 mm (0.014 in.) Width

11 0.43 mm (0.017 in.) Width (Must have 0 in bytes 8-9 of

BCAP)

15 0.53 mm (0.021 in.) Width

1C 0.71 mm (0.028 in.) Width

FF Printer Default

22-23 16-17 1 - 7FFF Element Height (See Note 3)

FFFF Printer Default

24 18 1 - FF Height Multiplier (See Note 3)

25-26 19-1A Wide-to-Narrow Ratio (See Note 5)

2, 14 2:1

19, 0FA 2.5:1

3, 1E 3:1

FFFF Printer Default

27-x 1B-x Reserved

Notes:

1. The meaning of byte 11 (modifier byte) is dependent upon the bar code type. For the meaning of this

byte, see “Modifier Byte”

2. Any bar code can print with a unit/module width of 0.36 mm (0.014 in.). The only bar codes that can

print with a unit/module width of 0.53 and 0.71 mm (0.021 and 0.028 in.) are: Code 128, Codabar,

Code 3 of 9, MSI, 2 of 5 Industrial, 2 of 5 Matrix, and 2 of 5 Interleaved. If an unsupported unit/module

width is specified, the closest smaller supported unit/module width is used. For 0.43 mm (0.017 in.),

bar code block must equal 0 in BCAP bytes 8 - 9.

3. For all bar code types except UPC and EAN, the specified height equals the height of the bar/space

patterns. For UPC and EAN bar codes, the specified height includes the bar/space patterns and the

HRI. If a UPC or EAN bar code specifies a height less than or equal to 190 units at 1440 units per in.,

the height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height and the total height is the specified

height plus the HRI height (180 units at 1440 units per in.).

If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a zero degree rotation and a height less than

or equal to 460 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol

reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height

equals the specified height plus the HRI height (450 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of

the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns

and the HRI.

If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a 90 degree rotation and a height less than or

equal to 420 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol

reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height

equals the specified height plus the HRI height (410 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of

the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns

and the HRI.

4. Byte 12 selects a Local Font ID, either OCR-A or OCR-B, for use when printing the Human Readable

Information (HRI) beneath the bar code. The list below shows the bar code types that use OCR-A and

those that use OCR-B:

OCR-A OCR-B

Code 128 UPC - Version A

Code 3 of 9 UPC - Version E

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation203260071‐001A

OCR-A OCR-B

MSI UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)

2 of 5 Industrial UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)

2 of 5 Matrix EAN-8

2 of 5 Interleaved EAN-13

Codabar EAN Two Digit Add-On

EAN Five Digit Add-On

5. Wide-to-Narrow ratio is only valid for the following bar code types:

● Code 3 of 9 (X'01')

● MSI (X'02')

● 2 of 5 Industrial (X'0A')

● 2 of 5 Matrix (X'0B')

● Interleaved 2 of 5 (X'0C')

● Codabar (X'0D')

The default ratio for Codabar, Code 3 of 9, and the 2 of 5 types is 2.5:1 for unit/module width of 0.36

and 0.43 mm (0.014 and 0.017 in.), 3:1 for 0.53 mm (0.021 in.), and 2.5:1 for 0.71 mm (0.028 in.) The

default for MSI is always 2:1.

6. BCDD bytes 12 and 15-1A and WBC command byte 0 are not applicable to POSTNET; these bytes

are ignored by the printer as the POSTNET Specification defines values for these parameters.

7. The S828 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for

graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of

unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',

X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.

8. If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black.

Figure 28 shows the BCDD field specifying the size of the bar code medium presentation space within the

bar code block on the logical page. The bar code medium presentation space must fit within the bar code

block.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation204260071‐001A

Figure 28. Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size. Using the Bar Code Data Descriptor

Modifier Byte: 3 of 9 Code:

01 Print bar code with no printer generated check character.

02 Generate check character and print with bar code.

MSI Code:

01 Print bar code with no printer generated check character.

02 Print bar code with IBM Modulus 10 check digit generated by the printer and put at the end of the

data. This check digit will be the second check digit.

03 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will also be IBM Modulus 10.

04 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check

digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.

05 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check

digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.

06 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check

digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation205260071‐001A

07 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check

digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.

08 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check

digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.

09 Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The

second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check

digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.

UPC Version A:

00 Generate check digit and print standard symbol. Variable data field of Write Bar Code command

contains 11 bytes, first the number system digit, then the 10 article number digits.

UPC Version E:

00 Print bar code; six digits are bar encoded. Ten variable data characters are input. From the ten

input digits, the printer generates both the check digit and the six bar code characters. The printer

does not bar code the check digit. The check digit only assigns odd or even parity to the six bar

encoded digits.

UPC Two Digit Add-On:

00 Print the two supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command

variable data consists only of the two supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol

prints under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.

UPC Five Digit Add-On:

00 Print the five supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command

variable data consists only of the supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol prints

under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.

EAN-8:

00 Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is seven digits: two flag digits and five article

identification digits. The seven digits are all bar coded along with a check digit generated by the

printer. The check digit follows the last article identification digit.

EAN-13:

00 Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is twelve digits — two flag digits and ten article

identification digits, in that order. The first flag digit is not bar encoded. The second flag digit, the

article identification digits, and a check digit generated by the printer are bar encoded. The first

flag digit prints in human readable form at the bottom of the left quiet zone. The first flag digit

governs the A/B number set pattern of the bar/space encoding of the six digits to the left of the

center pattern.

Two of Five Industrial, Two of Five Matrix, Two of Five Interleaved:

01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.

02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.

EAN Two Digit Add-On:

00 Print the two add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation206260071‐001A

data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of

separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.

EAN Five Digit Add-On:

00 Print the five add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable

data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of

separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.

Codabar:

01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.

02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.

Code 128:

01 Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit (4230 and 4224 emulation only)

02 Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.

Note: Code 128 is normally printed with a check digit.

POSTNET:

00 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP Code (5 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP Code to be

bar encoded is defined as a 5-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code

(WBC) command. The POSTNET ZIP Code bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar

encoded ZIP Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.

01 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP+4 (9 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP+4 code to be bar

encoded is defined as a 9-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC)

command. The POSTNET ZIP+4 bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar encoded

ZIP+4 Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.

02 Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET Advanced Bar Code (ABC, 11 digit) bar code symbol. The

ABC code to be bar encoded is defined as an 11-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the

Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The POSTNET ABC bar code is printed with a leading frame

bar, the bar encoded ABC data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.

03 Print a variable length POSTNET bar code symbol. The code to be bar encoded is defined as a

n-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The printer

produces a bar code symbol without length checking; the symbol is not guaranteed to be

scannable or interpretable. The POSTNET variable-length bar code is printed with a leading frame

bar, the bar encoded data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.

Write Bar Code (WBC)

Length D681 Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Write Bar Code command transmits data (code points) to output as a bar code symbol. This

command contains parameters that locate the symbol reference point within the bar code medium

presentation space. The WBC command also contains the variable bar code data for printing as bar/space

patterns and information about printing the code in human readable form.

A flag byte contains information as to whether a human readable interpretation (HRI) is to print, whether

the HRI is to be above or below the bar/space patterns, and for the 3 of 9 code, whether the HRI of the

start/stop character (a star or asterisk) is to print or not.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation207260071‐001A

The HRI code prints in the OCR-A or the OCR-B font, depending on the bar code type. The following bar

codes print the HRI in OCR-A:

● Code 128

● Code 3 of 9

● MSI

● 2 of 5 Industrial

● 2 of 5 Matrix

● 2 of 5 Interleaved

● Codabar.

The following bar codes print the HRI in OCR-B:

● UPC-A

● UPC-E

● UPC Two Digit Add-On

● UPC Five Digit Add-On

● EAN-8

● EAN-13

● EAN Two Digit Add-On

● EAN Five Digit Add-On.

POSTNET bar codes have no HRI.

The DATA field for the WBC command has the following format:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0 0 Flags

Bit 0 0 - Print Human Readable Code (HRI)

1 - Do Not Print HRI

Bit 1-2 00 - Printer Option

01 - Print HRI Below Symbol - Valid for Code 128,

Codabar, 3of 9, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, EAN-13,

and All 2 of 5 Bar Codes.

10 - Print HRI Above Symbol - Not valid for UPC and EAN

without 2-Digit Supplemental and UPC and EAN 5-Digit

Supplemental.

11 -Invalid Combination

Bit 3 0 - Do Not Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9

1 - Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9

Bit 4-7 Reserved

1-2 1-2 1 - 7FFF X Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point

3-4 3-4 1 - 7FFF Y Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point

5-n 5-n Bar Code Data (See Note 3)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation208260071‐001A

Notes: If bar codes with human readable interpretation (HRI) are placed too close to the page edges, the

human readable characters may fall outside the physical medium boundaries. If the HRI falls outside the

physical medium boundaries, the characters may not print and a Position Check error, X'041100', may occur.

To ensure that the human-readable characters print, choose X and Y parameter values that allow sufficient

space for the characters to print. Some guidelines are:

1. For bar code types UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, and EAN-13, choose X and Y coordinates that place the bar

code at least 3.88 mm (0.15 in.) from both the top and left edges of the page.

2. For bar code types UPC Two Digit Add-On and UPC Five Digit Add-On, choose a Y coordinate that places

the bar code at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) from the top edge of the page.

3. For Codabar bar codes, the data must include the START and STOP characters. For Code 128 bar codes,

the table on the following page should be used to determine the hex value of the desired character.

The symbol reference point must be inside the bar code medium presentation space and must lie within the

logical page.

Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)

Table 9. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)

CharacterHexCharacterHexCharacter HexCharacter Hex

NUL00.4Bi89IC9

SOH01<4CFNC18F}D0

STX02(4Dj91JD1

ETX03+4Ek92KD2

HT 05|4Fl93LD3

VT 0B&50m94MD4

FF 0C!5An95ND5

CR 0D$5Bo96OD6

SO 0E*5Cp97PD7

SI 0F)5Dq98QD8

DLE10;5Er91RD9

DC111_60~A1\E0

DC212/61sA2SE2

DC313,6BtA3TE3

BS 16%6CuA4UE4

CAN18‐6DvA5VE5

EM 19>6EwA6WE6

GS 1D?6FxA7XE7

RS 1E‘79yA8YE8

US 1F:7AzA9ZE9

FS 22#7B^BOFNC2EA

LF 25@7C[BA0F0

ETB26’7D]BB1F1

ESC27=7EFNC4BE2F2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation209260071‐001A

Table 7. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) (continued)

CharacterHexCharacterHexCharacter HexCharacter Hex

ENQ2D"7F{C03F3

ACK2Ea81AC14F4

BEL2Fb82BC25F5

SYN32c83CC36F6

EOT37d84DC47F7

DC43Ce85EC58F8

NAK3Df86FC69F9

SUB3Fg87GC7FNC3FA

SP 40h88HC8DELFF

Note: All START, STOP, SHIFT, and CODE characters are generated by the printer in order to produce

the shortest bar code possible from the given data.

Overlay Function Set Commands

The overlay function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present information

in the overlay memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific data types used in

defining the overlay.

The overlay is contained between the Begin Overlay (BO) command and the End Page (EP) command

and cannot contain itself. Overlays can be nested; that is, overlays can contain other overlays. The depth

of the overlay nesting cannot exceed five levels.

Figure 29 shows an overlay nesting.

Figure 29. An Example of Overlay Nesting

The following commands are the overlay function set:

Command Code Description

BO D6DF Begin Overlay

DO D6EF Delete Overlay

IO D67D Include Overlay

The following pages describe the overlay function set commands.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation210260071‐001A

Begin Overlay (BO)

Length D6DF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Begin Overlay command causes the printer to leave the home state and enter the overlay state. This

command defines data that the printer saves for later use within an overlay. The printer later merges the

stored overlay with ordinary printed pages by using the Include Overlay command or the Load Copy

Control command. The current Load Page Description, Load Font Equivalence, and Load Equivalence

records, if any, become part of the definition of the overlay. The definition of the overlay terminates by an

End Page command. The overlay itself is between the Begin Overlay and the End Page commands.

The DATA field is one byte and it specifies the overlay ID. Valid values for this byte are decimal 1 through

254 (X'1' through X'FE'’). If this value specifies an overlay identifier already loaded in the printer, an

exception occurs.

Note: Because overlays use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use overlays only when

data needs to be kept.

Delete Overlay (DO)

Length D6EF Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Delete Overlay command deletes (clears) either a single overlay or all overlays from the printer

memory.

The DATA field is one byte in length and can be any value between 0 and 254 (X'00' to X'FE'). This value

is the overlay identifier, and it specifies the overlay to be deleted. If this value is zero, all overlays are

deleted.

Include Overlay (IO)

Length D67D Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Include Overlay command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current page at the

specified presentation position. Following the inclusion and processing of an overlay, the current print

position remains where it was prior to the overlay processing. The printer restores all page description

values, font and suppression equivalences, and text control values to the values that existed for each at

the time the overlay was processed.

The DATA field is 10 bytes in length, and contains the following:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0-1 0-1 0001 - 00FE Overlay ID

2 00 Reserved

3-5 3-5 X Coordinate

000000 - Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page

007FFF

FF8000 - Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page

FFFFFE

FFFFFF Use the Current Inline Text Position

6 6 00 Reserved

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation211260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

7-9 7-9 Y Coordinate

000000 - Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page

007FFF

FF8000 - Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page

FFFFFE

FFFFFF Use the Current Baseline Text Position

Note: Negative values must be specified in twos-complement form.

Page Segment Function Set Commands

The page segment function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present

information in the page segment memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific

data types defining the page segment. The following commands are the page segment function set:

Command Code Description

BPS D65F Begin Page Segment

DPS D66F Deactivate Page Segment

IPS D67F Include Page Segment

The following pages describe the page segment function set commands.

Begin Page Segment (BPS)

Length D65F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Begin Page Segment command causes the printer to enter the page segment state. This command is

only valid in the home state. Receipt of an End Page command while in the page segment state causes

the printer to return to the home state.

The Page Segment command defines a segment of page data to save within the printer for later printing.

This printer later includes this segment when it receives the Include Page Segment command.

The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the

page segment identifier. If this value specifies a page segment identifier already loaded in the printer, an

exception occurs.

Note: Because page segments use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use page segments

only when data needs to be kept.

Include Page Segment (IPS)

Length D67F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Include Page Segment command causes a previously stored set of commands to process in the input

data stream as though they were just received from the host. The printer places the segment at the

current presentation position and updates the presentation position as a result of this command.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation212260071‐001A

The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the

page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to include. A value specifying a page segment

identifier that is not defined in the printer causes an exception to occur.

Deactivate Page Segment (DPS)

Length D66F Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Deactivate Page Segment command deletes (clears) either a single page segment or all page

segments from the printer memory.

The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'00' and X'7F'. This value is the

page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to delete. A value of zero deletes all segments.

Loaded Font Function Set Commands

The loaded font function set contains the commands the printer uses to download and delete font

information from the font storage of the printer. The following commands are the loaded font function set:

Command Code Description

LSS D61E Load Symbol Set

The following pages describe the loaded font function set commands.

Load Symbol Set (LSS)

Length D61E Flag Correlation ID (Optional) DATA

The Load Symbol Set command provides control and pattern information for code points of a font. This

command is only valid in the home state and does not result in a state transition. The DATA field contains

the following information:

Decimal Hex Content Description

0 0 90 FLAGS (Vertical Format Download - See Note 1)

1 1 00 Reserved

2 2 01-0F Starting Code Point

3 3 00 Reserved

4 4 D-FF Additional Parameter Byte Length (This Value Is One More

Than the Number of Bytes Remaining)

5 5 60 No Self-Defining Fields Present

61 Self-Defining Fields Present

6 6 XX Uniform Character Box Size X Dimension (See Note 2)

7 7 Uniform Character Box Size Y Dimension

DP and DP Text Quality

09 NLQ

8 8 00 Reserved

9 9 00 Reserved

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation213260071‐001A

Decimal Hex Content Description

10 A 00 Reserved

11 B 01-FF Ending Code Point

12 C 00 Reserved

13 D 00 Reserved

14 E 00 Reserved

15-16 F-10 0001 - 7EFF Loaded Font Identifier (See Note 3)

17-x 11-x 00...00 Reserved (See Note 4)

(x+1) - xx (x+1) - xx 02FF...XX Self-Defining Fields

o-p o-p XX...XX Character Raster Data

Notes:

1. Vertical format download refers to the method used to send the character patterns to the printer. The

bits are organized as a sequence of vertical cell slices. Each slice contains a number of bits equal to

the uniform box Y size (byte 7). Slices are contiguous (run together) in the raster pattern data. The last

slice of each character is padded with the minimum number of bits needed to reach a byte boundary.

Padded bits are always zeros. The number of vertical slices per character is equal to the uniform box

X size (byte 6).

The first vertical slice received by the printer is the left reference edge of the character box. The last

slice received is the right reference edge of the character box. The first received pel of each slice

makes up the top reference edge of each character box. The last received non-padding pel of each

slice makes up the bottom reference edge of each character box.

2. The meaning of this byte depends upon the font selected, as explained below.

3. An LFE entry must exist for this LFID prior to receiving the LSS command; otherwise an error occurs.

4. The value of byte 4 determines the number of bytes in this field.

5. Load symbol set into Fast Draft fonts is not allowed.

Character Box Size X Dimension (Byte 6): The meaning of byte 6 is as follows:

● Resident Fonts, except PSM

– 0A - DP Quality

– 14 - DP Text and NLQ Quality

● Resident PSM Fonts

– 01-FF - DP Text Quality

– 01-FF - NLQ Quality

● Non-Resident Fonts

– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 09

– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 12.

The print quality must be set appropriately (with the PQC command) before the LSS command is issued if

the font is present in the printer (specified by the LFE command).

Self-Defining Fields: If byte 5, bit 7, equals one, then the DATA field includes one or more self-defining

fields. The format of each field is:

L T Data

L and T are single byte values that specify the length and type of self-defining field. The only valid

self-defining field is the terminator field X'02FF', without any data. The character raster patterns

immediately follow this field. The printer ignores any other self-defining fields.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter5IPDSProgrammingInformation214260071‐001A

Character Raster Patterns: Data in this field contains the actual code points (bit patterns) for the font

specified in bytes 0F and 10. If the font identifier matches an existing font ID, and one or more of the code

points specified in bytes 2 and 0B overlap previously specified code points, then the printer replaces the

character patterns of the previously specified code points, regardless of how they were originally loaded.

Note: Printronix recommends that image data bits for the last vertical column of NLQ

character patterns be all zeros. The printer clips the graphics representation of the last vertical

column if NLQ characters are expanded for graphics printing (see “Set Character Cell Size” on

page 182). Resident NLQ text character patterns do not contain image data (dots) in the last

column of the character box.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes215260071‐001A

Chapter 6. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes

The following tables contain the exception reporting codes, which the printer sends to the host in the

NACK reply. These codes are in a three-byte format. The first byte, byte 0, is the error group. The

remaining two bytes, bytes 1 and 2, are the individual error identifiers. Table 8 shows the error group

meanings:

Table 10. Exception Reporting Group Codes

Byte 0 Error Type

80 “Command Reject - X'80'”

40 “Intervention Required - X'40'”

10 “Equipment Check - X'10'”

08 “Data Check - X'08'”

04 “Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'”

03 “Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'”

02 “Specification Check-General - X'02'”

01 “Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'”

Command Reject: Indicates that the printer cannot recognize a received command.

Intervention Required: Indicates that the printer requires operator intervention.

Equipment Check: Indicates that a hardware error has occurred. Data Check: Indicates that the printer

detects a data error when receiving a logical unit from the application program or that the printer detects a

data error while printing the page.

Specification Check: Indicates that the data parameters or values in a received command are invalid.

Condition Requiring Host Notification: Indicates that the printer has detected an error or condition that

should be reported to the host computer.

Command Reject - X'80'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for a command reject condition:

X'800100' Invalid IPDS Command Code

Explanation:

1. The command code is not recognized. An error

length on a previous command may have caused the

current data to be processed as a command.

2. The command is not supported.

Alternate Exception Action: None

X'800200' Invalid IPDS Command Sequence

Explanation: The printer state is invalid for the

received command.

Alternate Exception Action: None

Intervention Required - X'40'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for an intervention required condition:

X'400000' Printer Not Ready

Explanation: The printer needs operator intervention

to tear off a continuous forms paper source so paper

source switching can be done when in 4224

emulation mode.

Alternate Exception Action: None

X'400100' Printer Out of Forms

Alternate Exception Action: None

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes216260071‐001A

X'402000' Incorrect Forms Module Selection

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'401300' Tear-Off Required

Explanation: The printer needs operator

intervention to tear off a continuous forms paper

source so paper source switching can be done.

Alternate Exception Action: None

X'40E000' Forms Jam

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'40E400' Cancel Print Key Pressed

Explanation: The Cancel Print key was

pressed while the printer was receiving IPDS

data.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Equipment Check - X'10'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for an equipment check condition:

X'10F100' Permanent Erro

Explanation:

1. There was a permanent hardware error.

2. The microcode detected an irrecoverable logic error.

3. The microcode detected a condition that should not

have occurred.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Data Check - X'08'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for a data check condition:

X'082100' Undefined Character

Explanation:

1. An undefined character code has been detected in

Write Text data.

2. An undefined overstrike character code has been

detected.

3. A character has been detected in Write Text

Command data which is undefined at the quality

level specified by the XOA-PQC command.

4. An undefined character code has been detected in

Write Bar Code data.

Alternate Exception Action: For reasons 1-3, print

the default character. For reason 4, there is no

alternate exception action.

X'08C100' Position Check

Explanation: An attempt was made to print

outside the valid printable area.

Alternate Exception Action: All physical

printing

outside the valid printable area is suppressed.

All data and controls continue processing. The

printer continues to print within the valid

printable area to the greatest possible extent.

For text, this may mean truncating text lines at

the character boundary closest to the edge of

the intersection. For graphics, this may mean

truncating graphics pictures at the pel closest

to the boundary. For image, this may mean

truncating scan lines at the pel closest to the

boundary, or alternatively, not printing any of

the image if any part of the image falls outside

the valid printable area.

Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for a bar code specification check condition:

X'040300' Bar Code Type Requested Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The bar code type requested in the

Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not

supported.

X'040400' LCID Requested Is Not Supported

Explanation: The type style/font requested in

the

Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not

supported.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes217260071‐001A

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Alternate Exception Action: Use printer

default.

X'040500' Bar Code Color Requested Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The color requested in the Write Bar

Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default

color.

X'040600' Bar Code Color Requested Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The unit/module width specified in the

Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use closest smaller

width supported or the device default for those

devices with only one fixed default value.

X'040700' Element Height Specified Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The element height specified in

the Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use closest

height supported

X'040800' Height Multiplier Specified Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The height multiplier specified in the

Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use closest multiplier

supported.

X'040900' Wide/Narrow Ratio Is Not

Supported

Explanation: The wide/narrow ratio specified

in the Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is

not supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the printer

default wide element width. The default wide

element width and the specified or default

unit/module width should be such that a

wide/narrow ratio of 2.50 or 3.00 results.

X'040A00' Invalid Symbol Reference Point

Explanation: The symbol reference point given in

the Write Bar Code command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040B00' Invalid Bar Code Modifier

Explanation: The bar code modifier, byte 17

of the Bar Code Data Descriptor structured

field, is not a valid or supported value for the

bar code type specified by byte 16 of the same

structured field.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040C00' Invalid Bar Code Data Length

Explanation: The length of the variable data (as

given in bytes 5-n of the Write Bar Code command)

to be bar-encoded/printed, plus any printer-generated

check digits to be coded/printed, is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'040E00' Check Digit Calculation Error

Explanation: A first check digit calculation

resulting in a value of 10 is defined as an error

in various modifier options (byte 17 of the Bar

Code Data Descriptor structured field) for the

MSI bar code.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'041000' HRI Location Not Supported

Explanation: HRI location specified in the FLAGS

byte of the WBC command is not a supported

location.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'041100' Attempt to Print Portion of

Symbol Outside Block or VPA

Explanation:

1. A portion of the bar code presentation

space, as mapped into the block, extends

outside the bar code block boundaries, or a

portion of the bar code block extends outside

of the logical page (or current overlay).

2. An attempt is made to print a bar code

symbol or HRI outside the physical page.

3. The symbol reference point lies outside the

bar code block, presentation space, or logical

page (or current overlay).

Alternate Exception Action: None.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes218260071‐001A

Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for a graphics specification check condition:

X'030001' Unallocated Graphic Order or

Command Code

Explanation:

1. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated

order code that is reserved for future use.

2. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated

command code that is reserved for future use.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030002' Reserved Byte Error or Invalid

Default

Explanation:

1. A reserved byte in the graphic order is not set

to zero.

2. The Set Current Defaults instruction attempts,

in byte 2, to set an invalid or unsupported

attribute.

3. An invalid default byte value was received in

the GDD.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030003' Incorrect Drawing Order Length

Explanation: A drawing order length is invalid.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'030004' Invalid Attribute Value

Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic

order or for a WGC Set Current Default

instruction is invalid.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default value for that attribute.

X'030008' Truncated Order Error

Explanation: An order has been requested that is

not a complete order. This order is one of the

following:

1. A fixed 2-byte order and the second byte is not in

the segment.

2. A long order and the length byte is not in the

segment.

3. A long order and the number of bytes following

the byte containing the length count to the end of

the segment is less than the value of the length

count.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03000C' Segment Prologue Error

Explanation: A supported order that is not valid

within a prologue was found in a prologue.

The end of a segment was reached without an

End Prologue order.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03000E' Unsupported Attribute Value

Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic order

or for a WGC Set Current Default instruction is not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default value for that attribute.

X'0300021' Invalid Default

Explanation: The Set Current Defaults

instruction sets an invalid or unsupported

default for an attribute.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'033400' Character Angle Value Not Supported

Explanation: The specific character angle

requested is not supported.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the closest angle

supported by the printer.

X'033E00' Invalid End Prologue

Explanation: An End Prologue was found

outside the prologue section of a segment.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'036000' Area Bracket Error

Explanation: An End Area order has been

executed without a Begin Area order having

previously been executed.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'038000' Begin Area Received Incorrectly

Explanation: Begin Area order received while

Begin Area is already in progress.

Alternate Exception Action: None.





ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes219260071‐001A

X'036801' Area Truncation Error

Explanation: A Begin Area order has been

executed in a segment, and the end of the segment

is reached without an End Area order being

executed. Area fill implementation results are printer

dependent.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'036802' Supported Order Invalid in Area

Explanation: A supported order is detected

that is not valid within an area.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'036803' Pattern Symbol Set Not Available

Explanation: The symbol set identified by the

current Pattern Set is not available.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default pattern symbol set.

X'036804' Undefined Pattern Symbol

Explanation: The current pattern symbol is

undefined in the pattern symbol set.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default pattern symbol.

X'037001' Invalid Repeat/Append Bit

Explanation: The Begin Segment Repeat/Append

bit has a value of B'10' in chained immediate mode.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'037082' Invalid Repeat/Append Bit

Explanation: The Begin Segment

Repeat/Append bit has a value of B'01'.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'0370C1' Invalid Begin Segment length

Explanation: The Begin Segment parameter length

is invalid.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039200' Graphic Image Order Sequence

Error

Explanation: A Begin Image order was not

executed before the Image Data order in this

segment.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039201' Image Data Discrepancy

Explanation: There are insufficient or too many

bytes of data in the Image Data order.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039300' Graphic Image Bracket Error

Explanation: An End Image order is executed

without a Begin Image order having been

previously executed.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'039301' Incorrect Number of Image Data

Orders

Explanation: The number of Image Data orders

between the Begin Image and End Image orders is

not equal to the number of rows in the image (as

given by the value of height in the Begin Image

order).

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03C200' Marker Symbol Set Not Available

Explanation: The symbol set identified by the

current Marker Set attribute is not available.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default marker symbol set.

X'03C201' Undefined Marker Code

Explanation: A marker code point is undefined in

the current marker symbol set.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default marker symbol.

X'03C300' Character Symbol Set Not

Available

Explanation:

1. The symbol set identified by the current

Character Set is not available.

2. The current character set specified in the Set

Character Set order does not have the proper

attributes to be printed in graphics mode.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default character symbol set.

X'03C301' Undefined Graphics Character Code

Explanation: A code in a character string is

undefined in the current character symbol set.

Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard

default character symbol.

X'03D100' Truncated Graphic Image Error

Explanation: A Begin Image order has been

executed in a segment, and the end of the

segment is reached without an End Image order

having been executed.

Alternate Exception Action: None.



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes220260071‐001A

X'03D101' Invalid Order in Graphic Image

Explanation: A Begin Image order has been

executed in a segment, and an order other than a

Comment, Image Data, or End Image order is

executed.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03D102' Graphic Image Format Not

Supported

Explanation: The value specified for the

graphic image format parameter is not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'03D103' Image Width Greater Than Maximum

Supported

Explanation: The Width value specified in the

Begin

Image order exceeds the maximum image width

supported by the product.

Alternate Exception Action: The image width is

truncated at the maximum width supported.

X'03D104' Image Height Greater Than

Maximum Supported

Explanation: The Height value specified in the

Begin Image order exceeds the maximum

image height supported by the product.

Alternate Exception Action: The image height

is truncated at the maximum height supported.

X'03E100' Relative Line Outside Coordinate

Space

Explanation: The relative line starts inside the

drawing order coordinate space but goes outside.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Specification Check-General - X'02'

The following exception codes are the valid codes for a general specification check condition:

X'020001' Embedded Text Control Code Error

Explanation: Undefined text control code.

Alternate Exception Action: Ignore the control

sequence.

X'020201' End Suppression Text Control

Error

Explanation: The active Begin Suppression ID

within the current page, overlay, or page

segment is not the same as that specified in the

ES control.

There is no active suppression ID.

X'020202' Invalid IPDS Command Length

Explanation: The length for a command is not

within the allowed range.

The length of a Request Resource List entry is not a

valid or supported value.

The length specified for a Request Resource List

entry does not match the number of bytes received.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020205' Invalid Data Structured Field

Length

Explanation: A data structured field has been

received in a WGC or WBCC command that is

less than the minimum allowable length.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020302' IPDS Command Header Length too

Small

Explanation: The length value of a command is

less than 5 (or less than 7 if a correlation ID is

included).

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020305' Area Position Orientation is Not

Supported

Explanation: The orientation specified in the

Area Position structured field of the WGC or

WBCC command is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020401' End Page Encountered During Active

Suppression

Explanation: The End Page control was

encountered before a text suppression ended.

Alternate Exception Action: Process the object as

if the corresponding End Suppression control

sequence appeared at the end of the object. That is,

all of the data following the Begin Suppression

control sequence in the object is processed and

suppressed.

X'020402' Acknowledge Reply Response

Continuation Request is Invalid

Explanation: The printer received a command

whose response continuation bit is on but there

is no response to continue.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes221260071‐001A

X'020405' Area Position Reference System is

Not Supported

Explanation: The reference system specified in the

Area Position structured field of the WGC or WBCC

command is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020501' Invalid Spanning Sequence

Explanation: A Write Text or Write Graphics

command is required to complete a partial

order, control, or double-byte character code

and another command was received other than

an XOA command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020502' Unsupported Baseline Move

Explanation: Unsupported advancement of the

baseline coordinate toward the I-axis.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020505' Structured Field Unit-Base Invalid

Explanation: The unit-base (measurement

units) specified in the Output Control or the Data

Descriptor structured field of the WGC or WBCC

command is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020601' Begin Suppression Error

Explanation: Begin Suppression encountered in

the same unit (page, segment or overlay) before

previous suppression in that unit ended.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020605' Structured Field Units Invalid

Explanation:

1. The units specified in the Output Control or

the Data Descriptor structured field of the WGC

or WBCC command is not a valid or supported

value.

2. The result of the calculation cannot be

represented in the printer. This may result from

the WGC GDD window limits being very close

together.

3. Coordinate overflow while scaling graphics.

Possible if scaling coordinates require

multiplication by a value greater than 1.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020705' Structured Field Extents Not

Supported

Explanation: The extents specified in the Output

Control or Data Descriptor structured field of the

WGC or WBCC command are not a valid or

supported value. The window values of the WGC

GDD structured field are not consistent; therefore,

the value of XL is larger than the value of XR or the

value of YB is larger than the value of YT.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020805' Invalid Mapping Option

Explanation: A mapping option specified in the

Output Control structured field of the WGC or

WBCC command is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020905' Invalid Axis Offsets

Explanation: The axis offsets specified in the

Output Control structured field of the WGC or

WBCC command are not valid or supported values.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020B05' Invalid Structured Field Identifier

Explanation: A two-byte structured field

identifier in a WGC or WBCC command is

invalid or out of sequence.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'020F01' Invalid Text Orientation

Explanation: Baseline or Inline orientation specified

in Set Text Orientation is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline

orientation of 0 degrees and a baseline orientation

of 90 degrees.

X'021001' Invalid Margin

Explanation: The margin position is not a valid

or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes222260071‐001A

X'021101' Invalid Baseline Increment

Explanation: The value of the baseline increment is

not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021201' Invalid Intercharacter Adjustment

Explanation:

1. The value of the intercharacter adjustment is

not a valid or supported value.

2. The intercharacter adjustment direction is not

a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action:

1. Ignore the control sequence and continue

presentation with the parameter values

according to the hierarchy (the hierarchy is the

last valid value received or if none received then

use the LPD value).

2. Use direction = zero.

Note: In an LPD command, no Alternate

Exception Action occurs.

X'021202' Font Storage is Full

Explanation: There is insufficient pattern storage to

store the font transmitted with the Load Symbol Set

command. There is insufficient storage to load the

data transmitted with the Load Font Equivalence

command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021301' Invalid Absolute Move Baseline

Value

Explanation: The Absolute Move Baseline

parameter value is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021401' Invalid Absolute Move Inline Value

Explanation: The Absolute Move Inline parameter

value is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021402' Font to be Deleted Not Found

Explanation: The single byte font specified by

the Deactivate Font command is not in the

machine.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021403'

Explanation: Unsupported Baseline Move

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021502' Invalid DF Font

Explanation: The Loaded Font Identifier field is

required in the Deactivate Font command;

however, it is not present or its value is not a

valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021802' Invalid Font ID

Explanation:

1. The two-byte Font Identifier on a Load Symbol

Set or Load Font Equivalence command is not a

valid or supported value.

2. The one-byte Font Identifier value on the Load

Font Equivalence command is not a valid or

supported value.

3. A font is referenced on a Set Font control, a

Logical Page Description, a Load Symbol Set, a

Write Graphics, or Write Bar Code command, but

the font has not been previously identified by the

Load Font Equivalence command.

4. The font or symbol set referenced in a Logical

Page Description, Write Text, or Write Graphics

command is defined within the current Load Font

Equivalence but is not loaded in the printer.

Alternate Exception Action:

1. None.

2. None.

3. Substitute the active font for the specified local

font and continue processing.

4. Substitute the active coded font for the specified

local font and continue processing.

X'021701' Invalid Variable Space Increment

Explanation: The value of the variable space

increment as specified in a text control is not a

valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes223260071‐001A

X'021702' Invalid DF Deletion Type

Explanation: The Deletion Type on a Deactivate

Font command is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021901' Repeat String Length Error

Explanation: The Repeat String target string

length is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021902' Multiple Occurrences of the Same LFE

Local ID

Explanation: Explanation: The one-byte Local

Identifier value in the Load Font Equivalence

command has been used more than once, making

the Two-Byte Font Identifier reference ambiguous.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021C01' Invalid Embedded Text Control

Sequence

Explanation: A text control sequence contains

a code other than X'D3' following X'2B'.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021D02' Invalid LFE Identifier

Explanation: One or more of the following font

parameters listed in the LFE or their combination is

not valid or supported: Character Set ID, Code Page

ID, Uniform Character Increment, and Proportional

Increment Coefficient Table.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021E01' Invalid Text Control Length

Explanation: The length of a text control is not

valid.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021E02' Mismatch Between Font and XOA

Print Quality Control

Explanation:

1. The combination of parameters specified in LFE

are not supported together with the quality indicated

by XOA Print Quality Control.

2. The Font (Style) ID specified in the LFE is invalid

or unsupported or is not valid with the other font

parameters.

Alternate Exception Action: Choose “Best Fit”

font. Note: This error will be flagged when an

attempt to present the font is processed.

X'021F01' Repeat String Length Error

Explanation: Repeat String control on a Write

Text command has nonzero fill count but zero

string length.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'021F02' Mismatch of LFE Two-Byte Loaded

Font ID Parameters

Explanation: Two fonts have been assigned the

same two-byte Loaded Font ID by the LFE

command, but one or more of the following

attributes differ: Character Set ID, Code Page ID,

Font (Style) ID, Uniform Character Increment,

Proportional Increment Coefficient Table.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022602' Invalid LSS X Box Size

Explanation: The Box X size, specified in Byte

6 of the Load Symbol Set command, is not a

valid or supported value or is incompatible with

the specified font.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022702' Invalid LSS Y Box Size

Explanation: The Box Y size, specified in Byte 7 of

the Load Symbol Set command, is not a valid or

supported value or is incompatible with the specified

font.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022802' LSS Pattern Download Format

Reserved or Not Supported

Explanation: The specified pattern download

format in LSS is either a reserved value or not

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'022902' Invalid LSS Additional Parameter Byte

Length

Explanation: The additional parameter byte length

specified in the LSS command is outside the range

X'0D' through X'FF' or is not a supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023101' Invalid LCC Number of Copies

Explanation: The Number of Copies value

specified on the Load Copy Control command is

not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: Proceed as

though the number of copies field stated 1.



X'023201' Invalid LCC Number of Copies X'023401' Invalid LCC Copy Group Byte

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes224260071‐001A

Explanation: There is an invalid or unsupported

Load Copy Control keyword in the group entry.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Count

Explanation:

1. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control

group is not a multiple of two byte pairs.

2. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control

group is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023601' Invalid or Unsupported Load Copy

Control Simplex/Duplex Parameter

Explanation: The LCC command simplex/duplex

parameter is invalid or unsupported.

Alternate Exception Action: If invalid, none. If

unsupported, the printer prints simplex.

X'023A02' Maximum Number of Fonts

Allowed by the Printer Exceeded

Explanation: An attempt was made to

download more fonts than the printer can

support.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'023F02' Font Index Not Loaded

Explanation:

1. The font inline sequence in Load Font

Equivalence command is not supported or not

supported with the current Text Orientation.

2. The Font Index specified in a Load Font

Equivalence command called out by a Set Coded

Font Local text control is not loaded.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024201' WIC Pel Count < Minimum

Required

Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count

value on the Write Image Control command is

less than 1.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024301' WIC Pel Count > Maximum Allowed

Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count value

on the Write Image Control command is greater

than the valid or supported maximum.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024401' WIC Scan Count < Minimum

Required

Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count

value on the Write Image Control command is

less than 1.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024501' WIC Scan Count > Maximum Allowed

Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count

value on the Write Image Control command is

greater than the valid or supported maximum.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024601' Invalid WIC Source Image Format

Explanation:

1. The Compression Algorithm value (Byte 8) is

not a valid or supported value.

2. The (Pel) Data Format value (Byte 9) in the

Write Image Control command is not X'00'.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024701' Invalid WIC Scale Factor Value

Explanation:

1. The Pel Count Scale Factor value on the Write

Image Control command is not a valid or supported

value.

2. The Scan Count Scale Factor value on the Write

Image Control command does not equal the Pel

Count Scale Factor.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024702' Invalid LFE Font Inline Sequence

Explanation: The Font Inline Sequence

parameter in a Load Font Equivalence

command is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None

X'024801' Invalid WIC Scan Line Direction

Explanation: The Scan Line Direction parameter

value on the Write Image Control command is not a

valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024802' Invalid Font Section Number in

LSS command

Explanation: The section number specified in

the LSS command is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.





ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes225260071‐001A

X'024901' Invalid WIC Scan Sequence Direction

Explanation: The Scan Line Sequence Direction

value specified on the Write Image Control

command is not plus ninety degrees from the Scan

Line Direction value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Note: Plus ninety from 270, (X'8700') must be

X'0000'.

X'024902' Invalid Starting Code Point in LSS

command

Explanation: The Starting Code Point in the

LSS command is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024A01' Invalid WIC Coordinate Specification

Explanation:

1. The Coordinate Definition value on the Write

Image Control command is not a valid or supported

value.

2. The First Pel Location (X or I Direction) value on

the Write Image Control command is not a valid or

supported value.

3. The First Pel Location (Y or B Direction) value on

the Write Image Control command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024A02' Invalid WIC Coordinate

Specification

Explanation: The Ending Code Point specified

in the LSS command is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024B02' Invalid Bit Values in Flag Bytes of LSS

Command

Explanation: One or more of the bits in the two

Flags bytes of the LSS command Extended Form,

Clear/Overstrike, Skip, APA/CB/OB, Use S. E. T. is

not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'024C02' Invalid LSS Data Length

Explanation:

1. The LSS additional parameter byte length

does not correlate with the LSS data length.

2. An LSS self-identifying field length is not a

valid or supported value or does not correlate

with the LSS data length.

3. The amount of bit image data in the LSS

command does not correspond with the number

of code points, box size, and pattern download

format.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'025301' Invalid WIC Color Value

Explanation: The Color value of the WIC command

is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default

value.

X'025503' Unsupported Color or Color Attribute

Explanation:

1. The text color is not a valid or supported

value.

2. The text color precision is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: If the attribute

value is not valid, ignore the control and

continue presentation with the value that was in

effect prior to this control sequence. If the

attribute value is valid but unsupported for this

printer, use the printer default color.

X'026002' Invalid LPD X Units/Unit-Base

Explanation: On the Logical Page Description

command, the X units per unit-base value is not a

valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026102' Invalid LPD Y Units/Unit-Base

Explanation:

1. On the Logical Page Description command,

the Y units per unit-base value is not a valid or

supported value.

2. On the Set Media Size command, the units

per unit-base value is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes226260071‐001A

X'026202' Invalid LPD X-Extent

Explanation: On the Logical Page Description

command, the X-Extent is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026302' Invalid LPD Y-Extent

Explanation: On the Logical Page Description

command, the Y-Extent is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026401' Insufficient Control Storage for Image

Explanation: There is insufficient control storage to

print the image data transmitted with the Write

Image command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026402' Invalid LPD Unit-Base

Explanation: On the Logical Page Description

command, the unit-base is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026802' Invalid LPD Inline Direction

Explanation: On a Logical Page Description

command the Inline Sequence Direction value is not

a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline

sequence direction of 0 degrees and a baseline

sequence direction of 90 degrees.

X'026902' Invalid LPD Baseline Direction

Explanation: On a Logical Page Description

command the Baseline Sequence Direction

value is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline

sequence direction of 0 degrees and a baseline

sequence direction of 90 degrees.

X'026A01' Insufficient Source Image Data

Explanation: The number of source image bytes

received < the number implied in the Write Image

Control command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026A02' Invalid LPD Initial Inline

Coordinate

Explanation: On a Logical Page Description

command, the initial inline coordinate value is

not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026B01' Excess Source Image Data

Explanation: The number of source image bytes

received > the number implied in the Write Image

Control command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'026B02' Invalid LPD Initial Baseline

Coordinate

Explanation: On a Logical Page Description

command, the initial baseline coordinate value

is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027002' Invalid Units Value in an XOH SMS

Command

Explanation: The units value in an XOH SMS

command is invalid or unsupported.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027202' Invalid SMS X-Extent

Explanation: On the Set Media Size command,

the X-extent is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027302' Invalid SMS Y-Extent

Explanation: On the Set Media Size command, the

Y-extent is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'027402' Invalid SMS Unit Base

Explanation: On the Set Media Size command,

the unit-base is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028101' Insufficient Storage for Overlay or

Page Segment

Explanation: There is insufficient storage to

process an overlay or page segment.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028501' Invalid DO Parameter Value

Explanation: The Overlay Identifier on the

Deactivate Overlay command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'028A01' Invalid DPS Parameter Value

Explanation: The Page Segment Identifier on the

Deactivate Page Segment command is not a valid

or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029001' Overlay Number Outside Valid

Range

Explanation:

1. The Overlay Identifier on the Begin Overlay

command is not a valid or supported value.

2. The Overlay Identifier on the Include Overlay

command is not a valid or supported value.

3. The Overlay Identifier on a Load Copy

Control command is not a valid or supported

value. Alternate Exception Action: None.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes227260071‐001A

X'029101' BO Overlay Number Already Loaded

Explanation: The host attempted to download an

overlay from the Begin Overlay command that

already exists in the printer.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029102' Invalid Request Resource List

Parameter

Explanation:

1. The Requested Ordering parameter of a

Request Resource List order is not a valid or

supported value.

2. The Entry Index parameter of a Request

Resource List order is not a valid or supported

value.

3. The Resource Qualifier parameter of a

Request Resource List order is not a valid or

supported value.

4. The Resource Type parameter on the

Request Resource List order is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029201' Overlay Number Not Loaded

Explanation: The overlay identified by the Overlay

Identifier on the Include Overlay, Deactivate Overlay

or LCC command was not loaded or was already

deleted prior to its attempted use.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029202' Invalid Print Quality Control

Parameter:

Explanation: The Print Quality Control

parameter is X'00', which is a reserved value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029301' Recursive Overlay Invocation:

Explanation: An infinite nesting loop has occurred

with the Include Overlay command (for example, an

overlay has included itself).

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029401' Recursive Overlay Invocation:

Explanation:

1. The Page Segment Identifier on the Include

Page Segment command is not a valid or

supported value.

2. The Page Segment Identifier on the Begin

Page Segment command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029501' Page Segment Number Already

Loaded

Explanation: The host attempted to download a

page segment that already exists in the printer.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029601' Page Segment Number Not

Loaded

Explanation: The page segment identified by

the Page Segment Identifier on the Include

Page Segment or Deactivate Page Segment

command was not loaded or was already

deleted prior to its attempted use.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029701' Overlay Nesting Limit Exceeded

Explanation: Depth of overlay nesting is greater

than the maximum depth.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'029801' Suppression Number Outside

Valid Range

Explanation:

1. On a Write Text command, the Begin

Suppression number value is not a valid or

supported value.

2. In a LCC command, the suppression number

value is not a valid or supported value.

Alternate Exception Action:

1. Ignore the control sequence.

2. None.



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes228260071‐001A

X'029803' Temporary Baseline Move Error

Explanation:

1. The temporary baseline increment is not a valid

or supported value.

2. The temporary baseline move direction is not a

valid or supported value.

3. The temporary baseline move precision is not a

valid or supported value.

4. Unsupported multiple offset temporary baseline

move.

5. Unable to support temporary baseline move by

printing full size characters.

Alternate Exception Action:

1. None for reasons 1 through 4.

2. For reason 5, present according to the

substitution method.

X'02A401' Logical-page boundary in the

X-direction cannot be represented

Explanation: In either the page or page

overlay, the sum of the logical page origin and

the logical page size in the X direction exceeds

the maximum supported.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02A501' Logical-page boundary in the

Y-direction cannot be represented

Explanation: In either the page or page overlay, the

sum of the logical page origin and the logical page

size in the Y direction exceeds the maximum

supported.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AC01' Insufficient Storage to Print the

Sheet

Explanation: Page is too large for main

storage.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AD01' Invalid Logical Page Position

Parameter

Explanation: The X Coordinate value on the

Logical Page Position command is not a valid or

supported value. The Y Coordinate value on the

Logical Page Position command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02AE01' Invalid Include Overlay Position

Parameter

Explanation:

1. The X-Coordinate value on the Include

Overlay command is not a valid or supported

value.

2. The Y-Coordinate value on the Include

Overlay command is not a valid or supported

value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C101' Maximum Number of Simplex

Keywords in an LCC Command

Explanation: More than one simplex operation

keyword has been specified in an LCC command

copy group.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C102' Load Equivalence Internal Value

Not Unique

Explanation: The first two bytes of two or more

list entries on the Load Equivalence command

are not unique. Setting both external values to

the same value will not prevent the error.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C602' Invalid Load Equivalence Mapping

Type

Explanation: The Mapping Type on the Load

Equivalence command is not X'0100'.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C801' An unsupported Input Media

Source ID was Specified

Explanation: An unsupported Input Media

Source ID was specified in an XOH-SIMS

command.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

X'02C802' Invalid Internal/External Value on LE

Explanation: The Internal or External value on a

Load Equivalence command is not a valid or

supported value.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes229260071‐001A

Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'

X'010100' Media Size or Input Media Source ID

Changed

Explanation:

1. The size of the media in one or more of the

installed input media sources was changed.

2. The input media source ID of one or more of the

installed input media sources was changed.

Alternate Exception Action: None.

Note: Not reported in 4224 Emulation Mode.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter6IPDSExceptionReportingCodes230260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample231260071‐001A

Chapter 7. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example

The following pages contain examples of the printing capabilities of the S828 Printer and one IPDS coding

example.

Text Print Samples

Various print styles are available with this Printronix printer. The data stream sent by the host computer

determines the print style, characters per inch, and character set.

There are four print qualities available:

This is Fast Draft Mode

This is DP mode, printed in the Gothic font,

This is DP Text mode, printed in the Courier font.

This is NLQ mode, printed in the Courier font.

Pitches include:

10 characters per inch,

12 characters per inch,

15 characters per inch

16.7 characters per inch in DP quality

Printer can also be Underscored to emphasize important points.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample232260071‐001A

Bar Codes

The following are sample bar code labels printed with the S828 Printer:

Figure 30. Bar Code Example in IPDS

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample233260071‐001A

Graphics Patterns

The following example shows the area fill patterns, line widths, line types, and marker symbols available

with this printer.

Figure 31. Graphic Patterns Example in IPDS

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample234260071‐001A

Graphics Example

The following drawing is an example of the graphics capabilities of the S828 Printer. The actual IPDS

graphics data stream commands necessary to draw this graphic follow the example.

Figure 32. Graphic Example in IPDS

Data Stream for Graphics Example

********* BEGIN PAGE

0009D6AF0000000000

********* Write Graphics Control

003CD68400000BAC6B000000000000A0

0010A66B0038403DE030001000000000

001CA6BB00003840384000000000DB0010001000F000

000000000000

********* Write Graphics Command Header

037FD68500

********* Begin Segment

700C000000000000036C00000000

********* Set Character Cell Size

3304010E021C

********* Character String

C31DF32B0E10

********* String Data - EXPENITURE BY DEPARTMENT

C5E7D7C5D5C4C9E3E4D9C540C2E840C4C5D7C1D9E3D4C5D5E3

********* Character String

C313F8710BF4

********* String Data - FIRST HALF 1979

C6C9D9E2E340C8C1D3C640F1F9F7F9

********* Key Circles, Set Line Type979

1800

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2806

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample235260071‐001A

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Full Arc

C706ED680A8CF000

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2803

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Full Arc

C706F6DC0A8CF000

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

280D

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Full Arc

C706FFB00A8CF000

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

280D

********* Set Line Type

1800

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Fillet

C528EDB80654F1F00492F6280924

FA6000654FE98008702D00438070800FA

OB4002760CA8FF1F0F78010E

********* Set Line Type

1803

********* Line At Current Position

810C0F78FB14EDBBFB14EDB80654

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A08

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2800

********* Set Line Type

1800

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Fillet

C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628

0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0

00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8

FD8A0F78FCD6

********* Set Line Type

1808

********* Line At Current Position

810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2803

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample236260071‐001A

Set Line Type

1800

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Fillet

C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628

0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0

00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8FD8A0F78FCD6

********* Set Line Type

1808

********* Line

810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A08

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2800

********* Set Line Type

1800

********* Begin Area

6840

********* Fillet

C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628

FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D

FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6

0CA8FC220F78FBC8

********* Set Line Type

1808

********* Line At Current Position

810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2

********* End Area

6000

********* Color

0A00

********* Set Pattern Symbol

2806

********* Set Line Type

1800

********* Begine Area

6840

********* Fillet

C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628

FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D0FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6

0CA8FC220F78FBC8

********* Set Line Type

1808

********* Line At Current Position

810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2

********* End Area

6000

********* Axes and Tic Marks, Set Line Type

1800

********* Set Line Width

1902

********* Color

0A00

********* Line

C108EDB8FB14EDB80951

********* Line

C108EDB8FB140F78FB14

********* Line

C108EDB8FB14ED04FB14

********* Line

C108EDB8FCD6ED04FCD6

********* Line

C108EDB8FE98ED04FE98

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample237260071‐001A

********* Line

C108EDB8005AED04005A

********* Line

C108EDB8021CED04021C

********* Line

C108EDB803DEED0403DE

********* Line

C108EDB805A0ED0405A0

********* Line

C108EDB80762ED040762

********* Line

C108EDB80924ED040924

********* Line

C108EDB8FBF5ED5EFBF5

********* Line

C108EDB8FDB7ED5EFDB7

********* Line

C108EDB8FF79ED5EFF79

********* Line

C108EDB8013BED5E013B

********* Line

C108EDB802FDED5E02FD

********* Line

C108EDB804BFED5E04BF

********* Line

C108EDB80681ED5E0681

********* Line

C108EDB80843ED5E0843

********* Line

C108F358FB14F358FA8D

********* Line

C108FA60FB14FA60FA8D

********* Line

C1080168FB140168FA8D

********* Line

C1080870FB140870FA8D

********* Line

C1080F78FB140F78FA8D

********* Letters and Numbers, Set Character Cell

330400000000

********* Character String, DEPT. A

C30BEEC60A32

C4C5D7E34B40C1

********* Character String, DEPT. B

C30BF7EA0A32

C4C5D7E34B40C2

********* Character String, DEPT. C

C30B00E10A32

C4C5D7E34B40C3

********* Character String, 5

C305F2FEF9AC

********* Character String, 10

C306F9ACF9AC

F1F0

********* Character String, 15

C30600BAF9AC

F1F5

********* Character String, 20

C30607BCF9AC

F2F0

********* Character String, 25

C3060EC4F9AC

F2F5

********* Character String, WEEKS

C309FD30F844

E6C5C5D2E2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample238260071‐001A

********* Character String, 80

C306EB4208ca

F8F0

********* Character String, 70

C306EB420708

F7F0

********* Character String, 60

C306EB420546

F6F0

********* Character String, 50

C306EB420384

F5F0

********* Character String, 40

C306EB4201C2

F4F0

********* Character String, 30

C306EB420000

F3F

********* Character String, 20

C306EB42FE3E

F2F0

********* Character String, 10

C306EB42FC7C

F1F0

********* Character String, 0

C305EBF6FABA

********* Character Angle

3404000005A0

********* Character String, 1000

C308EAE800B4

F1F0F0F0

********* END

0005D65D00

********* END PAGE

0005D6BF00

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample239260071‐001A

IPDS Coding Example

The S828 Printer produced this example of text, bar codes, and block graphic characters printing on the

front continuous forms paper source. The code used to print the example appears in Table 11.

Figure 33. Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program

The following chart is an example of an IPDS application program that prints the block graphic characters,

two bar codes, and text information shown in Table 9, printing on the front continuous forms paper source.

The first column (IPDS Commands) contains abbreviations of the IPDS instructions that are coded in

column 2. Column 2 (Hexadecimal Code) contains the hexadecimal code that produces the characters, bar

codes, and text pictured in Table 9. Column 3 (Code Explanation) explains each command element.

When the application is actually coded, the hexadecimal code of each command may be entered in one

stream. The IPDS command abbreviations in the first column and the explanation of each part of the

command in the last column, are comments.

Table 11. IPDS Coding Example

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

******** Printer Initialization

SHS 0005 Control Length

— D697 Set Home State

— 00 Flag Byte

X0A(EHC) 000A Control Length

— D633 Execute Order Any State

— 00 Flag Byte

— F600 Exception Handling Order

— C1 Report All Exceptions

— 01 Do Not Take Alternate Action

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample240260071‐001A

Table 11. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

— 01 Print All Data and Exit

XOA(DBD) 0007 Control Length

— D633 Execute Order Any Style

— 00 Flag Byte

— F200 Discard Buffer Data

LPD 0030 Control Length

— D6CF Load Page Descriptor

— 00 Flag Byte

— 00 Units Base Value equals (10 in.)

— 00 Reserved

— 3840 X Units per Base Value

— 3840 Y Units per Base Value

— 00 Reserved

— 00 3570 Width of Page (Units)

— 00 Reserved

— 00 1EF0 Length of Page (Units)

— 00 Reserved

— 00 No Ordered Page

— 0000 Reserved

— 00000000 Reserved

— 0000 Reserved

— 0000 X-Axis Orientation (0 degrees)

— 2D00 Y-Axis Orientation (90 degrees)

— 0000 Initial X Displacement

— 0000 Initial Y Displacement

— 0000 Initial Left Margin

— 0000 Intercharacter Increment

— 0000 Reserved

— FFFF Baseline Increment (Use Default)

— FF Local Font ID (Use Default)

— FFFF Text Color (Use Default)

LPP 000F Control Length

— D66D Load Page Position

— 00 Flag Byte

— 00 Reserved

— 000000 X Displacement

— 00 Reserved

— 000000 Y Displacement

— 0000 Reserved

XOH(SMS) 000E Control Length

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample241260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

— D68F Execute Order Home State

— 00 Flag Byte

— 1700 Set Media Size (SMS)

— 00 Units Base Value equals (10 in.)

— 3840 Units per Base Value

— 3570 X-Extent of Physical Medium

— 1EF0 Y-Extent of Physical Medium

LFE 0015 Control Length

— D63F Load Font Equivalence

— 00 Flag Byte

— 07 Local ID

— 0007 Loaded Font ID

— 0000 Character Rotation (0 degrees)

— 0000 Reserved

— 0025 Code Page ID (USA)

— 000B Font Style ID (10 CPI, Courier)

— 0000 Reserved

— 00 Reserved

— 80 Font Attribute (In printer)

— 00 Reserved

XOA(PQC) 0008 Control Length

— D633 Execute Order Any State

— 00 Flag Byte

— F800 Print Quality Control

— AB Select NLQ

XOH(SIMS) 0008 Control Length

— D68F Execute Order Home State

— 00 Flag Byte

— 1500 Select Input Media Source

— 00 Front Paper Source

******** Begin Page

BP 0009 Control Length

— D6AF Begin Page

— 00 Flag Byte

— 00000000 Data ** Ignored

******** Write Text Data

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample242260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

WT 0014 Control Length

— 262D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 03F107 Set Coded Font Local

— 04C709D8 Absolute Move Inline

— 04D20F78 Absolute Move Baseline

— F2F8 Data '28'

WT 0011 Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C61194 Absolute Move Inline

— F1F2F3F4F5F6F Data '123456'

WT 000D Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C62058 Absolute Move Inline

— F9F9 Data '99'

WT 0013 Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C709D8 Absolute Move Inline

— 04D21248 Absolute Move Baseline

— F6F5F2F3 Data '6523'

WT 000E Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C613B0 Absolute Move Inline

— F8F0F0 Data '800'

WT 0011 Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C62058 Absolute Move Inline

— F1F4FFC5C5C5 Data '14 EEE'

WT 0014 Control Length

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample243260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C70E10 Absolute Move Inline

— 04D21518 Absolute Move Baseline

— F7F3F2F4F5 Data '73245'

WT 000E Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C61AB8 Absolute Move Inline

— F0F9F9 Data '099'

WT 0013 Control Length

— D62D Write Text

— 00 Flag Byte

— 2BD3 Escape Sequence

— 04C628C8 Absolute Move Inline

— F1F262F1F661F8F6 Data '12/16/86'

******** Write Graphics Control

WGC 002C Control Length

— D684 Write Graphics Control

— 00 Flag Byte

(GAP) 000B Field Length

— AC6B Graphics Area Position Control

— 0000 Inline (X) Coordinate Position

— 0000 Baseline (Y) Coordinate Position

— 0000 Orientation (0 degrees)

— A0 Absolute X, Absolute Y

(GDD) 001C Field Length

— A6BB Graphics Data Descriptor

— 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

— 00 Reserved

— 3840 X Units/Unit Base

— 3840 Y Units/Unit Base

— 00000000 Reserved

— 0000 X Left Limit of Window

— 3570 X Right Limit of Window

— 1EF0 Y Top Limit of Window

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample244260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

— 0000 Y Bottom Limit of Window

— 00000000 Reserved

— 0000 Graphics Flags ** Ignored

******** Write Graphics

WG 003D Control Length

— D685 Write Graphics

— 00 Flag Byte

(BSI) 70 Begin Segment Introducer

— 0C Length of Following Parameter

— 00000000 Reserved

— 00 Flags

— 06 Append Segment

— 002A Length of Segment

— 00000000 Reserved

(SCCS) 33 Set Character Cell Size

— 04 Length of Data

— 021C Width of Cell

— 02D0 Height of Cell

(SCS) 38 Set Character String

— 07 Local Character Set ID

(CS) 05 Character String

— C3 Field String

— 0BF4 X Coordinate (Units)

— 1734 Y Coordinate (Units)

— D4 Data 'M'

(CS) C3 Character String

— 10 Field Length

— 1680 X Coordinate (Units)

— 1734 Y Coordinate (Units)

— F6F3CAF3F0F3CA Data '63-303-498-8'

— F4F9F8CAF8

(CS) C3 Character String

— 07 Field Length

— 21C0 X Coordinate (Units)

— 1248 Y Coordinate (Units)

— C5F4F8 Data 'E48'

END 0005 Control Length

— D65D End (Graphics)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample245260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

— 00 Flag Byte

******** Write Bar Code Control

WBCC 002B Control Length

— D680 Write Bar Code Control (BC)

— 00 Flag Byte

(BCAP) 000B Field Length

— AC6B BC Area Position Control

— 0000 X Coordinate of BC Area

— 0000 Y Coordinate of BC Area

— 0000 Orientation of Bar Code (0 Degrees)

— A0 Absolute X, Absolute Y

(BCDD) 001B Field Length

— A6EB Bar Code Data Descriptor

— 00 Unit Base (10 in.)

— 00 Reserved

— 3840 X Units/Unit Base

— 3840 Y Units/Unit Base

— 3840 X Extent of Block (Width)

— 2FD0 Y Extent of Block (Height)

— 0000 Reserved

— 0C Bar Code Type (2 of 5 Interleaved)

— 01 No Check Digit

— FF User Printer Default LFID

— 0000 Select Color (Black)

— 0E Unit Module Width (.014 in.)

— 02D0 Element Height (720 Units)

— 01 Height Multiplier

— 0019 Wide/Narrow Ratio

******** Write Bar Codes

WBC 0013 Control Length

— D681 Write Bar Code

— 00 Flag Byte

— 20 Bar Code Flag

— 2544 X Coordinate

— 0168 Y Coordinate

— F2F8F6F5F1F3F8F1F0 Data '286523810'

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Chapter7.PrintSamplesandIPDSCodingExample246260071‐001A

Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)

IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code Code Explanation

WBC 00E Control Length

— D681 Write Bar Code

— 00 Flag Byte

— 20 Bar Code Flag

— 28C8 X Coordinate

— 0D5C Y Coordinate

— F7F3F2F4 Data '7324'

END 0005 Control Length

— D65D End (Bar Code)

— 00 Flag Byte

******** End of Page

EP 0005 Control Length

— D6BF End Page

— 00 Flag Byte





ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages247260071‐001A

Appendix A. Code Pages

The EBCDIC code charts contains information about the code pages that the Printronix S828 Model

Printers use on the Ethernet IPDS attachments.

See the “ASCII Code Pages” for information about the code pages for Ethernet ASCII attachments.

You can use the following charts to determine the actual character printed for any code page and font

combination.

EBCDIC Code Pages (IPDS)

The table below lists the EBCDIC code pages used by the S828 Printer, and also provides page

references so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.

Code

Page Character Set Name

37 USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual

260 Canadian French

273 Austrian/German

274 Belgian Old

275 Brazilian

277 Danish/Norwegian

278 Finnish/Swedish

280 Italian

281 Japanese English

282 Portuguese

284 Spanish/Spanish Speaking

285 English (UK)/Ireland

290 Japanese Katakana

297 French/French Azerty

420 Arabic

423 Greek (Old)

424 Hebrew Bulletin

500 International 5/Swiss/Belgian

813 Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro

833 Korean

838 Thai

870 Latin 2/ROECE

871 Icelandic

875 Greek New + euro

880 Cyrillic

890 Yugoslav (Old)

892 OCR-A

893 OCR-B

924 Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro

1025 Cyrillic Multilingual

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages248260071‐001A

Code

Page Character Set Name

1026 Latin-5 Turkey

1097 Farsi

1112 Baltic Multilingual

1122 Estonian

1140 USA/Canada + euro

1141 Austrian/German + euro

1142 Danish/Norwegian + euro

1143 Finnish/Swedish + euro

1144 Italian + euro

1145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro

1146 English/UK + euro

1147 French + euro

1148 International 5/Belgian New + euro

1149 Icelandic + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages249260071‐001A

USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual

Code Page 00037

Figure 34. CP00037 USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages250260071‐001A

Canadian French

Code Page 00260

Figure 35. CP00260 Canadian French

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages251260071‐001A

Austrian/German

Code Pages 273

Figure 36. CP00273 Austrian/German

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages252260071‐001A

Belgian Old

Code Pages 274

Figure 37. CP00274 Belgian Old

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages253260071‐001A

Brazilian

Code Pages 275

Figure 38. CP00275 Brazilian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages254260071‐001A

Danish/Norwegian

Code Page 00277

Figure 39. CP00277 Danish/Norwegian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages255260071‐001A

Finnish/Swedish

Code Pages 278

Figure 40. CP00278 Finnish/Swedish

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages256260071‐001A

Italian

Code Page 00280

Figure 41. CP00280 Italian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages257260071‐001A

Japanese English

Code Pages 00281

Figure 42. CP00281 Japanese English

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages258260071‐001A

Portuguese

Code Page 00282

Figure 43. CP00282 Portuguese

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages259260071‐001A

Spanish/Spanish Speaking

Code Pages 00284

Figure 44. CP00284 Spanish/Spanish Speaking

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages260260071‐001A

English (UK)/Ireland

Code Page 00285

Figure 45. CP00285 English (UK)/Ireland

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages261260071‐001A

Japanese Katakana

Code Page 00290

Figure 46. CP00290 Japanese Katakana

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages262260071‐001A

French/French Azerty

Code Page 00297

Figure 47. CP00297 French/French Azerty

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages263260071‐001A

Arabic

Code Page 00420

Figure 48. CP00420 Arabic

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages264260071‐001A

Greek (Old)

Code Page 00423

Figure 49. CP00423 Greek (Old)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages265260071‐001A

Hebrew Bulletin

Code 00424

Figure 50. CP00424 Hebrew Bulletin

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages266260071‐001A

International 5/Swiss/Belgian

Code Page 00500

Figure 51. CP00500 International 5/Swiss/Belgian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages267260071‐001A

Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro

Code Page 00813

Figure 52. CP00813 Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages268260071‐001A

Korean

Code Page 00833

Figure 53. CP00833 Korean

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages269260071‐001A

Thai

Code Page 00838

Figure 54. CP00838 Thai

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages270260071‐001A

Latin 2/ROECE

Code Page 00870

Figure 55. CP00870 Latin 2/ROECE

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages271260071‐001A

Icelandic

Code Page 00871

Figure 56. CP00871 Icelandic

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages272260071‐001A

Greek New + euro

Code Page 00875

Figure 57. CP00875 Greek New + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages273260071‐001A

Cyrillic

Code Page 00880

Figure 58. CP00880 Cyrillic

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages274260071‐001A

Yugoslav (Old)

Code Page 00890

Figure 59. CP00890 Yugoslav (Old)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages275260071‐001A

OCR-A

Code Page 00892

Figure 60. CP00892 OCR-A

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages276260071‐001A

OCR-B

Code Page 00893

Figure 61. CP00893 OCR-B

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages277260071‐001A

Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro

Code Page 00924

Figure 62. CP00924 Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages278260071‐001A

Cyrillic Multilingual

Code Page 01025

Figure 63. CP01025 Cyrillic Multilingual

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages279260071‐001A

Latin-5 Turkey

Code Page 01026

Figure 64. CP01026 Latin-5 Turkey

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages280260071‐001A

Farsi

Code Page 01097

Figure 65. CP01097 Farsi

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages281260071‐001A

Baltic Multilingual

Code Page 01112

Figure 66. CP01112 Baltic Multilingual

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages282260071‐001A

Estonian

Code Page 01122

Figure 67. CP01122 Estonian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages283260071‐001A

USA/Canada + euro

Code Page 01140

Figure 68. CP01140 USA/Canada + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages284260071‐001A

Austrian/German + euro

Code Page 01141

Figure 69. CP01141 Austrian/German + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages285260071‐001A

Danish/Norwegian + euro

Code Page 01142

Figure 70. CP01142 Danish/Norwegian + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages286260071‐001A

Finnish/Swedish + euro

Code Page 001143

Figure 71. CP01143 Finnish/Swedish + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages287260071‐001A

Italian + euro

Code Page 00144

Figure 72. CP01144 Italian + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages288260071‐001A

Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro

Code Page 01145

Figure 73. CP01145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages289260071‐001A

English/UK + euro

Code Page 01146

Figure 74. CP01146 English/UK + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages290260071‐001A

French + euro

Code Page 01147

Figure 75. CP01147 French + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages291260071‐001A

International 5/Belgian New + euro

Code Page 01148

Figure 76. CP01148 International 5/Belgian New + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages292260071‐001A

Icelandic + euro

Code Page 01149

Figure 77. CP01149 Icelandic + euro

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages293260071‐001A

ASCII Code Pages

The table below lists the ASCII code pages used by the S828 Printer, and also provides page references

so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.

These Code Pages can be found in the EPSON/IBM/ANSI emulations.

Code

Page Character Set Name

437 USA (Personal Computer) A-54

437-G Greek

437-SL Croatian

850 PC Multilingual

851 Old Greek

852 Latin 2/ROECE

853 Latin 3 (PC)

855 Cyrillic (PC)

857 Latin 5-Turkey + euro

858 PC Multilingual + euro

860 Portuguese

862 Hebrew

863 Canadian French

864E Arabic

865 Danish/Norwegian

866 PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian

867 Turkish 2

876 OCR-A

877 OCR-B

1098 Farsi (Personal Computer)

1250 Central Europe Latin 2

1251 Cyrillic

1252 Latin 1 Ansi Windows

1253 Greek Windows

1254 Turkish Windows

1255 Hebrew Windows

1256 Arabic Windows

1257 Baltic Windows

MAZOWIA Polish

GOST Russian

TASS Cyrillic

UKRANIAN old version

KOI8-U new version

FARSI 1

FARSI 2

Kamenicky

CWI

Roman-8

IN2

Turkish

Bulgarian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages294260071‐001A

Code

Page Character Set Name Page

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

ISO 8859/3 Latin 3

ISO 8859/4 Latin 4

ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic 281

ISO 8859-6 Latin/Arabic 300

ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek 301

ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew 302

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 305

ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 308

96 GREEK

Extended Graphics Character Table 318

Italic Character Table 319

Epson Extended Character Variables 320

ANSI National VAriations

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages295260071‐001A

USA (Personal Computer) A-54

Code Page 00437

Figure 78. USA(CP437)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages296260071‐001A

Greek

Code Page 00437-G

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0

00 Ø  0 @ P ’ p

   ░ └ ╨  o

01   ! 1 A Q a q

   ▒ ┴ ╤  ±

02   “ 2 B R b r   - ▓ ┬ ╥  ≥

03  !! # 3 C S c s    │ ├ ╙  ≤

04  ¶ $ 4 D T d t    ┤ ─ ╘  ⌠

05  § % 5 E U e u    ╡ ┼ ╒  ⌡

06  – & 6 F V f v    ╢ ╞ ╓  ÷

07   ‘ 7 G W g w    ╖ ╟ ╫  ≈

08   ( 8 H X h x    ╕ ╚ ╪  °

09 °  ) 9 I Y i y

   ╣ ╔ ┘  £

0A ■  * : J Z j z

   ║ ╩ ┌  ¥

0B  + ; K [ k {    ╗ ╦ █  √

0C └ , < L \ l |

   ╝ ╠ ▄  ⁿ

0D  - = M ] m }    ╜ ═ ▌  ²

0E  . > N ^ n ~    ╛ ╬ ▐  ■

0F   / ? O _ o    ┐ ╧ ▀ 

Figure 79.Greek(CP437-G)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages297260071‐001A

Croatian

Code Page 00437-SL

Figure 80.Croatian(CP437-SLAVIC)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages298260071‐001A

Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)

Code Page 00813

Figure 81. Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages299260071‐001A

Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)

Code Page 00819

Figure 82 .ISO8859/1(Latin1)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages300260071‐001A

PC Multilingual

Code Page 00850

Figure 83.Multilingual(CP850)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages301260071‐001A

Old Greek

Code Page 00851

Figure 84.Old Greek(CP851)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages302260071‐001A

Latin 2/ROECE

Code Page 00852

Figure 85.EasternEurope(CP852)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages303260071‐001A

Latin 3 (PC)

Code Page 00853

Figure 86.Turkish(CP853)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages304260071‐001A

Cyrillic (PC)

Code Page 00855

Figure 87.Cyrillic(CP855)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages305260071‐001A

Latin 5-Turkey + euro

Code Page 00857

Figure 88.Turkish(CP857)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages306260071‐001A

PC Multilingual + euro

Code Page 00858

Figure 89.EuroPCMultilingual(CP858).

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages307260071‐001A

Portuguese

Code Page 00860

Figure 90.Portugal(CP860)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages308260071‐001A

Hebrew

Code Page 00862

Figure 91.Hebrew(CP862)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages309260071‐001A

Canadian French

Code Page 00863

Figure 92.Canada/France(CP863)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages310260071‐001A

Arabic

Code Page 00864

Figure 93.Arabic(CP864)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages311260071‐001A

Arabic

Code Page 00864E

Figure 94.CP864E(Arabic)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages312260071‐001A

Danish/Norwegian

Code Page 00865

Figure 95.Denmark/Norway(CP865)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages313260071‐001A

PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian

Code Page 00866

Figure 96. Russian(CP866)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages314260071‐001A

Turkish 2

Code Page 00867

Figure 97.Turkish2(CP867)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages315260071‐001A

OCR-A

Code Page 00876

Figure 98.OCR-A(CP876)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages316260071‐001A

OCR-B

Code Page 00877

Figure 99.OCR-B(CP877)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages317260071‐001A

Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)

Code Page 00912

Figure 100.ISO8859/2(Latin2)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages318260071‐001A

Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)

Code Page 00913

Figure 101.ISO8859/3(Latin3)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages319260071‐001A

Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)

Code Page 00914

Figure 102.ISO8859/4(Latin4)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages320260071‐001A

Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)

Code Page 00915

Figure 103.ISO8859/5(Latin/Cyrillic)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages321260071‐001A

Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)

Code Page 00916

Figure 104.ISO8859/8

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages322260071‐001A

Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)

Code Page 00920

Figure 105.ISO8859/9(Latin5)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages323260071‐001A

Baltic Multilingual

Code Page 00921

Figure 106.BalticWindows(CP921)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages324260071‐001A

Estonian

Code Page 00922

Figure 107.Estonian (CP922)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages325260071‐001A

Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15) + euro

Code Page 00923

Figure 108.ISO8859/15(Latin9) .151

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages326260071‐001A

Urdu

Code Page 01006

Figure 109.Urdu (CP01006)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages327260071‐001A

Arabic Extended

Code Page 01046

Figure 110.Arabic Extended (CP1046)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages328260071‐001A

Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)

Code Page 01089

Figure 111.ISO8859/6(Latin/Arabic)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages329260071‐001A

Farsi (Personal Computer)

Code Page 01098

Figure 112.Farsi(CP1098)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages330260071‐001A

Estonian (Personal Computer)

Code Page 01116

Figure 113.Estonian (CP1116)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages331260071‐001A

Latvian (Personal Computer)

Code Page 01117

Figure 114.Latvian (Personal Computer) (CP1117)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages332260071‐001A

Lithuanian (Personal Computer)

Code Page 01118

Figure 115.Lthuanian (Personal Computer) (CP1118)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages333260071‐001A

Central Europe Latin 2

Code Page 01250

Figure 116.CentralEurope(CP1250)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages334260071‐001A

Cyrillic Windows + euro

Code Page 01251

Figure 117.Cyrillic(CP1251)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages335260071‐001A

Latin1 Ansi Windows

Code Page 01252

Figure 118.Latin1AnsiWindows(CP1252)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages336260071‐001A

Greek Windows

Code Page 01253



Figure 119.GreekWindows(CP1253)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages337260071‐001A

Turkish Windows

Code Page 01254



Figure 120.TurkishWindows(CP1254)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages338260071‐001A

Hebrew Windows

Code Page 01255



Figure 121. HebrewWindows(CP1255)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages339260071‐001A

Arabic Windows

Code Page 01256



Figure 122.ArabicWindows(CP1256)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages340260071‐001A

Baltic Windows

Code Page 01257



Figure 123.Batlic Windows (CP1257)

Programm

AppendixA

MAZO

Figure 124.

rManual

.CodePage

IA (Poli

MAZOWIA(



olish)

341

PTX‐S82

60071‐001



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages342260071‐001A

GOST (Russian)

Figure 125.GOST(Russian)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages343260071‐001A

TASS (Cyrillic)

Figure 126.TASS(Cyrillic)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages344260071‐001A

UKRANIAN (old version)



Figure 127.UKRANIAN(oldversion)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages345260071‐001A

KOI8-U (new version)

Figure 128.KOI8-U(newversion)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages346260071‐001A

FARSI 1

Figure 129. Farsi 1

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages347260071‐001A

FARSI 2

Figure 130. Farsi 2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages348260071‐001A

Kamenicky

Figure 131.Kamenicky

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages349260071‐001A

CWI

Figure 132.CWI

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages350260071‐001A

Roman-8

Figure 133.Roman-8

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages351260071‐001A

IN2

Figure 134.IN2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages352260071‐001A

Turkish

Figure 135.Turkish

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages353260071‐001A

Bulgarian

Figure 136. Bulgarian

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages354260071‐001A

96 GREEK

Figure 137.96GREEK

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages355260071‐001A

Character Sets

Character Set 1

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0

00 NUL

SP 0 @ P ’ p NUL

░ └ ╨ α ≡

01 DC1 ! 1 A Q a q DC1

í ▒ ┴ ╤ ß ±

02 DC2 “ 2 B R b r DC2

ó ▓ ┬ ╥ Γ ≥

03 DC3 # 3 C S c s DC3

ú │ ├ ╙ π ≤

04 DC4 $ 4 D T d t DC4

ñ ┤ ─ ╘ Σ ⌠

05 % 5 E U e u Ñ

╡ ┼ ╒ σ ⌡

06 & 6 F V f v ª

╢ ╞ ╓ µ ÷

07 BEL

‘ 7 G W g w BEL

º ╖ ╟ ╫ τ ≈

08 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x BS CAN

¿ ╕ ╚ ╪ Φ °

09 HT ) 9 I Y i y HT ⌐ ╣ ╔ ┘ Θ ·

0A LF * : J Z j z LF ¬ ║ ╩ ┌ Ω ·

0B VT ESC + ; K [ k { VT ESC

½ ╗ ╦ █ δ √

0C FF , < L \ l | FF ¼ ╝ ╠ ▄ ∞ ⁿ

0D CR - = M ] m } CR ¡ ╜ ═ ▌ φ ²

0E SO . > N ^ n ~ SO « ╛ ╬ ▐ ε ■

0F SI / ? O _ o DEL

SI » ┐ ╧ ▀ ∩ SP

Figure 138.CharacterSet1

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages356260071‐001A

Character Set 2

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0

00 NUL

SP 0 @ P ’ p Ç É á ░ └ ╨ α ≡

01 DC1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ▒ ┴ ╤ ß ±

02 ` DC2 “ 2 B R b r é Æ ó ▓ ┬ ╥ Γ ≥

03  DC3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ ├ ╙ π ≤

04  DC4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ ┤ ─ ╘ Σ ⌠

05  § % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ ╡ ┼ ╒ σ ⌡

06  & 6 F V f v å û ª ╢ ╞ ╓ µ ÷

07 BEL

‘ 7 G W g w ç ù

º ╖ ╟ ╫ τ ≈

08 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ ╕ ╚ ╪ Φ °

09 HT ) 9 I Y i y ë ö ⌐ ╣ ╔ ┘ Θ ·

0A LF * : J Z j z è Ü

¬ ║ ╩ ┌ Ω ·

0B VT ESC + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ ╗ ╦ █ δ √

0C FF , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ╝ ╠ ▄ ∞ ⁿ

0D CR - = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ╜ ═ ▌ φ ²

0E SO . > N ^ n ~ Ä ₧ « ╛ ╬ ▐ ε ■

0F SI / ? O _ o DEL

Å ƒ » ┐ ╧ ▀ ∩ SP

Figure 139.CharacterSet2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages357260071‐001A

Hexadecimal to Decimal Table

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0

00 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

01 1 17 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241

02 2 18 34 50 66 82 98 114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242

03 3 19 35 51 67 83 99 115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243

04 4 20 36 52 68 84 100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244

05 5 21 37 53 69 85 101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245

06 6 22 38 54 70 86 102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246

07 7 23 39 55 71 87 103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247

08 8 24 40 56 72 88 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248

09 9 25 41 57 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249

0A 10 26 42 58 74 90 106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250

0B 11 27 43 59 75 91 107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251

0C 12 28 44 60 76 92 108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252

0D 13 29 45 61 77 93 109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253

0E 14 30 46 62 78 94 110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254

0F 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255

Figure 140.Hexadecimal to Decimal Table

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages358260071‐001A

Epson FX-series Code Pages

The following Epson code charts provide information on the character tables available for Epson FX-series

emulation mode.

Extended Graphics Character

Figure 141. Epson Extended Graphics Character

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages359260071‐001A

Italic Character Table

Figure 142. Epson Italic Character

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages360260071‐001A

Epson Extended Character Variables

The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the Epson Extended Character Graphics

set.

The code points shown are the only ones that vary. For example, in the United Kingdom, only code point

X'23' is different from the basic Epson table, shown on previous pages.

Figure 143. Epson Extended Character Variables

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages361260071‐001A

ANSI National Variations

The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the ANSI Extended Character Graphics

set.

Figure 144. ANSI National Variations

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixA.CodePages362260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces363260071‐001A

Appendix B. Interfaces

This section provides technical information for the parallel and serial interfaces.

The Parallel Interface

The parallel interface of this printer fully supports the Centronics protocol plus the specific features

requested by the EPSON and IBM printer connection in monodirectional mode and the Compatibility and

Nibbles modes in bidirectional mode, plus the negotiation phases and the device identifier (as IEEE

P1284).

The parallel interface is available on a specific 36 contact connector type AMPHENOL 57-40360- 12-D56

or equivalent connector for 1284 Type B.

● Drive Capability

Up to 15 feet (5 m) on AWG26 min. wire size of twisted conductors on TTL receiver. The max.

reachable distance is conditioned by the host drive capability and by the noise level along the interface

cable path.

● Printer Connector Type

36 pins, 1284 Type B

● Cable Connector

25 pin, 1284 A Type

Signals Description

According to the IEEE - P1284 Standard, the pins assume different meanings and are identified by

different names depending on the actual handshaking mode as follows:

● Compatibility mode (Centronics)

This is the lower level mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide forward (host-to-peripheral) channel

with data and status lines used according to their original definitions. The interfaces power up in the

compatibility Mode Idle phase.

● Nibble Mode

This mode provides an asynchronous, reverse (peripheral-to-host) channel, under control of the host. In

this mode, peripheral device to host data bytes are sent as two sequential, four-bit nibbles using the

four peripheral-to-host status lines. These two modes cannot be active simultaneously.

● Byte Mode

This mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide reverse (peripheral-to host) channel based on eight

data lines of the interface for data and the control/status lines for handshaking. Byte mode is under host

control and it cannot be simultaneously active with compatibility mode.

Operating Phases

The link protocol is mainly based on the following three phases:

● Negotiation Phase

This phase is activated always by the host, only when in compatibility mode, and defines:

– whether a bidirectional link protocol can be established.

– the handshaking mode as well as the communications mode to be used.

– the device identification, if supported.

● Communication Phase

This phase is based on well defined handshaking rules which depend upon the selected link mode.

● Termination Phase

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces364260071‐001A

This phase is initiated by the host and returns the interface to the compatibility mode.

Parallel Interface Signals

Description of the signals in monodirectional link:

Signal Name Pin N° Source Description

STROBE 1 HOST Clock signal which controls data transmission with its falling edge.

ACK 10 PRINTER Negative pulsed signal indicating that the printer has received data

and is ready to accept the next set of data. Also sent when the

printer is switched from off-line to on-line and at the end of the

initialization time. The BUSY line is always active.

DATA BIT 1 2 PRINTER / Data 8 is the most significant bit. These are the data lines used by

HOST host or printer to transfer control code or ASCII codes.

DATA BIT 2 3

DATA BIT 3 4

DATA BIT 4 5

DATA BIT 5 6

DATA BIT 6 7

DATA BIT 7 8

DATA BIT 8 9

BUSY 11 PRINTER When high, this signal indicates that the printer cannot accept data

or control codes. This signal goes high during data processing, in

test and program modes, during initialization, when the buffer is full,

and when a paper jam, paper end or paper size error occurs, in case

of a power-on reset, the reception of a STROBE signal, while the

PE 12 PRINTER When high, this signal indicates that the automatic input bin is out of

paper and paper cannot be loaded from an other bin.

SELECT 13 PRINTER When high, this signal indicates that the printer is on-line. It is put to

low state in case of initialization or test and program mode. In IBM

Proprinter emulation in low condition this signal signals a off-line

request from the operator panel, paper jam, paper end or paper size

errors.

AUTOFEEDXT 14 HOST Active low level signal. Indicates whether a LF is performed after a

CR or not.

GND 16 – Logical ground level (0V).

CHASSIS GND 17 – Frame ground.

+5 VDC 18 PRINTER Is the DC voltage supplied by a component that limits the driven

capability up to 100 mA.

SIGNAL GND 19-30 – Signal ground.

INIT 31 HOST Active low level signal. Indicates, that the printer is initializing. The

BUSY signal is forced high.

ERROR 32 PRINTER When low, this signal indicates that the printer is offline, there is an

offline request from the operator panel, or the printer is in an error

state because of: paper jam, paper end or paper size error, engine

error, output bin full or cover open condition.

+5V 35 PRINTER Pulled up to signal.

SELECTIN 36 HOST Active low level signal. Enables the printer.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces365260071‐001A

The pins 1 to 14 of the printer are connected to the pins with the same number of the parallel port of the

host.

The pins 19 to 30 of the printer are connected to the pins 18 to 25 of the parallel port of the host.

The pins 31, 32 and 36 of the printer are connected respectively to the pins 16, 15 and 17 of the parallel port

of the host.

1284 Mode signal names are shown with their Compatibility mode (Centronics) names in parenthesis ( ) for

the bidirectional link.

Signal Name Pin N° for Pin N° for

Signal Wire Return Wire Source

HostClk (nStrobe) 1 19 HOST

AD1 (Data 1) 2 20 HOST in Compatibility mode and negotiation

phase.

AD2 (Data 2) 3 21

AD3 (Data 3) 4 22 NOT USED in Nibble mode.

AD4 (Data 4) 5 23

AD5 (Data 5) 6 24 BIDIRECTIONAL in Byte mode.

AD6 (Data 6) 7 25

AD7 (Data 7) 8 26

AD8 (Data 8) 9 27

PrtClk (nAck) 10 28 PRINTER

PrtBusy (Busy) 11 29 PRINTER

AckDataReq (PError) 13 28 PRINTER

Xflag (Select) 14 28 PRINTER

HostBusy (nAutofd) 15 30 HOST

Peripheral Logic High 18 PRINTER

(+5 V)

n.a. (nInit) 31 30 HOST

nDataAvail (NFault) 32 29 PRINTER

1284 Active (NSelectIn) 36 30

Common Logic Ground 16 and Return Wires

Chassis Ground 17

Parallel Interface Signals Behaviour

HostClk /nWrite (nStrobe)

Compatibility Mode: Set Active low to transfer data into printer input latch. Data is valid while nStrobe is

low.

Negotiation Phase: Set active low to transfer extendibility request value into printer input latch. Data is

valid on the falling edge of HostClk.

Reverse Data Transfer Set high during Nibble Mode transfer to avoid latching data into printer. Pulsed

Phase: low during Byte Mode transfers to acknowledge transfer of data from the printer.

The printer shall ensure that this pulse does not transfer a new data into the printer

input latch.

AD1 ... AD8 (Data 1 ... Data 8)

Compatibility Mode: Forward channel data.

Negotiation Phase: Extendibility request value.

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: NOT USED.

Phase: Byte Mode: Reverse channel data.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces366260071‐001A

PrtClk (nAck)

Compatibility Mode: Pulsed low by the printer to acknowledge the transfer of a data from the host.

Negotiation Phase: Set low to acknowledge 1284 support, then set high to indicate that the Xflag

(Select) and data available flags may be read.

Reverse Data Transfer Used in both Nibble and Byte Modes to qualify data being sent to the host.

Phase:

PrtBusy (Busy)

Compatibility Mode: Driven high to indicate that the printer is not ready to receive data.

Negotiation Phase: Reflects the present state of the printer’s forward channel.

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits 3 then 7, then forward channel busy status

Phase: Byte Mode: Forward channel busy status.

Reverse Idle phase: Forward channel busy status.

AckDataReq (PError)

Compatibility Mode: Driven high to indicate that the printer has encountered an error in the paper path.

The printer shall set nFault low whenever it sets PError high.

Negotiation Phase: Set high to indicate 1284 support, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits then 6.

Phase: Byte Mode: same as nDataAvail (nFault)

Reverse Idle phase: Set high until host requests data transfer, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).

Xflag (Select)

Compatibility Mode: Set high to indicate that the printer in on-line.

Negotiation Phase: The Xflag refers to extendibility flag. Used by the printer to reply to the requested

extendibility byte sent by the host during the negotiation phase. The signal level is

low for Nibble Mode, high for Byte Mode.

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Data bits 1 then 5.

Phase: Byte Mode: Same as negotiation phase.

Reverse Idle phase: Same as negotiation phase.

Xflag (Select)

Compatibility Mode: Set low by host to put the printer into auto-line feed mode.

Negotiation Phase: Set low in conjunction with 1284 Active (NSelectIn) being set high to request a

1284 mode.

Then set high after printer sets PtrClk (nAck) low.

Xflag (Select)

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Set low to indicate that host can receive printer-to-host data then set

Phase: high to acknowledge receipts of that nibble.

Byte Mode: Same as Nibble Mode to request and acknowledge bytes. Following a

reverse channel transfer the interface transitions to idle phase when

HostBusy (nAutoFd) is set low and printer‘s no data available.

Reverse Idle phase: Set high in response to PtrClk (nAck) low pulse to re-enter reverse data transfer

phase.

Is set high with 1284 Active (nSelectIn) being set low, the 1284 idle phase is being

aborted and the interface returns to Compatibility Mode.

Peripheral Logic High (+ 5V)

Set high to indicate that all other signals sourced by the printer are in valid state. Set low to indicate the

printer is off.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces367260071‐001A

n.a. (nInit)

Compatibility Mode: Pulsed low in conjunction with 1284 Active low to reset the interface and force to

return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.

Negotiation Phase: Set HIGH.

Reverse Data Transfer Set HIGH.

Phase:

nDataAvail (NFault)

Compatibility Mode: Set low to indicate that an internal printer error has occurred.

Negotiation Phase: Set high to acknowledge 1284 compatibility. In Nibble or Byte Mode it is then set low

to indicate printer-to-host data is available following host setting HostBusy (nAutoFd)

high.

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Set low to indicate that printer is ready to send to host. Then used to

Phase: send data bits 0 then 4.

Byte Mode: Used to indicate that data is available.

Reverse Idle phase: Used to indicate that data is available.

nDataAvail (NFault)

Compatibility Mode: Set low to indicate that an internal printer error has occurred.

Negotiation Phase: Set high to acknowledge 1284 compatibility. In Nibble or Byte Mode it is then set low

to indicate printer-to-host data is available following host setting HostBusy (nAutoFd)

high.

Reverse Data Transfer Nibble Mode: Set low to indicate that printer is ready to send to host. Then used to

Phase: send data bits 0 then 4.

Byte Mode: Used to indicate that data is available.

Reverse Idle phase: Used to indicate that data is available.

1284 Active (NSelectIn)

Compatibility Mode: Set low by host to select printer.

Negotiation Phase: Set high in conjunction with Host Busy being set low to request a 1284 mode.

Reverse Data Transfer Set high to indicate that bus direction is printer to host. Set low to terminate 1284

Phase: mode and set bus direction host to printer.

Reverse Idle Phase: Same as Reverse Data Transfer phase.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces368260071‐001A

Interface Timing

Timing and Handshaking depend upon the connection mode.

Figure 145. Mode Centronics

Our Centronics mode supports the BUSY-WHILE-STROBE busy signal timing and ACK-INBUSY as

BUSY-ACK relationship.

Legend Time interval Min. Max.

A Data Setup Time 1.0

B Strobe pulse width 1.0 500

C Data hold time 1.0 all times in µs

t Busy while Strobe 0.25 1.0

a Ack in Busy 0 2.5

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces369260071‐001A

Mode IEEE 1284

Figure 146. Mode IEEE 1284

The Serial Interface

This printer provides the RS-232/C serial interfaces. The interface mode is selected via menu.

● Transmission Type

Data is sent and received in start/stop (asynchronous) transmission.

● Character Format

Each character is transmitted in the following format:

1 START BIT + 8 DATA BITS + 1 PARITY BIT + 1 STOP BIT

The least significant bit of the data bits is sent first after the start bit. The number of data bits is selected

via menu. The parity bit, when present, follows the data bits. The start bit is a logical “0” and the stop bit

is a logical “1”. The start and stop bits are used as character framing bits.

● Printer Connector

Male DB9 or equivalent connector.

● Drive Capability

Max. 50 feet (15 m) for all supported data rates. The RS-422/A interface is effective up to 1200 m.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixB‐Interfaces370260071‐001A

Serial Interface Signals

The following table lists the RS-232/C serial interface signals:

Local Remote

Connect. Connect.

Signal Name Pin Number Source Source Description

SIGNAL 5 – – Always connected to the 0 Volts of the

GROUND Power Supply

TXD 3 Printer Printer Transmitted Data Signal (an output from

printer). A MARK condition is held during

IDLE communication state. An indeterminate

state is present when printer is powered off.

RXD 2 Host Data Set Received data signal (an input to printer).

RTS 7 Printer Printer Request to Send Signal (an output from

printer). Active HIGH level signal. It is HIGH

until the printer is powered off, then an

indeterminate state is present .

CTS 8 Data Set Active HIGH level signal indicates that the

host or data set is ready to receive data from

the printer.

DSR 6 Data Set Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the

host or data set is ready to be connected to

the printer and is ready for data transfer.

DCD 1 Data Set Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the

host is transmitting or the data set is r

receiving the Data Carrier signal.

2nd RTS 9 Printer Functionally equivalent to the DTR signal.

DTR 4 Printer Printer Data Terminal Ready. Normally HIGH (ON).

Indicates that the printer is ready to initiate a

connection.

LAN Interface Port

1. Ethernet 10/100BaseT Connector

2. Green 10/100Mbit/sec. Transmission Speed LED

3. Yellow Traffic LED

LED Indicators

The LED indicator modes are described in the following table:

LED Status Description

Yellow LED Unlit Transmission speed at 10Mbit/sec.

Lit Transmission speed at 100Mbit/sec.

Green LED Blinks Transmitting or receiving packets from the network.

USB Interface Port

USB 2.0 full speed 12/Mbit/sec. interface.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference371260071‐001A

Appendix C. Network Interface Technical Reference

Network Configuration Parameters

IP Address Assignment

Fixed: Assigns the static or fixed IP address.

DHCP: Assigns the dynamic IP address (DHCP protocol).

Default value is DHCP.

Fixed and DHCP assignments of IP addresses are supported. On most networks, you will want to assign a

permanent IP address and disable DHCP.

IP Address

These values set the IP Address. The address is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal

values are divided by points in four fields.

Each field ranges between 0 and 255.

Default is 127.000.000.000.

Subnet Mask

These values set the Subnet Mask number. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the

decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.

Default is 255.255.254.000.

Default Gateway

These values set the Default Gateway address. This address is represented by a decimal notation where the

decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.

Default is 000.000.000.000.

The gateway address tells the printer which router or gateway to use to access other subnets or hosts.

Simply add your router’s IP address as the default gateway. All packets destined for other subnets will be

forwarded to the default gateway for delivery to the destination host.

Host Name

The host is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP. This function allows creating the name

of the host using a 14-character string.

Default is PTX_xxxxxx where xxxxxx are the last 6-digits of the MAC address...

Workgroup Name

The workgroup is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP in Windows. This function allows

creating the name of the workgroup using a 14-character string.

Default is Workgroup.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference372260071‐001A

SMTP Service

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) allows a mail server address to be entered into the printer

configuration to send automated e-mail notifications with printer alert conditions.

Disabled: Disables the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service, that is disables the

reception/transfer/error service of the e-mail.

Enabled: Enables the SMTP service, that is it enables the reception/transfer/error service of the e-

mail.

Default is Disabled.

Mail Server Address

These values set the mail server address. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the

decimal values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.

Default is 000.000.000.000.

Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.

E-mail Address (Receiver)

This function allows writing the e-mail address where you can notify the failures using a 48-character

string. Default is an empty string.

Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.

E-mail Address (Sender)

This function allows to write the sender e-mail address using a 48-character string.

Default is an empty string.

Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.

Location

You can enter the physical location of the printer into this field.

Contact

You can enter a network support contact’s name and phone number into this field.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference373260071‐001A

Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the Internal Webpage

Configuration Password

The Printronix S828's configuration settings can be protected by a password to keep unauthorized users

from making changes. When you try to submit any Printronix S828 configuration change, you will be asked

for your user name and password. At the prompt, enter the default user name = root and default

password = root, unless you have setup another user name and password with root privileges.

Storing and Saving Settings

When settings are configured on the Printronix S828 and the SUBMIT button on the related page has been

pressed, you will be reminded to Reboot the printer to ensure the latest settings are in use. To reset the

Printronix S828, go to the Home page, enter the Power On Reset page, and Click on the REBOOT

PRINTER button.

Managing Multiple Printers Using the Remote Printer

Management Utility

The Remote Printer Management Utility (RPMU) is a software tool for network administrators that allows

the configuration and control of Printronix S828 printers remotely over a LAN. With this tool the installed

printers can be controlled, configured and organized easily. The main features are:

Device Discovery - Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.

Printer Organization - Printers connected to the network can be organized into logical groups in a

hierarchically structured tree.

Printer Status Report - Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.

Printer Configuration - Printers may be configured as needed from the administrators workstation.

Change the configuration of single printers, or simultaneously change the configuration of multiple

printers in your enterprise, anywhere, and anytime.

Firmware Updating - Provides a firmware download function to upgrade the printer's firmware.

Remote Operator Panel Management - Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected

printer at the administrators workstation that allows performing all functions normally achieved pressing

the operator panel keys. The RPMU also provides the basic status management for third-party printers

compliant to the standard MIB objects. Visit our website to download this free software utility program.

Network Interface Summary

Table 12. Network Interface Summary

INSTALLATION INTEGRATION

Network speed / connection 10/100 BASET

Auto-detection 10/100 network speed Yes

Manual network speed selection No

Parallel interface free Yes

Network configuration through printer operator panel Yes

Web page network setting configuration Yes

Web page login password protection Yes

Web page default user-id and default password Root, Root

Windows Port Monitor and Drivers Yes, download from www.Printronix.com

NIC configuration printout Yes

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference374260071‐001A

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)

DHCP Yes

WINS Yes

DDNS Yes

SYSTEM / OS

IBM System i OS 400 Yes

IBM pSeries® AIX Yes

Sun Solaris Yes

Unix Yes

Linux® Yes

Windows 95,98,2000,NT,XP, 2003 Server Yes

Windows VISTA, Win7, Win8, Win10 Yes

NETBIOS over TCP Yes

NETBEUI No

Novell Netware No

OS2 No

MacIntosh / Apple EtherTalk No

PRINTING METHODS

Raw Port 9100 Yes

LPD/LPR Port 515 Yes

LPR print queue name Any name (PR1, d1PRN, etc.) can be used.

IPDS Port 5100 Yes (with IPDS option on some models)

Interleaved multi-protocol communications Yes

Hot Interface switching Yes between Parallel and LAN interfaces

Hot Port switching Yes between Raw 9100, LPR/LPD 515,

and IPDS 5100 (with IPDS option on some models)

Multiple internal print server queues No

String substitutions No

String before/after job No

DATASTREAMS

S828 ASCII native Yes

ASCII text and single byte escapes Yes

IBM Proprinter III emulation Yes (on some models)

IBM Personal Printer 2391 emulation Yes (on some models)

IBM Proprinter III emulation Yes (on some models)

IBM Personal Printer 2381 emulation Yes (on some models)

Epson FX series emulation Yes (on some models)

Epson - FX emulation Yes (on some models)

IPDS Yes (with IPDS option on some models. See

“Intelligent Printer Data Stream,” for

application program compatibility considerations)

PRINTER SERVER FACILITIES SUPPORT

PSF AIX Yes

PSF OS400 Yes

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference375260071‐001A

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)

PSF MVS™ Yes

PSF VSE Yes

PSF VM Yes

NETWORK MANAGEMENT

S828 Remote Printer Management Utility Yes, download from www.Printronix.com

IBM NPM Yes (generic printer)

HP JetAdmin Yes (generic printer)

E-mail SMTP Yes

Internal Web page Yes

PRINTER STATUS AND ERROR REPORTING

Ready Yes

Not ready Yes

Paper out Yes

Paper jam Yes

Cover open Yes

Machine check (carriage fault, ribbon blocked...) Yes

NETWORK CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (see above)

LINK LAYER

Ethernet II Yes

802.2 Yes

802.3 Yes

2/SNAP Yes

Link disconnect (no data timeout) 15 second fixed setting

PROTOCOLS

IP Yes

TCP Yes

UDP Yes

ARP Yes

RARP Yes

SMP Yes

Telnet Yes

DHCP Yes

DDNS Yes

WINS Yes

BOOTP Yes

FTP Yes

TFTP Yes

ICMP Yes

LPR/LPD Yes

DHCP Yes

SNMP Yes

SMTP Yes

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixC–NetworkInterfaceReference376260071‐001A

Table 12. Network Interface Summary (cont.)

Direct Socket Printing Yes

HTTP Yes

PING Yes

SNMP Yes

MIB II (RFC 1514) Yes (see note)

Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514) Yes

Printer MIB (RFC1759) Yes

S828 Private MIB Yes

Reverse Telnet No

PROS No

IPP No

SLPv2 No

HARDWARE

RISC processor Yes

Flash memory 4MB

RAM 16MB

Attachment connector type RJ-45

Network traffic led Yes (green)

Network speed led Yes (yellow)

FIRMWARE UPGRADE

Firmware upgrade over network Yes

Firmware upgrade through parallel interface Yes

Note: All relevant parts of MIB-II (RFC1231) required to support HP JetAdmin are implemented.

● The following IP table group OIDs are not implemented: ipForwarding, ipDefaultTTL , ipInReceives

,ipInHdrErrors,ipInAddrErrors, ipForwDatagrams, ipInUnknownProtos, ipInDiscards, ipInDelivers,

ipOutRequests, ipOutDiscards, ipOutNoRoutes, ipReasmTimeout ,ipReasmReqds,

ipReasmOKs,ipReasmFails,ipFragOKs, ipFragFails, ipFragCreates

● The ipRouteTable OIDs are not implemented.

● The ipNetToMediaTable OIDs are not implemented.

● The icmp group OIDs are not implemented.

● The tcp group OIDs are not implemented.

● The udp group OIDs are not implemented.

● The snmp group OIDs are not implemented.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport377260071‐001A

Appendix D. LAN Interface MIB Support

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer.

Description MIB

prtButton 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 1

prtBaseCodeVersion 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 2

prtHtmlContact 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 3

prtRebootPrinter 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 4

prtRestoreToMfg 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 5

prtGetPrinterStatus 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 6

prtMenuLocked 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 7

prtPowerOnCycles 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 8

prtPowerOnMinutes 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 9

prtBarCodes 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 10

prtPageWithGraphics 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 11

prtHSDraftCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 12

prtDPCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 13

prtDPTextCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 14

prtNLQCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 15

prtBESTDraftCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 16

prtLQCharacters 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 17

prtPrintedPageNumber 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 18

prtLPD_Timeout 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 19

LPD_Reboot 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 1, 20

prtMenuUserMacro 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2

prtMenuUserMacroTable 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1

prtUserMacroEntry 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1

prtUserMacroIndex 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 1

prtUserMacroLineSpace 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 2

prtUserMacroLineSpaceLock 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 3

prtUserMacroLength 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 4

prtUserMacroTopOfForm 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 5

prtUserMacroSkiPover 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 6

prtUserMacroDraftMode 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 7

prtUserMacroFont 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 8

prtUserMacroPitch 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 9

prtUserMacroPitchLock 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 10

prtUserMacroLeftMargin 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 11

prtUserMacroRightMargin 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 12

prtUserMacroSlashZero 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 13

prtUserMacroPath 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 14

prtUserMacroTear 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 15

prtUserMacroImpact 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 16

prtUserMacroPerforSave 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 17

prtUserMacroGap 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 18

prtUserMacroTuningHor 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 19

prtUserMacroTuningVer 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 20

prtUserMacroIgnoreFF 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 21

prtUserMacroQuality 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 22

prtUserMacro1524Cpi 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 23

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport378260071‐001A

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)

Description MIB

prtUserMacroTearDelay 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 24

prtUserMacroQuiet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 25

prtUserMacroDBCS 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 26

prtUserMacroDBCS_Cpi 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 27

prtUserMacroDBCS_Lpi 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 28

prtUserMacroTH_Space 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 29

/* IPDS SETTINGS START */

prtUserMacroI_Pitch 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 30

prtUserMacroI_LineSpace 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 31

prtUserMacroI_RightMargin 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 32

prtUserMacroI_FormLength 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 33

prtUserMacroI_Font 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 34

prtUserMacroI_NLQ_Font 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 35

prtUserMacroI_HostFastDraft 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 36

prtUserMacroI_Nation 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 37

prtUserMacroI_Emulation 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 38

prtUserMacroI_MediaSizePriority 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 39

prtUserMacroI_BcMode 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 40

prtUserMacroI_GraMode 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 41

prtUserMacroFontLock 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 1, 42

/* IPDS SETTINGS END */

prtMenuConfig 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3

prtMenuConfigTable 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1

prtMenuConfigEntry 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1

prtMenuConfigMacroWork 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 1

prtMenuConfigIfType 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 2

prtMenuConfigEmulation 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 3

prtMenuConfigCharset 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 4

prtMenuConfigNation 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 5

prtMenuConfigAutoCR 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 6

prtMenuConfigAutoLF 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 7

prtMenuConfigIBM20CPI 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 8

prtMenuConfigBarcode 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 9

/* ANSI SETTINGS START */

prtMenuConfigA_CharSet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 10

prtMenuConfigA_CharTable 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 11

prtMenuConfigA_Nation 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 12

prtMenuConfigA_RIS_Enable 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 13

prtMenuConfigA_SI_SO_Control 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 14

prtMenuConfigA_AutoCR 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 15

prtMenuConfigA_PrimeOnDEL 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 16

prtMenuConfigA_ControlInDg 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 17

prtMenuConfigA_ExpandUp 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 18

prtMenuConfigA_AltGraph 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 19

prtMenuConfigA_8BitControl 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 20

prtMenuConfigA_ENQ_Code 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 21

prtMenuConfigA_SubSuperScript 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 22

prtMenuConfigA_ControlInESC 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 23

prtMenuConfigA_VT_NotSet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 24

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport379260071‐001A

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)

Description MIB

prtMenuConfigA_DoubleLF 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 25

prtMenuConfigA_AutoWrap 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 26

prtMenuConfigA_ClearMargin 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 27

prtMenuConfigA_Backup 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 28

prtMenuConfigA_GuardBar 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 29

/* ANSI SETTINGS END */

prtMenuConfigParType 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 30

prtMenuConfigParSelectIn 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 31

prtMenuConfigParDataBits 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 32

prtMenuConfigParDedicBuffer 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 33

prtMenuConfigSerType 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 34

prtMenuConfigSerBaudRate 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 35

prtMenuConfigSerDataBits 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 36

prtMenuConfigSerParity 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 37

prtMenuConfigSerProtocol 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 38

prtMenuConfigSerLocRem 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 39

prtMenuConfigSerDedicBuffer 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 40

prtMenuConfigBuzzer 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 45

prtMenuConfigSequence 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 46

prtMenuConfigRibbon 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 47

prtMenuConfigBarCodeDpi 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 48

prtMenuConfigTextDirect 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 49

prtMenuConfigGraphDirect 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 50

prtMenuConfigBarCodeDirect 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 51

prtMenuConfigGraphHighSpeed 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 52

prtMenuConfigPowerOnPath 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 53

prtMenuConfigMenuLanguage 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 54

prtMenuConfigLowerJamSensor 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 55

prtMenuConfigUpperJamSensor 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 56

prtMenuConfigTearAdjust 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 57

prtMenuConfigQuick 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 58

prtMenuConfigOverlay 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 59

prtMenuConfigA_AutoLF 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 60

prtMenuConfigD_G0_CharSet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 61

prtMenuConfigD_UP_CharSet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 62

prtMenuConfigD_AutoCR 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 63

prtMenuConfigD_AutoLF 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 64

prtMenuConfigD_AutoWrap 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 65

prtMenuConfigCondensed 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1, 66

printserver 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1

csystem 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 1

csystemVersion 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 1, 1

cinetd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2

cinetdnum 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 1

cinetdNumber 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1

cinetdlpd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2

cinetdDescr1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1

cinetdType1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport380260071‐001A

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)

Description MIB

cinetdUdp1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3

cinetdWait1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 4

cinetdInstance1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 5

cinetdUserID1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 6

cinetdProgram1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 7

cinetdProgram11 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 2, 8

cinetdftp 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3

cinetdDescr2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1

cinetdType2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 2

cinetdUdp2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3

cinetdWait2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 4

cinetdInstance2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5

cinetdUserID2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 6

cinetdProgram2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 7

cinetdProgram12 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 3, 8

cinetdtelnet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4

cinetdDescr3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 1

cinetdType3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 2

cinetdUdp3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 3

cinetdWait3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 4

cinetdInstance3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 5

cinetdUserID3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 6

cinetdProgram3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 7

cinetdProgram13 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 4, 8

cinetddipd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5

cinetdDescr4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 1

cinetdType4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 2

cinetdUdp4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 3

cinetdWait4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 4

cinetdInstance4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 5

cinetdUserID4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 6

cinetdProgram4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 7

cinetdProgram14 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 2, 5, 8

cservices 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3

cservnum 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 1

cservNumber 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 1, 1

cservftp 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2

cservDescr1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 1

cservPort1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 2

cservType1 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 2, 3

cservtelnet 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3

cservDescr2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 1

cservPort2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 2

cservType2 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 3, 3

cservlpd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4

cservDescr3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 1

cservPort3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 2

cservType3 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 4, 3

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport381260071‐001A

Table 13 List of the MIB of the printer (cont.)

Description MIB

cservdipd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5

cservDescr4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 1

cservPort4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 2

cservType4 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 3, 5, 3

cqueue 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 4

cinit 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5

cintAddr 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 1

cdefRout 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 3

cnetMask 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 2

cinitHost 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 4

cinitWorkg 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 5

cinitDescr 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 6

cinitBoot 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 5, 7

cprinter 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 6

cconfig 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7

csnmpd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1

csnmpdEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 1

csnmpdReadCommunity 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 2

csnmpdSetCommunity 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 3

csnmpdSetCommunityCrypt 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 1, 4

chttpd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 2

chttpdEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 2, 1

csamba 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 3

csambaEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 3, 1

cnovell 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4

cnovellEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 1

cnovellFrmType 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 2

cnovellNwServer 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 3

cnovellPrtName 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 4

cnovellQueueName 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 4, 5

csmtp 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5

csmtpEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 1

csmtpEmailAddr 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 2

csmtpSMTPAddr 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 3

csmtpTrap 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 4

csmtpEmailMittAddr 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 5, 6

csecurity 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6

csecUser 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 1

csecPwd 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 2

csecPwdCrypt 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 6, 3

cipds 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7

cipdsEnb 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7, 1

cipdsPort 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 1, 6345, 1, 1, 7, 7, 2

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixD–LanInterfaceMIBSupport382260071‐001A

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixE–TheRPMU383260071‐001A

Appendix E. The Remote Printer Management Utility

The Remote Printer Management Utility (RPMU) is a software tool for network administrators that allows the

configuration and control of Printronix Company printers remotely connected to the Ethernet LAN.

With this tool the installed printers may be controlled, configured and organized easily.

The main features are:

Device Discovery Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.

Printer Organization The printers connected to the network can be organized into logical

groups in a hierarchically structured tree.

Printer Status Report Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.

Printer Configuration The remotely connected printers may be configured as needed from

the administrators workstation.

Firmware Updating Provides a firmware downloading function to upgrade both the base

and the LAN card firmware.

Remote Operator Panel Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected

Management printer at the administrators workstation that allows to perform all

functions normally achieved pressing the operator panel keys.

The Remote Printer Management Utility also provides the basic status management for third-party printers

compliant to the standard MIB objects.

Operating System Compatibility

The Remote Printer Management Utility is a Java™ based application and can be run on any platform

supporting the Java Run Time Environment version 1.6 or newer.

Software Installation and Documentation

The Remote Printer Management Utility software and Administrators Manual can be downloaded from our

website at : www.printronix.com

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixE–TheRPMU384260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixF–PrinterDriverSupport385260071‐001A

Appendix F. Print Driver Support

Microsoft Windows drivers, IBM pSeries AIX color files, and IBM System i workstation customization objects

can be downloaded from our website: www.Printronix.com

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixF–PrinterDriverSupport386260071‐001A

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixG‐ApplicationPaperSourceinIPDS387260071‐001A

Appendix G. Application Paper Source Selection

Application-controlled paper-source selection

This section describes the identifiers to use in selecting the various available paper sources on the S828

printer for key IPDS applications. These selections will cause the appropriate forms path selection

commands to be sent to the printer from the host applications.

PSF usage - z/OS and System i

In the z/OS® PSF's (PSF/MVS, PSF/VSE, and PSF/VM), the desired paper source is identified in the

FORMDEF, using the appropriate Media ID number as defined in the following sections. The FORMDEF

can also be used in System i™ PSF and uses these same Media ID numbers.

Paper source identification (media IDs)

Continuous forms or combination forms feeding: “Continuous Forms Feeding” uses either the front

forms path or the rear forms path. The front path uses the forms that are fed into the front of the printer,

and utilize the forms tractor installed in the standard (default) Front Push configuration when the optional

second tractor is not installed. The standard (default) tractor becomes the rear tractor only when the

optional second tractor is installed. In this condition the optional second tractor becomes the front tractor.

“Combination Forms Feeding” applies to the dual continuous forms (both front push and rear push path in

use) printer configuration.

This is the common usage mode for the S828. These identifiers should be used in all configurations.

In this configuration, the S828 paper sources are identified by the host application as follows:

Front Media ID = 1

Rear Media ID = 2

The S828 may be run in native (S828) mode or in an emulation mode (something other than S828).

Creating form definitions (FORMDEFs)

In z/OS and AIX: Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) can be used to create Form Definitions in the z/OS

and AIX® environments.

In System i: System i supports user specification of a Form Definition with the PRTAFPDTA command

and DEVTYPE=*AFPDS. Support for user named Form Definitions in the Printer File is included in System

i V3R2 and V3R7 or later releases.

System i media selection (other than FORMDEF)

In System i, selecting the input media source requires a combination of two Printer File parameters, Form

Feed (FORMFEED) and Source Drawer (DRAWER). The following selection parameters should be used

whether the printer is configured in S828 or emulation (4230/42x4) mode:

Front CF: FORMFEED (*CONT) See notes 1 & 2)

Rear CF: FORMFEED (2) (See notes 1 & 2)

Note: The combination of settings with Automatic Eject = Enabled and Automatic Restore = Disabled is not

recommended.

Notes:

1. In OS/400® Version 3 Release 2 and Version 3 Release 7, the FORMFEED parameter has been

enhanced to support explicit selection of the rear continuous form input source as follows:

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixG‐ApplicationPaperSourceinIPDS388260071‐001A

Rear CF: FORMFEED (*CONT2)

In this case, the AS/400® is aware that the Rear Continuous Forms is in fact a continuous form feed.

Therefore a drawer parameter is not required and the Forms Alignment message can be issued.

2. When you are switching from one continuous forms path to the other, printed output must be manually

torn off and removed from the printer before the first forms path can be parked. For this reason, you

may want to use the FORM keyword in the AS/400 Printer File to alert the operator to remove any

printer output before a job using a different forms path is sent.

Use of 'FORMS' parameters - z/OS and System i

For continuous forms printers with only a single continuous forms paper source, forms were specified

using FORMS parameters in JCL or, for the AS/400, the FORMTYPE parameter. This method can still be

used to have the operator change to the correct forms for the job. But it cannot be used to cause the

printer to switch between the Front and Rear continuous forms sources.

Using S828 with System i Host Print Transform

AS/400 Host Print Transform (HPT) provides two objects that allow you to use the multiple paper sources

available on the S828 printer.

The first is *IBM4247DUAL. This object provides support for the two tractor feeds, with DRAWER (1)

meaning the front tractor feed and DRAWER (2) meaning the rear tractor feed.

Front Continuous Forms: DRAWER (2)

Rear Continuous Forms: DRAWER (4)

Support that includes this enhancement to the HPT objects can also be added to V4R1 or V4R2 by

applying a PTF. For information, see the Euro I Info APAR, number II1523.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixH389260071‐001A

Appendix H. S828 Bar Code and OCR Printing Options

This appendix contains information about the options that are available for printing bar codes and Optical

Character Recognition (OCR) characters. The bar code charts detail the element (bar/space) width

options, the wide-to-narrow element ratios, the magnification percentages, and the characters printed per

inch plus whether the bar codes can be printed in low-contrast or high-contrast modes. Low-contrast mode

provides the best throughput, while high-contrast mode results in the best bar code printing quality.

The OCR section contains the Optical Character Recognition symbol subsets that can be printed.

Bar Code Printing Options Charts

Keep the following statements in mind when printing bar codes.

● All bar codes printed by the S828 Printer can print in high-contrast mode. Not all of them, however, can

print in low-contrast mode. If you specify low-contrast mode for a bar code that is not supported in that

mode, the printer will not return an error but will default to high-contrast mode instead.

● Vertically-rotated bar codes may not consistently meet bar/space width specifications. Users should test

for application suitability.

● Bar codes printed in low-contrast mode may not consistently meet specifications. Users should test for

application suitability.

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixH390260071‐001A

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixH391260071‐001A

Table 14. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)

Table 15. Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing

OCR Symbols

The S828 prints a comprehensive set of OCR-A and OCR-B characters derived from standards developed

by the International Standards Organization (ISO) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

All OCR character shapes produced by the S828 Printer are not identical with the shapes defined in these

standards. Users should test OCR printing with their scanning equipment to verify satisfactory

performance.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixH392260071‐001A

OCR Scanning

Printronix Company has tested the following OCR symbol subsets for readability:

Table 16. OCR Symbol Subsets

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout393260071‐001A

Appendix I. Configuration Menu Lockout

Configuration Menu Lockout should be used by the application programmer or printer operator to lock the

Configuration Menu when you want to prevent a casual operator from changing parameter values that

have been set for print jobs.

To set Configuration Menu Lockout:

1. Press ON LINES if the READY indicator is on. The printer goes to the NOT READY state.

2. In the NOT READY state, press and hold ALTERNATE + MACRO + ONLINE keys in the same time.

The printer displays MENU LOCKED.

3. To unlock the Configuration Menu repeat the step 1 and 2. The printer display MENU UNLOCKED.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout394260071‐001A

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout395260071‐001A

Appendix J. Addendum (Bar Codes)

The following chapter integrates the Bar Code information already present in this manual adding the

Intelligent Mail Barcode explanation with examples in different emulations.

Furthermore it describes some features in specific Emulation Commands present in the firmware but not

described in the previous chapters.

Bar Code Mode

The S828 printer has three different Bar Code Modes selectable in the Power-on Configuration Setup.

1) Native selection enables bar code printing using :

● The Native commands as indicated in chapter 2 and also in this chapter as examples

● MTPL commands as indicated later on in this chapter.

2) Alt.1 selection enables bar code printing using :

● EPSON or IBM commands as indicated in chapter 1.

3) Alt.2 selection enables bar code printing using:

● SEIKOSHA commands as indicated later on in this chapter.

The S828 can print Bar Code using also :

● ANSI commands as indicated in chapter 3 (see example in this chapter)

● IPDS (see example in this chapter)

USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state

The S828 can print the USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state in different emulations.

The 4-statebarcode data must contains only ASCII numeric (from 0 to 9) and must be converted into only 0,

1, 2 or 3. Each number represents one of the four possible bars.

The Intelligent Mail barcode is a 65-bar Postal Service™ barcode used to sort and track letters and flats. It

allows mailers to use a single barcode to participate in multiple Postal Service programs simultaneously,

expands mailers’ ability to track individual mail pieces, and provides greater mail stream visibility.

The Intelligent Mail barcode consists of a 20-digit tracking code (Barcode Identifier, Service Type Identifier,

Mailer Identifier, and Serial Number) and a Routing Code (ZIP Code™) field of up to 11 digits.

An encoder converts the digits into a 65-character string representing the bars of the IMb® tracking code,

EXAMPLE:

Service Type ID of 270 (First-Class Mail®, Intelligent Mail Full-Service option, with IMb Tracing® service,

no address correction), Mailer ID 123456, uniquely identified by Serial Number 200800001, going to ZIP

Code 98765-4321(01), is encoded like this:

Digit String:

0027012345620080000198765432101

Intelligent Mail barcode encoder > Encoded string (T=Tracker, F=Full Bar, A=Ascender, D=Descender):

TTFAFDADTFFFADTAFAFTTDATDFAAFTDAFDFDFDATFDFTDDDDFADFFDADDTDDTTDAT

More information on website: https://postalpro.usps.com/mailing/intelligent-mail-barcode

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout396260071‐001A

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with Native Commands Mode

(Native Bar Code Mode)

DC4 DC4 ESC ! h “ f EM

UPPS Bar Code Selection.

ASCII Code DC4 DC4 ESC ! h “ f F r EM

Hexadecimal Value X'14' X'14' X'1B' X'21' h X’22’ f F r X’19’

Decimal Value 20 20 27 33 h 34 f F r 25

h = Bar Code Height at n/6”, 1 < h < 30

f = Readable character printing

f = 0 printing disabled

f = 1 printing enabled, characters below barcode, justified position

f = 21 printing enabled, characters above barcode, justified position

f = 81 printing enabled, characters below barcode, middle position

f = A1 printing enabled, characters above barcode, middle position

F = Font selection for the printable characters

0 Selected font by r value

1 Default font for text

1 Special font for OCR-A o OCR-B bar codes according to the t value

3 Special font for OCR-A bar codes

4 Special font for OCR-B bar codes

r = Bar code rotation

r Selection

0 No rotation

1 Rotation at 0°

2 Rotation at 90°

3 Rotation at 180°

4 Rotation at 270°

EM = Check sequence terminator

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout397260071‐001A

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with Epson/IBM Emulations Commands

(Alt. 1 Bar Code Mode)

See chapter 1, pages 54, 55 for details of these commands.

Remark: these commands are not handled in DEC emulations.

ESC [ v n m

Sets Barcode parameters. (IBM -Epson)

ASCII Code ESC [ vnm

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X'76' nm

Decimal Value 27 91 118 nm

Set barcode parameters according to the table below. Parameter values that are not supported result in

the command being ignored.

n Parameter Description m values

0 Barcode style IMB 4-state X ‘22’, 34 dec

2 Human readable line 0=disable

1, 21 =enable below barcode

81, A1 =enable above barcode

8 Rotation and HRC font 0.1=no rotation and current font for HRC

2=90 3=180 4=270 and special HRC font

11 HRC font for rotate barcode 3=OCRA 4=OCRB

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with MTPL Commands

(Native Bar Code Mode)

ESC [ 9 SP k CR

Sets bar code parameters (BC).

ASCII Code ESC [ 9 SP k CR

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' X’39’ X'20' X’6B’ X’0D’

Decimal Value 27 91 57 32 109 13

In next pages a specific sub-chapter describes the MTPL (Mannesmann-Tally Printer Language) commands

which can be handled by S828 printer.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout398260071‐001A

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with ANSI Emulation Commands

See chapter 3, pages 86 and 87 for details of these commands.

ESC [ p1; ; ; pn }

Sets bar code parameters (BC).

ASCII Code ESC [ p1; pn }

Hexadecimal Value X'1B' X'5B' p1 X'3B' pn X'7D'

Decimal Value 27 91 p1 59 pn 125

This command allows selection of the bar code characteristics such as style height, symbol rotation and so

on. The command ESC [3 t enables the bar code mode while ESC [0 t disables the mode.

p1: Bar code style

p1 FUNCTION

X ’33 34’, dec 48 49 IMB 4-state

p3: Human Readable Input (HRI)

p3 FUNCTION

0 Disables printing of the HRI

1 Enables printing of the HRI

p9: Rotation

p9 FUNCTION

0 0 degrees using current font

1 0 degrees using special HRI font

2 90 degrees using special HRI font

3 180 degrees using special HRI font

4 270 degrees using special HRI font

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout399260071‐001A

Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state with IPDS Emulation Commands

See chapter 5, pages 196 to 208 for details of these commands.

The BCDD (Bar Code Data Descriptor) has only one byte changed:

Decimal Hex Content Description

16 10 Bar Code Type

22 USPS Four.State Bar Code

Figure 147. Hex Dump of Intelligent Mail Bar Code in IPDS Commands Example

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout400260071‐001A

USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state Examples

The following are samples for USPS Intelligent Mail Bar Code 4-state printed with the S828 Printer with

related hex commands:

Figure 148. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Native Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

Figure 149. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in Epson/IBM Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout401260071‐001A

Figure 150. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in ANSI Commands Example

Figure 151. Intelligent Mail Bar Code in MTPL Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout402260071‐001A

Bar Codes handled in NATIVE Commands

(Native Bar Code Mode)

The S828 integrates in the firmware the handling of the Bar Codes with the NATIVE commands.

The complete and detailed information for these commands can be found on chapter 2 of this Programmer

Manual. Here are reported some examples how these commands work.

Figure 152. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout403260071‐001A

Figure 153. Hex Dump of example on figure 151

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout404260071‐001A

Figure 154. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout405260071‐001A

Figure 155. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout406260071‐001A

Figure 156. Bar Code Examples with NATIVE Commands Example (Bar Code Mode Native)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout407260071‐001A

Figure 157. Hex Dump of example on figures 154, 155, 156

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout408260071‐001A

Bar Codes handled in MTPL Commands

(Native Bar Code Mode)

The S828 integrates in the firmware a sub-set handling of the MTPL emulation Bar Codes commands.

The complete and detailed information for these commands can be found on specific MTPL Programmer

Manual available on web.

Bar Code Description

Before the data, which contain the Barcode information, are transmitted to the printer, the Barcode header

must be sent. Otherwise the standard parameter values are used (see section "Header Format"). In the

header, the printing parameters, the Barcode size and the Barcode Type are de-fined. This header only

needs to be transferred once, unless settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off.

Header Format Format: SUB [F] a [n] [;xyz] [;p] EM

[ ] Specification is optional

x, y unregarded at EAN/UPC-Barcode!

For Code 128 and EAN 128 (Type S+T) only the X parameter is valid. This is automatically used for the Y

parameter. The Z parameter is not evaluated.

Meaning of the characters:

SUB (hex.1A, dec.26) Start header

F Print feature

SP (hex. 20, dec. 32): HRI OFF, Normal Print, Double Pass, Unidirectional (def.)

! (hex. 22, dec. 34): HRI ON, Normal Print, Double Pass, Unidirectional

a ASCII a = "A"..."S" Barcode Types (def. “A”, see later on)

n ASCII n = "0"..."90" Barcode height in n/6 inch. At n="0" the Barcode height equals to 1/12 inch. (def. 1)

; ASCII Separation character

x ASCII x = "0"..."3" Width of the narrow bar (def.0 )

y ASCII y = "0"..."3" Width of the narrow space (def.0 )

z ASCII z = "0"..."3" Ratio of wide to narrow (def.0 )

p ASCII p = "0"…"9" Barcode orientation (def. 0, horizontal)

EM (hex.19, dec.25) End of header

Barcode Types

A = 2/5 matrix (default) B = 2/5 industrial C = 2/5 interleaved

D = Code 11 E = Code BCD matrix F = Code 39

G = Codabar H = EAN 8 with HRI I = EAN 8 without HRI

J = 2/5 matrix (default) K = EAN 13 with HRI L = EAN 13 without HRI

M = MSI/modified Plessey N = UPC A with HRI O = UPC A without HRI

P = UPC E with HRI Q = UPC E without HRI S = Code 128

T = EAN 128/GSI-128

Post Office Barcode Types

US Postnet Barcode = ESC [ 1 SP p

Planet Barcode = ESC [ 2 SP p <data> EM

KIX Barcode = ESC [ 2 SP k

Royal Mail Customer Barcode = ESC [ 1 SP k

USPS Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB) = ESC [ 9 SP k

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout409260071‐001A

MTPL Bar Codes Commands Examples

Figure 158. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout410260071‐001A

Figure 159. Bar Code Examples with MTPL Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout411260071‐001A

Figure 160. Hex Dump of example on figures 158, 159

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout412260071‐001A

Bar Codes handled in SEIKOSHA Commands

(Alt. 2 Bar Code Mode)

The S828 partially integrates in the firmware a sub-set handling of the SEIKOSHA BP-9000 Bar Codes

specific commands.

The complete and detailed information for these can be found in specific SEIKOSHA BP-9000 programmer

manual available on web.

# Function Bar Code Commands

1. Bar code type DC4 DC4 T n

2. Element width DC4 DC4 E n1 n2

3. Bar code height DC4 DC4 H n

4. Setting HRI on and off DC4 DC4 I n

5. HRI font DC4 DC4 F n

6. Check character DC4 DC4 C n

7. Starting the bar code data sequence ESC SI

8. Ending the bar code data seqence ESC SO

9. Bar code data sequence DC4 DC4 B n d1 d2 ... dk

10. Printing density DC4 DC4 D n

11. Guard bar expansion DC4 DC4 G n

12. Start and stop characters DC4 DC4 N n1 n2

13. Bar code rotational angle DC4 DC4 R n

14. Disabling HRI of the start and stop characters DC4 DC4 S n

15. Value input mode DC4 DC4 V n

16. Initializing the bar code mode DC4 DC4 @

Bar Code Type (n)

0 Industrial 2 of 5 5 Code39 10 UPC-A

1 Interleaved 2 of 5 6 Code93 11 UPC-E

2 Matrix 2 of 5 7 Code128 12 Postnet

3 Codabar 8 EAN-8

4 Code11 9 EAN-13

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout413260071‐001A

SEIKOSHA Commands Bar Codes Examples



Figure 161. Bar Code Examples with SEIKOSHA Commands (Bar Code Mode Alt. 1)



ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

AppendixIConfigurationMenuLockout414260071‐001A



Figure 162. Hex Dump of example on figure 161

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Notices415260071‐001A

Notices

These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ricoh Co., Ltd., in the United States, other

countries, or both:

● IBM

● Infoprint Solutions

● Ricoh

● Advanced Function Printing

● AFP

● Intelligent Printer Data Stream

● IPDS

These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both:

● AIX

● AS400

● i5/OS

● IBM

● iSeries

● MVS

● OS/400

● Print Services Facility

● PSF

● System i

● z/OS

● zSeries

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks

of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Intel, Intel Inside (logos), MMX, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States,

other countries, or both.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Notices416260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Notices417260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

Notices418260071‐001A

This page is intentionally left blank.

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

CustomerSupport419260071‐001A

Customer Support

Printronix Customer Support Center

IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix

Customer Support Center:

• Model number

• Serial number (located on the back of the printer)

• Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)

• Configuration printout:

Press the ON LINE ke

to take the

rinter OFF LINE

Press the PROGRAM ke

PRINT OUT? NO Is displayed

Press the → ke

PRINT OUT? YES The PROGRAM SETUP

PRINTOUT is printed

Press the ↓ key until PRINT STATS? NO Is displayed

Press the → ke

PRINT OUT? YES The USAGE STATISTICS

DATA PRINTOUT is printed

Press the ↓ key until CONFIG MENU NO Is displayed

Press the → key to displa

CONFIG MENU YES

Press the ↓ ke

PRINT OUT? NO Is displayed

Press the → ke

PRINT OUT? YES The CONFIGURATION

SETUP PRINTOUT is

rinted

Press the PROGRAM ke

Press the TEAR ke

and tear off the

rintout at the

erforation

• Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?

• Description of the problem (be specific)

• Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing these samples

may be required)

Americas (714) 368-2686

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114

China (86) 800-999-6836

http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx

Printronix Supplies Department

Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.

Americas (800) 733-1900

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4100

China (86) 400-886-5598

http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx

ProgrammerManual PTX‐S828

CustomerSupport420260071‐001A

Corporate Offices

Printronix, LLC.

6440 Oak Canyon Rd, Suite 200

Irvine, CA 92618

U.S.A.

Phone: (714) 368-2300

Fax: (714) 368-2600

Printronix Inc.

c/o Printronix Nederland BV

Bijsterhuizen 11-38

6546 AS Nijmegen

The Netherlands

Phone: (31) 24 6489489

Fax: (31) 24 6489499

Printronix Schweiz GmbH

3Changi Business Park Vista

#04-05 AkzoNobelHouse

Singapore 486051

Phone: (65) 6548 4100

Fax: (65) 6548 4111

Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd

Room 903, 9thFloor

No. 199, North Xizang Road

200070 Shanghai P.R. China

Phone: (86) 400 886 5598

Fax: (8621) 61171256

Printronix India PvtLtd

B-808/809, BSEL Tech Park 8thFloor, Sector 30A

VashaiNaviMumbai 400705 India

Toll Free No.: 1800 102 7896 Fax: (9211) 4158 5555

Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com



SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

This manual refers to various company and products by their trade names.

In most of the cases, these designations are claimed as trademarks or

registered tramarkers by their respective companies.

260071-001A

260071 001A_PM_S828NEW PTX_PRM_S828_260071 001 PTX PRM S828

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001 PTX_PRM_S828_260071-001

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation